This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
TYPE OF ACTIVITY'
REFER TO SECTION N.
TITLE COMPLETION DESIGN MANUAL
DISTRIBUTION LIST Eni - Agip Division Italian Districts Eni - Agip Division Affiliated Companies Eni - Agip Division Headquarter Drilling & Completion Units STAP Archive Eni - Agip Division Headquarter Subsurface Geology Units Eni - Agip Division Headquarter Reservoir Units Eni - Agip Division Headquarter Coordination Units for Italian Activities Eni - Agip Division Headquarter Coordination Units for Foreign Activities
NOTE: The present document is available in Eni Agip Intranet (http://wwwarpo.in.agip.it) and a CD-Rom version can also be distributed (requests will be addressed to STAP Dept. in Eni - Agip Division Headquarter) Date of issue:
B A @ ? >
Issued by M. Bassanini 28/06/99 REVISIONS PREP'D C. Lanzetta 28/06/99 CHK'D A. Galletta 28/06/99 APPR'D
The present document is CONFIDENTIAL and it is property of AGIP It shall not be shown to third parties nor shall it be used for reasons different from those owing to which it was given
2 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL OBJECTIVES FUNCTIONS OF A COMPLETION MANUAL UPDATING, AMENDMENT, CONTROL & DEROGATION
8 12 13 13
2.1. 2.2. INTRODUCTION CHARACTERISTICS OF RESERVOIR ROCKS 2.2.1. Porosity 2.2.2. Permeability 2.2.3. Relative Permeability 2.2.4. Wettabilty 2.2.5. Fluid Distribution 2.2.6. Fluid Flow In The Reservoir 2.2.7. Effects Of Reservoir Characteristics 2.2.8. Reservoir Homogeneity HYDROCARBON DATA 2.3.1. Oil Property Correlation RESERVOIR/PRODUCTION FORECAST 2.4.1. Inflow Perfomance 2.4.2. Reservoir Simulation For IPR Curves 2.4.3. IPR Selection 2.4.4. Outflow Performance 2.4.5. Flow Rate Prediction
14 14 14 14 15 16 17 18 24 27 28 28 29 31 42 44 46 55
3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. INTRODUCTION 3.1.1. Types of Tests DST OBJECTIVE DST STRING RESERVOIR CHARACTERISTICS 3.4.1. Pressure Build-Up Analysis 3.4.2. Basics Of DST Operations 3.4.3. Common Test Tools Description 3.4.4. Tools Utilised With Permanent Packer Systems 3.4.5. Sub-Sea Test Tools Used On Semi-Submersibles 3.4.6. Deep Water Tools 3.4.7. Downhole Pressure Recording
60 60 63 64 69 69 77 77 80 80 81 82
3 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
3.5. WELL PRODUCTION TEST OBJECTIVES 3.5.1. Periodic Tests 3.5.2. Productivity Or Deliverability Tests 3.5.3. Transient Tests
83 83 84 84
4.1. CASING DESIGN 4.1.1. Casing Profile 4.1.2. Casing Specifications 4.1.3. Casing Connections WELL DEVIATION SURVEYS CASING CEMENTING CONSIDERATIONS 4.3.1. Production Casing Cementing 4.3.2. Production Casing Cement Evaluation
87 87 88 89 89 90 90 91
WELL COMPLETION DESIGN
5.1. FACTORS INFLUENCING COMPLETION DESIGN 5.1.1. Reservoir Considerations 5.1.2. Mechanical Considerations 5.1.3. Safety Considerations RESERVOIR-WELLBORE INTERFACE 5.2.1. Open Hole Completions 5.2.2. Uncemented Liner Completions 5.2.3. Perforated Completions 5.2.4. Multi-Zone Completions CASING-TUBING INTERFACE 5.3.1. Packer Applications 5.3.2. Packer-Tubing Interfaces 5.3.3. Annulus Circulation TUBING-WELLHEAD INTERFACE 5.4.1. Tubing Hanger Systems 5.4.2. Xmas Trees 5.4.3. Metal-To-Metal Seals FUTURE CONSIDERATIONS 5.5.1. Stimulation 5.5.2. Formation Management 5.5.3. Well Servicing Techniques OPTIMISING TUBING SIZE 5.6.1. Reservoir Pressure 5.6.2. Flowing Wellhead Pressure 5.6.3. Gas-Liquid Ratio 5.6.4. Artificial Lift
94 94 96 96 97 97 98 100 101 104 106 107 108 109 109 115 115 117 118 118 119 121 123 123 123 124
4 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
6.1. 6.2. 6.3. DEVELOPMENT WELLS CONTRIBUTING FACTORS TO CORROSION FORMS OF CORROSION 6.3.1. Sulphide Stress Cracking (SSC) 6.3.2. Corrosion Caused By CO2 And Cl 6.3.3. Corrosion Caused By H2S, CO2 And ClCORROSION CONTROL MEASURES CORROSION INHIBITORS CORROSION RESISTANCE OF STAINLESS STEELS 6.6.1. Martensitic Stainless Steels 6.6.2. Ferritic Stainless Steels 6.6.3. Austenitic Stainless Steels 6.6.4. Precipitation Hardening Stainless Steels 6.6.5. Duplex Stainless Steel COMPANY DESIGN PROCEDURE 6.7.1. CO2 Corrosion 6.7.2. H2S Corrosion MATERIAL SELECTION 6.8.1. OCTG Specifications 6.8.2. DHE Specifications 6.8.3. Wellhead Specifications ORDERING SPECIFICATIONS
126 126 128 128 135 137 138 139 139 139 140 140 140 142 142 142 142 144 145 146 147 152
6.4. 6.5. 6.6.
7.1. 7.2. POLICIES THEORY 7.2.1. Mechanical Properties of Steel 7.2.2. Temperature 7.2.3. Tubing Movement/Stress Relationship WELL DATA. 7.3.1. Casing Profile/Geometry 7.3.2. Tubing Data 7.3.3. Bottom-hole Pressure 7.3.4. Temperatures (Static and Flowing) 7.3.5. Reservoir Fluids 7.3.6. Completion Fluid PRESSURE INDUCED FORCES 7.4.1. Piston Effect 7.4.2. Buckling Effect 7.4.3. Ballooning Effect 7.4.4. Temperature Effect EVALUATION OF TOTAL TUBING MOVEMENT
153 153 154 158 158 160 160 160 160 160 161 161 161 162 163 167 168 169
5 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
7.6. ANCHORED TUBING 7.6.1. Tubing Permitting Limited Motion 7.6.2. Packer Setting 7.7. TUBING LOAD CONDITIONS 7.7.1. Pressure Testing 7.7.2. Acid Stimulation 7.7.3. Fracturing 7.7.4. Flowing 7.7.5. Shut-In 7.7.6. Load Condition Summary TUBING SELECTION 7.8.1. Critical Factors 7.8.2. Tubing Size And Weight 7.8.3. Anchoring Systems TUBING CONNECTIONS 7.9.1. Policy 7.9.2. Class of Service 7.9.3. Selection Criteria 7.9.4. NACE And Proximity Definitions 7.9.5. CRA Connections 7.9.6. Connection Data
170 172 174 174 174 175 175 177 177 181 181 182 182 184 185 185 185 186 189 190 190 190 191 193 195 195 196 205
7.10. TUBING STRESS CALCULATIONS 7.10.1. Calculation Methods 7.10.2. Safety Factor 7.10.3. External Pressure Limit 7.10.4. Packer Load Limits 7.10.5. Example Manual Calculation 7.10.6. Example Computation
8.1. PACKERS 8.1.1. Selection Procedure 8.1.2. Selection Criteria 8.1.3. Well Classification 8.1.4. Packer Selection For Single String Completion 8.1.5. Single Selective Completion Packers SUB-SURFACE SAFETY VALVES 8.2.1. Policy 8.2.2. Applications 8.2.3. Wireline Retrievable Safety Valves 8.2.4. Surface Controlled Sub-Surface Safety Valves 8.2.5. Valve Type/Closure Mechanism Selection
206 207 207 209 209 217 223 223 223 223 224 224
Injection Lines 126.96.36.199.188.8.131.52. Impact On Completion Design 10.2. CONTROL/INJECTION LINE SELECTION 184.108.40.206.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 6 OF 295 ENI S.4.2.3. Underbalanced Perforating 220.127.116.11.A. HYDRAULIC PUMPING SYSTEMS 10.3.2.3.6.3. Tubing Conveyed Perforating GUN PERFORMANCE 9. Through-Tubing Hollow Carrier Guns 9. Operating Conditions Summary 10.4.p.1. 9.3.7. Impact On Completion Design 10.1.3.1.1.3.2. GAS LIFT 10.1. ROD PUMPS 10. Common Problems 10.4. ARTIFICIAL LIFT 10. Selective Nipple Configuration REVISION 0 225 225 225 226 228 230 230 231 233 236 237 238 239 8. PERFORATING 18.104.22.168. Through-Tubing Strip Guns 9.5. Encapsulation 8. Control/Injection Line Selection Procedure Flow Chart WIRELINE NIPPLE SELECTION 8.2. Control Lines 22.214.171.124.3.2. PLUNGER LIFT 10. Artificial Lift Considerations 250 251 253 254 254 256 259 259 260 262 262 265 265 265 268 268 270 272 .4. Firing Heads 9.2.6. Material Selection 8.4.2. SUMMARY ARTIFICIAL LIFT SELECTION CHARTS 10. Protectors 8. Impact On Completion Design 10. Fittings 126.96.36.199. API And Performance Data 188.8.131.52. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 8.3. 9. SCREW PUMP SYSTEMS 10. Common Problems 10.1. ESP Performance 10. Perforating Procedures 240 240 241 241 243 243 243 244 244 246 247 247 9.3. SHAPED CHARGE PERFORATING GUN TYPES 9.2.2. Wireline Conveyed Casing Guns 9.2. Tube Specifications 184.108.40.206. Impact On Completion Design 10.7. SCSSV Hydraulic Control fluid 8. Design Considerations And Comparisons 10.2. 10.1.1. Tapered Nipple Configuration 8.1. ELECTRICAL SUBMERISBLE PUMPS 10.3.
2.BIBLIOGRAPHY APPENDIX E .3.p.A. A.1.REPORT FORMS A.8. A.1.4. A. A.2. A.1. BARRIER PRINCIPLES 11.TUBING MOVEMENT/STRESS COMPUTER PROGRAMMES 287 289 292 294 . A. RISK ASSESSMENT 220.127.116.11.4.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 7 OF 295 ENI S. USE OF UNDERBALANCE COMPLETION FLUIDS 11. INITIAL ACTIVITY REPORT (ARPO 01) DAILY REPORT (ARPO 02) WASTE DISPOSAL MANAGEMENT REPORT (ARPO 06) PERFORATING REPORT (ARPO 07) GRAVEL PACK REPORT (ARPO 08) MATRIX STIMULATION/HYDRAULIC FRACTURE REPORT (APRO 09) WIRELINE REPORT (ARPO 11) PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE SURVEY REPORT (ARPO 12) WELL PROBLEM REPORT (ARPO 13) WELL SITUATION REPORT (ARPO 20) 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 APPENDIX B . POLICY 11. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 11.6. Completions 274 274 274 274 275 275 275 APPENDIX A .9. A.2.4.ABBREVIATIONS APPENDIX D . A. Well Testing 11. A.5.NOMENCLATURE FOR TUBING CALCULATIONS APPENDIX C .3. APPLICATION 11.
c. 1. This does not mean that the process is sequential and many decisions can be made from studies and analysis run in parallel. well servicing capabilities and completion life. The activities in each phase are illustrated in figure 1. For instance. The final conceptual design will be used as the basis for the detailed design process.a. The design process consists of three phases: • • • Conceptual Detailed design Procurement. INTRODUCTION PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL The purpose of this manual is to guide experienced engineers of all technical disciplines. This is vital in order to obtain the optimum completion design utilising the process described in this manual.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 8 OF 295 ENI S. at an early time. in the completion design process and its importance on well productivity. During this phase. hence profit. methodologies and rules that enable to operate uniformly and in compliance with the Corporate Company Principles.b and figure 1.1. Many of the decisions made by the various disciplines are interrelated and impact on the decisions made by other disciplines. figure 1. It is essential that this is an accurate statement including all the foreseen requirements. while providing all personnel involved in Drilling & Completion activities with common guidelines in all areas worldwide where Eni-Agip operates. The manual will provide the engineers within the various disciplines with a system to guide them through the process with the objectives of helping them make the key decisions and obtaining the optimum design to maximise productivity and. The approach to completion design must be interdiscipline. within the Eni-Agip Division and Affiliated Companies. The Corporate Standards in this manual define the requirements. have a large impact on costs and field profit. however. The conceptual design process guides the engineers through analysis and key questions to be considered.p. The process of well preparation and installation of completions is fully described in the ‘Completions Procedures manual’. still enables each individual Affiliated Company the capability to operate according to local laws or particular environmental situations. quality and costs. These in consequence. The final aim is to improve performance and efficiency in terms of safety. raised by the interrelated decisions. the decision on the well architecture may subsequently be changed due to the availability of well servicing or workover techniques. involving Reservoir Engineering. Agip Division STAP-M-1-P-7100 0 REVISION 1. the user will resolve many of the dilemmas. Petroleum Engineering. The conceptual design process begins at the field appraisal stage when a Statement Of Requirements (SOR) of the completion is produced. This. Production Engineering and Drilling Engineering. as it has a fundamental effect on the field final design and development.A. .
the statement of requirements need to reviewed and altered to modify the conceptual design for future wells.A.A . This provides a system of ongoing completion optimisation to suit changing conditions.p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 9 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION As more information is gleamed from further development wells and as conditions change. increased knowledge of the field and incorporate new technologies. Figure 1.Conceptual Completion Design Process .
Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 1.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 10 OF 295 ENI S.Detailed Completion Design Process .B .A.p.
Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 1.A.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 11 OF 295 ENI S.Procurement Process .C .p.
In conjunction with other wells. effectively contribute to the whole development plan reservoir plan. Achieve the optimum production rates reliably at the lowest capital and operating costs.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 12 OF 295 ENI S. These may be summarised as to safely provide maximum long term profitability. Figure 1. Be as flexible as possible for future operational changes in well function. This.d).p. Be as simple as possible to increase reliability. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 1. An expensive completion may derive more long term profit than a low cost completion but the initial capital costs will be higher (Refer to figure 1. Provide adequate safety in accordance with legislative or company requirements and industry common practices.A. in reality is not simple and many critical decisions are needed to balance long term and short term cash flow and sometimes compromises are made. however. Provide adequate maintenance and surveillance programmes.2.D . OBJECTIVES The fundamental objectives for a completion are: • • • • • • • 0 REVISION Achieve a desired (optimum) level of production or injection.Completion Design Versus Profitability .
CONTROL & DEROGATION The Corporate Standards in this manual define the requirements. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION On the other hand if the data available is not accurate. but are not concerned about production problems. Inhibiting scale or corrosion. . These main functional requirements must be built into the conceptual design and include: • • • • • • • 1.A. AMENDMENT.3. Producing single or multiple zones. while providing all personnel involved in Drilling & Completion activities with common guidelines in all areas worldwide where Eni-Agip operates. 1. Preventing hydrocarbon escape if there is a surface leak. Reservoir and geoscience groups often have to set plans and objectives for the field on well performance based on limited information. however. servicing. quality and costs. FUNCTIONS OF A COMPLETION The main function of a completion is to produce hydrocarbons to surface or deliver injection fluids to formations. optimising production. An inherent problem is that the Reservoir Engineering Department’s objectives do not coincide with the Completion Engineering Department’s in that Reservoir Engineering’s objectives are for the whole field performance whereas the Completion Group’s is to optimise for profit on a long term well by well basis which includes well servicing/workover. Protecting the casing from corrosion attack by well fluids. MANUAL UPDATING. Permanent downhole pressure monitoring. Perforating (underbalanced or overbalanced). Protecting the production casing from formation pressure.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 13 OF 295 ENI S. the estimate of some well performance and characteristics throughout the life of the well may be wrong and early workover or well intervention operations will impact on well profitability. The final aim is to improve performance and efficiency in terms of safety. well maintenance or detailed operations. in the early stages. methodologies and rules that enable to operate uniformly and in compliance with the Corporate Company Principles. pressure monitoring and reservoir maintenance. This. however a completion must also satisfy a great many other functions required for safety. still enables each individual Affiliated Company the capability to operate according to local laws or particular environmental situations.4.p. This is its primary function.
anhydrite and some highly cemented sandstones are impervious to movement of water. working with water filters. shales.A . developed the first relationship which described the flow through porous rock which is still used today.2. limestone or dolomite rocks. 2. Most commercial reservoirs have sandstone.1. oil or gas even although they may be quite porous. however some reservoirs even occur fractured shale. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 2. CHARACTERISTICS OF RESERVOIR ROCKS Porosity Porosity or pore space in reservoir rocks provides the container for the accumulation of oil and gas and gives the rock characteristic ability to absorb and hold fluids. a French engineer.1.2. Permeability Permeability is a measure of the ability of which fluid can move through the interconnected pore spaces of the rock. and varies inversely with the viscosity of the fluid flowing. 1cc of a 1cp viscosity fluid will flow each second 2 through a portion of rock 1cm in length and having a cross-section of 1cm . In a rock having a permeability of 1 Darcy. K= qµL A∆p Eq. RESERVOIR CONSIDERATIONS INTRODUCTION Oil and gas wells are expensive faucets that enable production of petroleum reservoirs or allow injection of fluids into an oil or gas reservoir. Darcy. 2. if the pressure across the rock is 1 atmosphere. Darcy’s Law states that the rate of flow through a given rock varies directly with permeability (measure of the continuity of inter-connected pore spaces) and the pressure applied.2.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 14 OF 295 ENI S. The purpose of this section is to consider the characteristics of reservoir fluids and the flow of these in the area around the wellbore to allow these parameters to be tied into the well completion design and well intervention/workover operational requirements.A. 2. 2. As pointed out in section 1. a completion conceptual design must take into account all the well objectives to produce the optimum design to maximise profitability. chalk.p.1. 2. Many rocks such as clays.2.
Relative permeability represents the ease at which one fluid flows through connecting pore spaces in the presence of other fluids. cp Flow length. psi Outlet pressure.p.3. If pressures to continue to decline. the relative permeability to oil is significantly greater when the rock is ‘water wet’. To understand this. In an oil-water system. Significant oil may still occupy the pores but cannot be recovered by primary production means as the permeability to oil has dropped to zero. The saturation of each fluid present affects the ease of fluid movement or relative permeability. assume a rock filled with only with oil at high pressure where gas has not been able to come out of solution: • • • • • All available space is taken up by the oil and only oil is flowing. stb/day Permeability. = = = = = = = = Flow rate. md 3 Flow rate. Flow of oil is reduced but gas saturation is too small for it to flow through the pores. . some lighter components of the oil will evolve as gas in the pore spaces. 2. This same principle governs the flow of oil in the presence of water. If reservoir pressure is allowed to decline.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 15 OF 295 ENI S.127 ×10 −3 where: q k A µ L p1 p2 B 2. gas saturation continues to increase and at some point (equilibrium gas saturation) gas begins to flow and the oil rate is further reduced. With further increases in gas saturation.2. ft Inlet pressure. the gas rate continues to increase and less oil flows through the pores until finally only gas flows. The gas-oil or water-oil relative permeability relationships of a particular reservoir rock depend on the configurations of the rock pore spaces and the wetting characteristics of the fluids and rock surfaces. in comparison to the ease that it would flow if there was no other fluid. ft Viscosity. res bbl/stb kA(p 1 −p 2 ) BµL Eq. relative permeability relationships must be considered.B Relative Permeability As normally two or three fluids exist in the same pore spaces in a reservoir. psi Formation volume factor.A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION In oilfield units the linear form of Darcy’s Law for flow of incompressible fluid through a rock filled with only one fluid is: q=1.
D where: ko kw µo µw Bo Bw 2. most reservoir rocks are considered to be ‘water wet’. it is important when completing or servicing the well in that any foreign substance which may come into contact with the rock may alter its wettability characteristic and reduce the relative permeability to hydrocarbon fluids and cause emulsion which may block flow. This means that the grains of the rock matrix are coated with a film of water permitting hydrocarbons to fill the centre of the pore spaces.127 ×10 −3 where: qo kabs kro = = = Oil flow rate. the permeability in eq. the ‘water cut’ or fraction of water in the total flow stream at standard conditions of temperature and pressure can be calculated by: fw = 1 k o µw Bw 1 × + + k w µo Bo Eq. res bbl/stb . This can be achieved by multiplying absolute permeability of the rock by the relative permeability of the rock to the desired fluid.4. res bbl/stb Formation volume factor for water. However.C For a well producing both water and oil. 2. cp Viscosity of water. 2. For this reason. cp Formation volume factor for oil. it is not important as this characteristic is included in the permeability measurements. q=1. = = = = = = Relative permeability to oil Relative permeability to water Viscosity of oil.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 16 OF 295 ENI S.2.b represents the permeability of the rock to the desired fluid. stb/day Absolute permeability.A. Although it is extremely difficult to determine wettability of cores due to the cutting and preparing specimens for laboratory testing which alters the wettability characteristics. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Where two or more fluids are present. Wettabilty Most reservoirs were formed or laid down in water with oil moving in later from adjacent zones to replace a portion of the water.p. 2. md Relative permeability to oil k abs k ro A(p1 −p 2 ) B o µL Eq. The productivity of oil in this condition is maximised.
work to change the normal sharp interfaces between the fluids separated by density.p. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 2. In lower permeability sands. Due to the greater density difference between gas and oil as compared to oil and water. gas and water present at a particular level determines the fluids that produced by a well completed at that level and also influence the relative rates of fluid production. which are related to water wettability. surface tension and the relative density differences between the fluids. permeability. the capillary pressure in two different pore sizes will be the same. Relative permeability permits both water and oil to flow within the transition zone. only oil will flow in an oil-water system.2. the higher will be the connate water saturation. oil and gas. These can be summarised in three statements: • • • The lower the permeability of a given sand. Water saturation above the transition zone is termed ‘irreducible water saturation’ or more commonly the ‘connate water saturation’. . From the point in a zone of the free water level upward to some point where water saturation becomes constant is called the ‘transition zone’. depending on the saturations of each fluid present at the completion level. Fluid Distribution 0 REVISION The distribution of fluids vertically in the reservoir is very important as the relative amounts of oil. water and gas saturation in a typical homogeneous rock example. Above the transition zone.A. figure 2. Connate water is related to permeability and pore channels in lower rocks are generally smaller. A well completed in the transition zone will be expected to produce both oil and water. In rock the capillary forces.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 17 OF 295 ENI S. the transition zone between the oil and gas is not as thick as the transition zone between oil and water. wettability. the transition zones will be thicker than in higher permeability sands. therefore the water film between the water and the oil will have the same curvature.a summarises oil.5. For a given height. The nature and thickness of the transition zones between the water and oil. and water and gas are influenced by several factors: uniformity. hence more oil will be contained in larger pore spaces.
Pressure distribution around a producing oil well completed in a homogeneous zone will gradually drop from the reservoir pressure some distance from the wellbore until closer to the wellbore where it will decline quite sharply. Fluid Flow In The Reservoir Oil has little natural ability to produce itself into the wellbore. The wellhead pressure will be much lower due to the influence of hydrostatic pressure and tubing frictional effects.Example Fluid Distribution in a Uniform Sand Reservoir (Containing Connate Water. . Oil and Gas Cap) 2. Pressure Distribution Around the Wellbore Pressure distribution in the reservoir and factors which influence it are of great of significance in interpreting well production trends caused by pressure characteristics.A . in associated free gas caps.2.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 18 OF 295 ENI S.p.6. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 2. It is produced principally by pressure inherent in gas dissolved in oil. or in associated aquifers.A.
b.p. most of the pressure drop in the reservoir occurs fairly close to the wellbore.00708kh(p o −p w ) r Bµ1n( o ) rw Eq. As shown in figure 2. Obviously flow velocities increase tremendously as fluid approaches the wellbore. . in a uniform sand. 2.A. where fluids move towards the well from all directions. This area around the wellbore is the ‘critical area’ and as much as possible should be done to prevent damage or flow restrictions in this critical area. Figure 2.B . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION In a radial flow situation.Pressure Distribution Near Wellbore In Radial Flow Radial Flow Around The Wellbore Steady state radial flow of incompressible fluid is described by Darcy’s Law: q= 0.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 19 OF 295 ENI S. the pressure drop across the last 15ft of the formation surrounding the wellbore is about one half of the total pressure drop from the well to a point 500ft away in the reservoir.E Corrections are required to account for the flow of compressible fluids and for turbulent flow velocities.
Units For Darcy’s Law Equation For non-homogeneous zones.C. permeablities must be averaged for flow through parallel layers of differing permeabilities. k= k 1h1 +k 2 h 2 +k 3 h 3 h1 +h 2 +h 3 Eq.p.Radial Flow In Parallel Combination of Beds .D .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 20 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 2.F Figure 2. 2.A. which is the usual case.
G Figure 2.A. Flow through perforating tunnels is linear rather radial and Darcy’s equation must be corrected as turbulent flow usually exists. predict.f below. Actual test data with very high permeability sand. In cases where there may be sand problems and a gravel pack is used.p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 21 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Varying permeabilities around the well in series can be averaged as follows: ro ) rw k= r r r 1n( 1 ) 1n( 2 ) 1n( 3 ) rw r1 r2 + + k1 k2 k3 1n( Eq. Curve A indicates that plugging with even high permeability (1 Darcy) sand gives a large pressure drop.Radial Flow In Series Combination Of Beds Linear Flow Through Perforations Ideally perforating tunnels should provide be large and deep enough to prevent any restriction to flow. Investigators have provided turbulence correction factors which can be applied to Darcy’s equation to permit calculation of pressure drop through perforating tunnels. proves turbulent flow results in higher pressure drop than Darcy’s Law calculations. Experiments have shown that pressure drop through gravel filled perforations compared with uncorrected linear flow Darcy’s Law calculations is substantial as shown in figure 2. which will cause a restriction. . the tunnels are packed with gravel to hold the formation in place.E . 2. curve B. curve C.
With low permeability or excessive rate of production. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 2.p. Low permeability is often caused by damage close to the wellbore through drilling. two factors may cause low flowing bottomhole pressures.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 22 OF 295 ENI S. These are permeability and producing rate. pressure drawdown will be appreciable higher than normal thus reducing flowing bottom-hole pressures and causing the well to be placed on artificial lift if higher productions rates are necessary.Pressure Drop Versus Flow Rate Through Perforation Causes Of Low Flowing Bottom-Hole Pressure In a well with uniform sand and fluid conditions. completion or intervention operations.F . .A. This is particularly detrimental as the effect close to the wellbore is greatly magnified.
K In multi-zone completion intervals. Flow profiling may highlight zones. where transient pressure testing techniques may give questionable results concerning formation damage.p. production logging techniques may provide helpful data.I Flow efficiency: FE= = Jideal Jactual p−p wf −∆p s p−p wf Eq. which are not contributing to the total flow. in an otherwise productive interval. 2.H Other terms which are used to quantify formation damage are Damage Ratio and Flow Efficiency. 2. The skin effect (abnormal pressure drop) or the normal radial flow pressure drop can be calculated by: ∆p s = 141.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 23 OF 295 ENI S.J = = Theoretical flow rate without damage Actual flow rate observed qt qa Eq.A. Damage ratio calculation is: DR= where: qt qa also: DR= = Jideal Jactual p−p wf p−p wf −∆p s Eq. 2. . 2. Non-contributing zones are likely to have been damaged. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION The existence of damage can be calculated by well test results analysing the pressure build-up periods.2qBµ ×s kh Eq.
ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 24 OF 295 ENI S. establish the detailed geological picture regarding zone continuity and locate oil-water and gas-oil contacts. primary production results from existing pressure in the reservoir. By careful planning when enough information is gained to determine the well locations. the investment will have already been made. This is controlled by well interventions or re-completions to shut-off the water production or the well is shut-in. Well intervention or recompletion to shut-off up-structure intervals may control the gas-oil ratio. the source of pressure is principally the liberation and expansion of gas from the oil phase as pressure is reduced. therefore if development drilling proceeds on the basis of close spacing before the drive mechanism is identified. figure 2. Obviously many factors must be considered in developing a reservoir. A water drive reservoir’s principle pressure source is an external water hydrostatic pressure communicated to below the oil zone. however the main factors concentrate on the reservoir itself and the procedure used to exploit hydrocarbon recovery.e. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 2. i. Well spacing. Water drive reservoirs pressure remains high and gas-oil ratios are lower but downstructure well intervals quickly begin to produce water. pressure declines rapidly. and primary oil recovery is relatively low. labour and materials consumed in the drilling are largely non-recoverable. In a dissolved gas drive reservoir without any artificial pressure maintenance technique. . In a gas cap drive reservoir. show typical reservoir pressures versus production trends and gas-oil ratio production trends for the three basic drive mechanisms. to systematically recover reservoir hydrocarbons.g and figure 2.A. Gradually even the up-structure wells will water out to maximise oil recovery. or well location.p. is fundamental and the cost of time. In a dissolved gas reservoir. gas-oil ratio peaks rapidly and then declines rapidly. There are three basic drive mechanisms: • • • Dissolved gas Gas cap Water drive. A gas drive reservoir’s primary pressure source is the expansion of a gas cap over the oil zone. This does not usually present an insurmountable problem as a field of any considerable size will require a minimum number of wells to be drilled in any case to define the reservoir. pressure declines less rapidly and gas-oil ratios increase as the gas cap expands into the up-structure well completion intervals. Effects Of Reservoir Characteristics Reservoir Drive Mechanisms 0 REVISION In an oil reservoir.7.2. and also for later re-completions.h. The effect of the drive mechanism on the producing characteristics must be evaluated in the completion design process. therefore lose pressure less rapidly. Re-completing would not reduce the gas-oil ratio. Most reservoirs in actuality produce by a combination of all three mechanisms. these can be drilled at the appropriate spacing to maximise recovery with the least amount of wells.
p.H .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 25 OF 295 ENI S.A.G . Figure 2. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Many case histories are available to show problems resulting from reservoir development without having sufficient information about the stratigraphy of the reservoir.Reservoir Pressure Trends For Various Drive Mechanisms Figure 2.Gas-Oil Ratios Trends For Various Drive Mechanisms .
dip angle is low and gas cap is completely underlayed by oil. can be set low in the reservoir bed. Gas cap drive reservoirs: Wells are generally spaced on a regular pattern where the sand is thick. some means of secondary recovery will almost certainly be required at some point in life of the reservoir and the initial well completion design should take this into account. Regular spacing would place many completions too near the gas-oil contact. provided the rock is stratified.p. A water reservoir in a thin sand with high angle of dip may best be developed with irregular well spacing because of the structural characteristics. In this scenario it would be expected that oil recovery would be greater with the minimum well investment as the oil will drain down-structure through time.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 26 OF 295 ENI S. Completion intervals should be selected high on the structure to permit long production life while oil is displaced up to the completion intervals by invading water from below. the wells in thin sands with a high angle of dip is likely to be more efficiently controlled by having the completion irregularly spaced and low to conform to the shape of the reservoir. Water drive reservoirs: Wells can be spaced on a regular pattern on a thick sand and low angle of dip. Due to the low recovery by the primary drive mechanism. Again completion intervals should be low in the structure to permit the gas cap to grow for maximum recovery and minimum gas production. Regular spacing of the wells may cause early water production and possible early abandonment in conjunction with reducing the drive effectiveness through excessive water production. Significant levels of water production are unavoidable in later field life when maximising production rates. Such reservoirs are common where multiple this sands are found on a single structure and the oil column is only a fraction of the total productive relief.A. A regular spacing can also be used for dissolved gas reservoirs with high angle of dip. Like the dissolved gas drive reservoir. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION With regard to drive mechanisms. . Again the completion intervals should be structurally low because of the angle of dip and the exact sub-surface location would vary with well location on the structure. If this is recognised after drilling begins. the well locations must be changed quickly to take full advantage of the situation. some general statements can be made: Dissolved gas drive reservoirs: Well completions in reservoirs with low structural relief can be made in a regularly spaced pattern throughout the reservoir and.
intervals should be produced independently wherever practical (usually determined by economics). or water from a water basin. This is demonstrated in figure 2.p. Fluids from such reservoirs will flow through the various layers at different restrictions to flow and often there are impervious beds between the layers so that fluid cannot flow between the bed to bed. experience and operating conditions. Vertical staggering of the completion can be effected during development to obtain proportionate depletion of the various strata.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 27 OF 295 ENI S. either by shale breaks or by variations in permeability.I .i and figure 2. Additional distribution of intervals in the various members can then be made during later well interventions on the basis of data obtained. ‘fingering’ of the free gas down from a gas cap. Similar assumptions can be made for carbonate and even reef type reservoirs which results in reservoirs of a highly stratified nature.8. Single string/single zone completions are preferred to facilitate thorough flushing for higher recovery and flexibility of re-completion to control reservoir performance. Most sandstone reservoirs were originally laid down as stratified layers of varying porosity and permeability. If the reservoir is stratified. Completions with more than one zone are termed multi-zone completions and are required for long completion intervals for obtaining sufficient volumes of production. especially if the interval is short and production rates are high.Irregular Water Encroachment and Breakthrough .j. Figure 2. Reservoir Homogeneity 0 REVISION The general procedures. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 2. as described in the previous section is to complete water drive reservoirs high and for dissolved gas drive reservoir low on the structure to obtain an adequate number of wells without excess.2. However this is only practical if the reservoir is uniform. To maximise recovery.A. In thin beds or highly stratified beds. is a distinct possibility. it will probably be necessary to stagger the completion intervals in various members of the reservoir to be sure that each is drained properly.
Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 2. Two general methods are used to obtain samples of reservoir oil for laboratory examination purposes. HYDROCARBON DATA The practical approach to the study of reservoir fluid behaviour is to anticipate pressure and temperature changes in the reservoir and at surface during production. or if dry gas. the information is less complex. by means of subsurface samplers and by obtaining surface samples of separator liquid and gas. The surface samples are then recombined in the laboratory in proportions equal the gas-oil ratio measured at the separator during well testing.3.3. The results of these tests then provide the basic fluid data for estimates of fluid recovery by various methods of reservoir operations and also to estimate reservoir parameters through transient pressure testing.High GOR Production by Encroachment of Gas 2. by laboratory tests.1. If retrograde condensation is involved. it may require numerous tests and measurements.p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 28 OF 295 ENI S. If the gas is wet with no retrograde condensation. 2. Information concerning the characteristics and behaviour of gas needed for gas reservoirs. depends upon the type of gas and the nature of the problem.A. the changes occurring in the reservoir samples. and to measure. Oil Property Correlation Several generalisations of oil sample data are available to permit correlations of oil properties to be made (refer to the Compant Well Test Manual for sampling techniques).J . .
k. The process of this analysis is shown in figure 2. the outflow performance can be determined which takes into consideration the relationship between the surface flowrate and pressure drop in the tubing. The inflow performance relationship (IPR) provides the flow potential of the reservoir into the wellbore against the resistance to flow of the formation and near wellbore region. friction losses and flowing temperatures.k which requires continuous repetition during field life to account for changing conditions. in undamaged near wellbore regions also reduce the IPR curve. is mainly caused by the drilling and completion practices. Alternatively.A.p. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 2. The results of the outflow performance analysis are usually produced graphically depicting how bottom hole flowing pressure (BHFP). or pump intake pressure. Hence. shape and permeability of the producing zone and the properties of the produced fluids. These curves are termed tubing performance curves (TPC) and the point of intersection is the natural flowing point as demonstrated earlier in figure 2. high rate or high GOR oil wells. varies with flowrate against a fixed back-pressure which is normally the wellhead or separator pressure. such as gravel packs for unconsolidated sands.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 29 OF 295 ENI S. The theoretical IPR is an idealistic assumption of flow performance without pressure drop due to skin effect in the near wellbore region and governed only by the size. analysis of the outflow performance requires predictions of phase behaviour. Two phase flow. effective fluid density. Flow behaviour in the near wellbore region may cause a dramatic effect on the IPR curve which results in greatly reduced flow capability. velocity effects in gas wells. Some completion designs to deal with reservoir conditions. The prediction of this relationship is complicated by the nature of multi-phase fluid flow. Good drilling and completion practices can or may minimise this damage allowing use of the idealised IPR curve to be used for completion design. . stimulation procedures which can provide a negative skin are desirable as this increases production. The basic theory of this is described in this section along with some simplified IPR relationships from observed field data. This is characterised by a damaged IPR curve and the amount of damage or skin effect. RESERVOIR/PRODUCTION FORECAST 0 REVISION To obtain the optimum performance from a well.4. will also cause reduced IPR curves which must be anticipated during the design phase. The determination of the well’s performance entails analysing the following: • • • • In-flow performance Near wellbore performance and design Multiphase flow of tubing performance Artificial lift. Once the IPR is completed. it is first necessary to determine its full potential and which way this can be fully exploited within any technical or economic constraints.
A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 2.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 30 OF 295 ENI S. or optimising. the tubing size is necessary to optimise the well performance over the life of the well and should include the potential benefits of artificial lift systems and/or stimulation to reduce near wellbore skin effects. .K .Process of Determining Optimum Well Performance Selecting.p.
However. psi Bottom-hole flowing pressure. With a straight line IPR. Inflow Perfomance 0 REVISION This section addresses the fundamental principles of inflow performance for oil and gas wells. The linear relationship can be substantiated from theoretical arguments for a single incompressible fluid (i. reservoir simulation is usually employed. Oil Well . however for larger projects.A. As more data becomes available.1. 2.p.g. psi. Essentially the less data which is available.L where: ∆p pR pwf = = = Drawdown pressure. PI defined as J by the API. the more appropriate it is to use theoretical radial flow equation. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 2.M . the constant of proportionality is termed the productivity index (PI).ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 31 OF 295 ENI S. The use of IPRs generated from reservoir simulation models is also described as is the technique for the applications of the various techniques for predicting inflow performance. is: J= where: q = Total liquid flow rate at surface under stock tank conditions (14. the flow rate is directionally proportional to the drawdown. above the bubble point).4. ∆p=p R −p wf Eq.e. o 60 F) q p R − p wf Eq. 2. psi Reservoir pressure. low drawdowns and damaged wells. e.Straight Line IPR The simplest IPR equation assumes that inflow into a well is proportional to the pressure differential between the reservoir and the wellbore which is termed the ‘drawdown’. an empirical expression can be validated and applied.7psia. it has been verified that the straight line approach also provides the accuracy needed for well performance calculations in situations which exceed the theoretical basis. In situations which allow the use of a straight line IPR.
2µ o B o 1n e rw −0. Production Engineers relate J to gross liquid production (oil and water) whereas Reservoir Engineers relate it to oil productivity. as in most well tests. cp Reservoir formation volume factor. Productivity Index. J.L .Straight Line IPR or Productivity Index J The assumption of stable inflow performance relationship. bbl/stb Drainage radius. also needs to be treated with caution as Production Engineers and Reservoir Engineers assume different basis for J. J.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 32 OF 295 ENI S. or stabilised flow.75+S′ Eq.N where: h ko µo Bo ro rw S’ = = = = = = Net pay thickness.A. Oil PI. result in higher estimates of productivity than when under stabilised conditions. md Reservoir fluid viscosity. can also be derived theoretically from Darcy’s radial flow equation: Jo = k oh r 141. dimensionless (S ’= S + Dq) .p. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 2. J can be calculated directly from bottom-hole gauges in well test results or estimated pressures from simulation studies. ft Total effective skin. ft Effective oil permeability. Before this the well produces under transient conditions. is that well is producing in pseudo-steady state or steady state flow conditions. 2. ft Wellbore radius.
S’ = 0) should be expected as a result of additional pressure losses in the near wellbore area due to damage. have natural fractures or are highly deviated. Damaged wells with positive skins have straight line IPRs with PIs less than the ideal PI.M.e. As water saturation increases.A. Deviation from the theoretical ideal PI (i.p. Figure 2.Effect of Damage And Fractures on a Well’s PI .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 33 OF 295 ENI S. Straight line IPRs with PIs greater than the ideal are typical of wells with negative skin such as when they have been stimulated. increased gas saturation in oil wells. producing below the bubble point. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION This assumes pseudo-steady state flow from a well in the centre of a circular reservoir and it is worth noting that ko is the effective permeability to oil for an oil PI. changes in radial flow geometry and non-Darcy pressure losses due to high flow velocities in gas wells. fractures. Ko obviously decreases and as does Jo. The PI is very useful for describing the potential of various wells as it combines all rock and fluid properties as well as geometrical issues in a single constant making it unnecessary to consider these properties individually. high rate or high GOR oil wells.
A.Typical IPR Curve for Saturated Reservoir . Figure 2. 2.Vogel’s Two Phase Flow IPR 0 REVISION The previous straight line IPR does not hold with two phase flow (gas and liquid) in the reservoir. Vogel used a computer programme to model a variety of solution gas reservoirs and developed a generalised IPR reference curve to account for the two phase flow effects below the bubble point.p. gas saturation builds up around the wellbore which reduces the permeability to liquid which of course reduces well productivity at that particular drawdown compared to predicted by linear PI. decreases with increasing drawdown (slopes 1 and 2 in figure 2. This means the true IPR is curved and. Once the BHFP falls below the bubble point pressure. There may also be some non-Darcy gas flow effects in wells producing below the bubble point.N . hence the PI J.8 wf p R 2 Eq.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 34 OF 295 ENI S.o). Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Oil Well . psi Bottom-hole flowing pressure. psi Liquid production.O Qmax is a theoretical value sometimes referred to as Absolute Open Flow (AOF) of the oil well. He also presented an approximation using the expression: p =1−0.2 wf p qmax R q where: pR pwf q qmax = = = = Reservoir pressure. stb/d p −0. stb/d Maximum liquid production rate when pwf = 0.
ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 35 OF 295 ENI S.p.A. Procedures to correct for skin are available.Vogel’s IPR Reference Curve . Figure 2.O . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Vogel’s equation has been validated through observed field data particularly on pumped wells with high drawdowns where pwf approaches zero. The model used to develop Vogel’s reference curve did not include skin effects which would tend to straighten the IPR curve.
2 wf p R Eq. Vogel’s equation is combined with the PI to develop a general IPR equation. 2. This has been published by Brown. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Where inflow relationship passes through the bubble point.8 wf p R 2 Eq.P Eq.S If oil and water both flow from the same zone then the Vogel equation is used for the gross flow rate: p q o +q w =(q o +q o max )1−0.A.p.8 b where: pb = Bubble point pressure. psi p −0. 2.T . 2. 2.R p −0.2 wf p R p −0. For this. When the BHFP is above the bubble point use the normal straight line equation: q o =J(p R −p wf ) and when it drops below the bubble point use the modified Vogel equation: p Jp qo =J(p R −p wf )+ b 1−0.8 wf p R 2 Eq. As oil is normally produced from a different zone to the water.Q If water production is involved. a straight line IPR is drawn above the bubble point and the curved IPR signifies the two phase flow below this point. 2.2 wf p 1 .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 36 OF 295 ENI S. the following equations are applied: q w =J(p R −p wf ) p q o =q o max 1−0. it is dependant upon whether it is produced from the same interval or others.8 wf p b 2 Eq.
is sometimes the most dominant factor especially for gravel packs and high rate gas-liquid ratio wells. 2.A.Combined Straight Line IPR and Vogel IPR Oil Wells .Generalised IPR Curves As described earlier.0) .5 to 1. Fetkovich recognised that many oil wells could be handled in the same way as gas wells using the curved IPR: q o =C p R −p wf 2 ( 2 n ) Eq. This non-Darcy flow.U where: C n = = Linear deliverability coefficient Deliverability exponent (0.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 37 OF 295 ENI S. This is where Darcy’s law which is good for moderate to low flow rates is affected by high velocities. or turbulence.P . curvature of the IPR curve is not solely due to the reasons highlighted above but also due to rate dependent skin. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 2.p.
n is considered as the means to account for non-Darcy flow but there is no theoretical technique for finding it as it is a function of the rate used during testing. however it requires four points at widely different flow rates to maximise the benefit of this method. Blount and Jones presented an alternative generalised IPR equation which was an extension to the Forcheimer equation to include the non-Darcy flow effects: p R −p wf =aq+bq 2 Eq.pwf ) will give a straight line with a slope of 1/n. n should be assumed as 1. the Vogel and Fetkovich IPRs are similar. 2.Q . If such data is not available.W .q. 2. It is seen that when n = 1.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 38 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Golan and Whitson showed how this relationship could be expressed in a similar form to Vogel’s reference curve as: p = 1− wf q max p R q 2 n Eq.Vogel And Fetkovich IPR Curve Comparisons Use of this approach will provide better results than Vogel’s method. Figure 2. If multi-rate data is 2 2 available then a log-log plot of q versus (pR . n.p.A. It is recommended that n be assumed to be 1 where no multi-rate data is available. for two values of the exponent.V This equation is compared with Vogel’s reference curve in figure 2.
The effects of increasing water influx on the gross PI. Oil Wells . In solution drive reservoirs. b. can also be found theoretically but requires a knowledge of the turbulence factor.pwf)/q versus q gives a straight line with a slope of b and an interception of a. The other non-Darcy flow coefficient.8 p wf p Rfuture 2 Eq. Similarly.e.2.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 39 OF 295 ENI S.Y J * future J * present and: q future =J * future p p R future 1−0. leads to a significant increase in skin due to scaling. mobilisation of fines. coefficient b can be much greater than b and perforating efficiency (shots/ft and penetration) is a very important to productivity.Predicting Future IPRs Estimates of future IPR curves throughout the life of the reservoir are frequently required for production forecasting and planning artificial lift designs. 2. S. 2. The liberation of gas also affects the oil fluid properties. is relative to all non-rate dependent skin contributions. β.75+S Eq.2 wf p R future −0. a. Standing presented a method of predicting future IPR curves by the equation: k ro µ o B o future = k ro µ o B o present Eq.X The skin term. etc. can be determined theoretically for a well producing at pseudo-steady state flow in the middle of a circular reservoir: a= 141.Z where: J* = PI at minimal drawdown (i. 2. both a and b can be determined using a plot of (q R . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION The Darcy flow coefficient.A.2µ o B o re ln kh rw −0. In very high permeability wells. which is rarely measured in the laboratory. it takes no account of completion non-Darcy effects such as inefficient perforating.p. the reservoir pressure will decline against time. The relative permeability to oil will also decrease due to increased gas saturation further shifting the curve downwards. shifting the IPR curve downwards resulting in a decline of the production rate and causing flow instability. Again. described earlier in Section 2. where two phase flow effects are negligible) . skin damage during remedial operations and reduced contribution from reduced pay through plugging back. if multi-rate test data is available.
it is normal to test the well at three rates at a fixed period of time followed by a single rate until stabilisation is reached to obtain C.66 have been found in actual field studies by Eickmeir. p g =C p R −p wf 2 ( 2 n ) Eq. the simpler approach like Fetkovich relation for predicting qmax in Vogel’s reference curve. Obviously at low to moderate rates there is little turbulence and n is close to 1. Gas Wells .present p Rpresent = q max . This exponent can vary between 1. An exponent of 2. If data for Standing’s equation are not available. using kh and S from build-up data but is only applicable if flow is laminar (n = 1). 2. .A. To obtain a value of n.g. however in high rates this is highly improbable and makes the IPR projections almost impossible and erring on the optimistic side. While this method is widely used throughout the industry.5 gives the best fit to the gas drive IPR curves by Vogel while values of 1. The exponent. in the equation must be estimated from one of a number of well test methods (e.pwf ) versus q is conducted from which the slope gives the value of 1/n. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION J* at present conditions is established by carrying out a well test or theoretically.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 40 OF 295 ENI S. Relative permeabilities and fluid saturations are determined from special core analysis data and reservoir material balance analysis (using either analytical calculations or a reservoir simulation model). In some instances C can be calculated from reservoir parameters. Fluid viscosities and volume are determined from PVT correlations. 2. A 2 2 log-log plot of (pR . Eickmeier first proposed an expression based on Fetkovich’s work. The constant C is also found from the log-log plot and varies as a function of flow time until it reaches a constant pseudo-steady state.future p R future m Eq.Simplified Deliverability Relationship Rawlins and Schellardt developed a simplified gas well back-pressure equation which relates gas flow rate to the BHFP and is the well Known AOF equation. The problem with this isochronal test is the time required to reach stabilised flow in tight gas sands which could be months. therefore.BB This equation was developed empirically using several hundred multi-rate gas well test data and not by theory but satisfactorily describes the behaviour of the gas well tests considered. which in modified form is: q max . critical that well tests are conducted up to or above the rate of intended production.5 for fully turbulent flow.0 for laminar flow to 0. It is.AA It may be shown theoretically that exponent m could vary between 1 and 3. n . it is not recommended for estimating IPRs as it lacks the theoretical basis and other rigorous equations are available.p. isochronal test) due to there being no accepted theoretical basis available.
FF . 2. 2.000psi when µz is proportional to pressure. 2. requires knowledge of the correct turbulence factor. an equation similar to eq. A and B.cc is not precisely correct since inherent in its derivation is an assumption that the product of µ and z is constant. 2. are determined in a similar manner as the 2 2 generalised IPR equation for an oil well.000psi.75+S 2 Eq. normally pg and pwf for inflow calculations.Generalised Deliverability 0 REVISION Due to the shortcomings of the back-pressure equation described above and since turbulence which is common in gas wells. It will be seen that the gas IPR is curved even when the non-Darcy term is 0. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Gas Wells .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 41 OF 295 ENI S. as for oil wells. Between 2. β. The non-Darcy skin is also frequently accounted for by using: m(p R )−m(p wf )=1422 q g T re ln k gh rw −0. there is curvature in the plot of µz against p making neither approach applicable.pwf )/q versus q. 2.DD Gas viscosity.CC The Darcy and non-Darcy coefficients. cp Gas deviation factor and where the integration limits are substituted with the pressure range being considered.A. it must be accounted for properly and a theoretical based method is more often used in modern engineering. The expression below is based on the work of Forchemier and is: p R −p wf = Aqg + Aqg 2 Eq. For most gas compositions this is valid only at pressures less than approx 2.w can be used.m(pwf)/q versus q to find a value of B from the slope and to check the value of A from the intercept.75+S+Dqg Eq.000psi and 3. In this range the correct inflow equation is written in terms of pseudo-pressures: m(p)=2 where: µg z = = ∫ p dp pb µ z g p Eq. 2. The non-Darcy coefficient B can also be calculated theoretically but. however the straight line plot is (pR .p. hence: m(p R )−m(p wf )= Aq g +Bqg where: A = 1422 T re ln k gh rw TD k gh −0. eq.000psi or if drawdown pressure changes are small which is the case in high permeability wells above 3.EE B = 1422 Here the results of the multi-rate test would be plotted as m(pg) .
Outflow performance curves should be derived from an accurate computer programme as some programmes are not rigorous in the handling of two phase flow. • • • • .A.p. it will be necessary to correct it for the grid block’s size and shape. mscf/d o Reservoir temperature. 2. the pseudo-pressure values are readily available. a model needs to be set up by the reservoir engineer with input from the production engineer. planning and reservoir management of many fields today. With the use of simulation the production engineer is able not only to predict pressures. predict turbulence and two phase flow effects by the use of total skin S’ inclusive of near wellbore and rate dependent skin effects. well radius. The value of D (Refer to eq. workovers and movement of fines will have on near wellbore performance causing changes of skin during the life of the project. F The sum of all non-rate dependent skin Rate dependent skin Effective gas permeability. Reservoir Simulation For IPR Curves Reservoir simulation is commonly used in the development. Variations between the ideal IPRs and actual IPRs which may be expected from the undrilled well locations. Long term effects from well interventions.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 42 OF 295 ENI S.4. Typically the following should be addressed: • • Assumptions on the minimum permissible value of Pwf as dictated by the outflow performance altered by varying water-cut. etc. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 where: D qg T S D kg is = = = = = Derived from well tests Gas flow rate. therefore there is a growing trend to use gas pseudo pressures for predicting gas well IPRs at all pressure conditions although the pressure squared method has a use in the field for convenience. 2. This information is derived from well test results and is input into the models theoretical IPR equations as skin factor.2. artificial lift or use of compression. If a PI is entered in rather than skin. Future stimulation or any damaging effects need to be considered. md 0 REVISION As modern test analysis use computer software.ff) can also be directly entered into some simulators. Using expected off takes. WORs and GORs to obtain production targets. but also to generate IPR curves for determination of how current and future well IPRs will vary across the field.. To obtain the best use of simulation studies.
etc. e. however. deviation. the model needs to be updated to include actual log and test results. Whether rates have been modified for downtime due to maintenance. After using measured IPR curves. revisions can be made to the completion designs. partial completion. have been considered. in extrapolating the shape of the IPR and determining the effects by well operations and production may have on skin. gravel packing. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION The results from such field models will provide the reservoir pressure. then the model can be used to evaluate the effect of depletion. reservoir quality. Ensure that proposed completion effects on near wellbore performance.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 43 OF 295 ENI S. programmes and production forecast.A. . When and as new well data from log and RFT/DST results becomes available. If the reservoir pressure refers to grid block or to the drainage area. As the use of full field reservoir simulation requires many assumptions and simplifications are made to manage the problem. in particular check: • • • • • Confirm if non-Darcy and multi-phase flow effects have been taken into consideration.g. skins. saturations. From this. however judgement is required when using these results. pressure and mechanical data. it should be used to update the generalised IPR to reflect the actual pay interval. Often more reliable predictions in shape of the well IPR can be achieved by engineers using single well models to study the probability of water or gas conning or to model transient well test results. It is extremely important that production engineers understand that the uncertainties involved and do not give greater reliability on model studies than reasonably can be expected. water breakthrough and saturation changes on production and used for artificial lift studies. workover or sales contracts. production rates and wellbore saturations at various time steps. etc. They may also be able to advise on possible sudden changes in water cut or gas production due to conning or cusping. Once this achieved. Care must be exercised.p. It is also used to determine the sensitivity of production to drawdown and optimise perforating strategy. therefore the predicted flow rates should not be considered as precise and the relevant reservoir engineer should be consulted to establish the accuracy. stimulation. Input on skin is realistic for the period covered.
A .4. The selection of an IPR model based on this is given in table 2.b.m(pwf) = Aq + Bq ) Omit B if only single rate data available Table 2.Jones Pseudo-pressure equation (m(pR) . the appropriate IPR model needs to be selected based upon the anticipated production conditions.A.Jones or radial flow equation with turbulence Blount .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 44 OF 295 ENI S. These are summarised again in the following table: Type Of Well Undersaturated oil Saturated oil Damaged saturated oil Undersaturated oil at pR but saturated at pwf Wells producing oil and water Producing Conditions Pwf > pb Pwf < pb Pwf < pb S > +3 PR > pb Pwf < pb WC > 0 Use as above for the appropriate oil and linear PI or radial flow equation for water Linear PI or radial flow equation Blount .3.p.IPR Selection Based on Reservoir Type The appropriate technique will also depend on the reservoir data that is available which is function of the development stage. IPR Selection 0 REVISION In developing representative IPRs for a field. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 2. 2 Recommended IPR Model Linear PI or radial flow equation Vogel or Fetkovich Standing or linear PI if very damaged (S > 7) Composite Vogel and linear Water zone High rate undersaturated oil High rate saturated oil Gas wells WC > 90% q > 25stb/d/ft q > 25stb/d/ft Pwf < pb .
Validate reservoir model results. Primary method for current IPRs. Validate results. Primary method for current IPRs. lift/ compression) Workover planning Revised development plan Predict future IPR Predict future IPR Primary method. Validate results and skin assumptions. Validate results. Highlight damage risks. large field Detailed design. Primary method. large field Conceptual design. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Radial Flow Equation Technical Evaluations Prospect evaluation Exploration well results Development Planning Conceptual design.A. If available.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 45 OF 295 ENI S.B . Validate results. Optimising Operations/ Workover Well performance assessment Field studies (forecasts/ artificial lift. use for future IPRs. Highlight damage risks. small field/single well Primary method. Guestimate potential. - Primary method. small field/single well Development plan Primary method. Evaluate completion methods. Primary method. Identify variations geographically with time. Detailed design. Highlight damage risks. Primary method for post workover IPR Primary method for post workover IPR. Validate results.IPR Selection Based on Development Stage . Highlight damage risks. Highlight damage risks.p. - Reservoir Model IPRs - Empirical IPRs Validate interpretation Validate results. Define model input Primary method. Evaluate completion results. Estimate skin and determine cause. Extrapolate test results. Table 2. Validate results.
Pressure drop is determined using empirical and semi-empirical correlations and carried out on computer software programmes. Outflow Performance Tubing Performance 0 REVISION Predicting fluid flow behaviour in tubing involves combining the basic fundamentals of mass momentum and energy conservation with complex mass transfer phenomena for multicomponent hydrocarbon mixtures.PVT Relationships With most modern software programmes there are four methods of obtaining PVT properties for oil wells which are listed in order of preference. In general the black oil model is easier to use than the compositional model. • • • • Interpolate directly from experimental data.p. Untuned black oil model empirical correlations. In the vast majority of cases there are sufficient data to use the tuned black oil model correlation method. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 2. The variable composition model requires performing vapour-liquid equilibrium (VLE) or ‘flash’ calculations to determine the amount and composition of both the gas and liquid phases. PVT Relationships There are two PVT methods used in the prediction of mass transfer between oil and gas. The relationship between pressure and temperature drop in wells and PVT behaviour is complex.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 46 OF 295 ENI S.A. Flowing Temperature prediction. results in utilising the following interrelated topics: • • • Phase behaviour. The black oil model assumes a constant composition for the liquid phase and accounts for mass transfer using the parameters gas-oil ratio and formation volume factor. the ‘black oil’ model and the ‘compositional’ model. Tuned black oil model empirical correlations.4. The methods for predicting pressure and temperature drops are addressed in the following sections. Interpolate from compositional simulation data. Refer to the following sections. Each model uses differing methods to determine the densities and viscosities for each phase and interfacial surface tension. Application of these concepts. Pressure drop prediction. Oil Well .4. .
However.PVT Relationships In software programmes. . constant temperature throughout the length of the string. reservoir or production reasons. Profile based on adiabatic heat transfer. Temperature Drop Calculation Predicting the temperature loss in the wellbore as a function of depth and time is necessary to determine PVT properties for use in calculating pressure drop. Profile based on a specified heat transfer coefficient.p. the error has been found to be less than 15% in overall temperature drop in typical wells. Wells in which hydrate formation can occur. Profile based on conservation of energy that utilises complex wellbore heat transfer calculations.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 47 OF 295 ENI S. The linear profile is the most widely used due to the complexity of heat transfer calculations in conjunction with the lack of sufficient measured data. These are: • • • Gas condensate wells with retrograde condensate.g. Use the tuned empirical correlations for black oil model variables if the appropriate although limited experimental data are available. High pour point crude oil wells. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION The approach adopted when choosing the appropriate method for each application should be: a) Use the black oil model flash vaporisation lab data if they are available. PVT properties for gas and gas condensate wells must be described with the compositional model. Black oil models parameters should never be used to predict PVT properties for gas or gas condensate systems. but only if experimental data is not available. b) c) d) Gas/Gas Condensate Wells . e. Do not use untuned black oil model empirical correlations unless the data available cannot justify a more rigorous method. Some wells have produced fluids with special properties that are very sensitive to temperatures and more complex heat transfer calculations are required. Use black oil model parameters generated from results of compositional simulation if it has been performed for incidental reasons.e. Although the linear approach is unrealistic. i. in gas wells it has amore significant effect. Profile based on a simplified version of the complete rigorous calculation involving correlating parameter for which there is unavailable information but with data which are available. Some software programmes. temperature profiles may be specified in five ways: • • • • • Linear profile based on measured or assumed wellhead and bottom-hole temperatures. Do not use differential separation data since it is not representative of the vaporisation that occurs in the tubing.A.
II . p vdv dp = g c dL dL ACC is the pressure gradient caused by fluid acceleration. 2.GG is the pressure gradient caused by the hydrostatic head of potential energy of the multiphase liquid. Gas and oil phases normally flow at different speeds which is the phenomenon referred to as slippage. f pv 2 dp = dL FR 2g c D is the pressure gradient caused by wall friction. therefore.p.JJ Eq. The equation consists of three components and can be expressed as follows: dp dp dp dp = + + dL dL HYD dL FR dL ACC where: pgsin θ dp = gc dL HYD Eq. Flow patterns are governed primarily by the flow rates of each phase. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Pressure Drop Calculation 0 REVISION Calculating pressure drop in tubing involve numerical integration of the steady-state pressure gradient equation over the entire tubing length. the pressure is sensitive to the relative amounts of gas and liquid present at any location in the tubing. the variables such as p and v in the pressure gradient equation are normally averages for the gas and liquid phases present. The amount of slippage that occurs is dependent upon the geometrical distribution of the gas and liquid in the pipe. tubing diameter and to a lesser extent PVT properties. Eq. This slippage causes an additional accumulation of liquid in the tubing which is termed liquid hold up. referred to as the ‘flow pattern’ or ‘flow regime’. In multi-phase systems. The hydrostatic head is the most predominant component of the pressure gradient in oil wells. The friction losses are the remainder of the pressure loss and are more significant in gas wells with acceleration effects being negligible except when near to atmospheric pressure.A. 2. 2.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 48 OF 295 ENI S. often accounting for 90% of the pressure drop.HH Eq. 2.
can be identified using flow pattern maps. Attempts were made to compensate for these errors in the equations by single empirical derived friction factor. it is seen that prediction of pressure drop in multi-phase systems is complex and has led to the development of different correlations to be used. Although many of these have been successful to some degree. it is obvious that the pressure at each point in the well and.2psi/ft Hence.25psi/ft 0. More recent models developed based on flow mechanisms and conservation principles. liquid hold up pressure gradient is limited by the ranges of data used in their development and no single method can be applied universally. The most common maps are empirically derived with coordinates based on dimensionless groups of variables that include volumetric flow rates. The early developed correlations assumed the flow as homogeneous mixtures ignoring liquid hold up effects.A. Subsequent correlations were developed to predict liquid hold up but most of these first required an empirical correlation or ‘map’ to predict the flow pattern. Flow Patterns Transition between the various flow patterns. diameter and PVT properties. offer more potential for accurate predictions but these are not readily accepted as standard design methods as yet.1 .0.p. Some software programmes use all the correlations available and the more recent promising mechanical models can be added. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Typical flow patterns are: • • • • • Annular flow Churn flow Slug flow Bubble flow Liquid flow. Typical pressure gradients in wells for different flow patterns are: • • • • Single phase oil Bubble flow Slug flow Mist flow = = = = 0. the total pressure drop is very dependent on flow pattern. Although bubble. as listed in the previous section.36psi/ft 0. . no single method has been universally been accepted. therefore.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 49 OF 295 ENI S. it is possible for oil and gas wells to include all flow patterns in addition to single phase liquid and gas.20psi/ft 0. 0 REVISION Considering the above. slug and churn floe predominate in oil wells. referred to as mechanical models. The accuracy of existing correlations for predicting flow pattern.
.8 Standard Deviation 163. table 2.2 Relative Performance Factor.3 12. RPC 1.8 110.c presents the overall results below: Absolute Average Error 101.r and figure 2.3 217.9 116.3 102.198 1. Slip flow correlations where slippage is considered but not flow pattern. Oil Well Correlations Oil well correlations for predicting pressure gradients in oil wells have been published and those most widely accepted in the Industry are: • • • • • Duns and Ros (1963) Hagedorn and Brown (1967) Orkiszewski (1967) Aziz.p. Mechanised models where slippage. Covier and Fogarasi (1972) Beggs and Brill (1973).2 78.C .Evaluation of Pressure Loss Methods Using TUFFP Well Databank . Flow pattern dependent correlations where liquid hold up and flow pattern are considered.s.8 41.A.597 1. Ansari recently performed an evaluation of the most widely used correlations and his own proposed mechanistic model.9 273.132 1.666 Method Ansari Hagbr Dunros Aziz Begbril Orkis Mukbr Average Error 9.4 -20.5 33. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Classification Of Methods 0 REVISION Published methods of multi-phase flow pressure gradients in wells can be placed into one of three general categories based on the assumptions from which the method was developed: • • • • Homogeneous flow correlations where slippage and flow pattern are not considered.9 151.3 -28.000 1. these correlations predict different pressure drops for the same application. performed using the TUFFP well databank consisting of 1775 flowing well surveys covering a broad range of production variables and pressure loss methods were also evaluated for each flow pattern.7 190.9 178.3 159. Validation and actual field data are the only means of choosing a pressure loss method but this is not available at the time of designing the completions. As illustrated in figure 2.178 1.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 50 OF 295 ENI S.4 177.404 1.4 207.7 Table 2. however any one of these may be successful in a given field. flow pattern and basic flow mechanisms are considered.6 134.
p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 51 OF 295 ENI S. The applicability of the various methods is compared in table 2. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Selecting the best prediction method from table 2. The choice must be made on experience.R .c is not appropriate as the best statistical results do not guarantee the best performance for a specific application.d.Comparison Lift Curves for High Gas-Oil Ratio Well .A. Figure 2.
S .Comparison of Lift Curves for Low Gas-Oil Ratio Well .A.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 52 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 2.p.
Needs to be verified through use. water. gas Table 2. This is the preferred correlation in the absence of other data.A. Optimistic. gas. water. water Beggs (1973) and Beggs and Brill with Palmer Cornish (1976) Flow Pattern Dependent Homogeneous Fair Good in some flow patterns Good Laboratory Field (annular flow) Laboratory . Should not be used except for similar conditions. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Method Ansari 1963) (TUFFP Category Mechanistic Model Accuracy Good Data N/A Fluids N/A Application/Comments Appears a little conservative. water. Should be avoided unless well is highly deviated. Gas Flow Pattern Dependent Fair Some Hagedorn and Brown data. Hagedorn and Brown with Griffith Bubble and restriction on hold up Kleyweg et al Occidental mod (1983) Orkiszewski (1967) Flow Pattern Dependent Field experiment Oil. Developed to optimise gas lift in o highly deviated wells (>70 ) in Claymore field.Applicability of Pressure Loss Prediction Methods Gas And Gas Condensate Correlations For gas and gas condensate wells the following methods are frequently used: • • • • Cullender and Smith Single phase gas with modified gravities Multi-phase flow correlations Gray correlation. Good where several flow patterns exist. Does not predict a TPC minimum. Conservative. air Does not predict a TCP minimum. gas Air. Developed for deviated wells but tends to significantly over-predict pressure drop. field Oil. Developed for deviated wells but tends to over-predict. tends to under-predict pressure drop. air Slip Flow Field Oil. water. experiment al plus field data Field experiment Air. can cause convergence problems in computing algorithm. Should be used with caution. Poor in bubble flow. Conservative. Optimistic. Tends to over-predict pressure drop. Aziz et al (!972) Flow Pattern Dependent Brill Flow Pattern Variable depending on version Poor Laboratory and field Laboratory Oil. Tends to over-predict pressure drop. water Oil. Gas Duns (1963) and Ros Flow Pattern Dependent Oil. .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 53 OF 295 ENI S. Usually not applicable for completion design. Gives consistent results for all flow patterns and TCP minimum. Liquid hold up prediction can be less than for no slip flow. water.D. Tends to under-predict pressure drop.p. water Hagedorn Brown (1965) and Slip Flow Good in some flow patterns Good Oil.
Effect Of Deviation Angle Nowadays most wells of interest to operators are directional or deviated wells. either the Beggs and Brill correlation or a mechanistic model would be necessary. the Gray correlation is recommended based on the work with ‘Reinicke et al’ but results should be used with caution. validation with field data is the only reliable method for determining the most appropriate correlation and. differing correlations should not be used for different deviations. In any study. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION As with oil wells.p. critical flow occurs. accounting for deviation by simply using the sine in the hydrostatic component of the pressure gradient equation may not be adequate in these cases. vertical correlations perform accurately enough for wells o greater than 45 . The accuracy of pressure drop calculations in these circumstances using correlations developed for vertical is obviously extremely questionable. For wells with o deviations up to 45 from vertical. The geometry of these restrictions varies from a simple reduced diameter axial flow path to a tortuous complex path. simple empirical correlations such as the Gilbert equation are sufficiently accurate. These methods have been reviewed by Lea and Tighe. If these reach sonic velocity. behaviour is very dependent on geometry and a simple Bernoulli type equation with a discharge coefficient is recommended. the Gray correlation is generally recommended although the Ansari model mat prove to be even more accurate since it includes a good model for predicting pressure gradient in annular flow which is the most predominant in gas wells. it is recommended that tubing size be assessed using these methods in addition to lift curve methods and that the most conservative approach be adopted. If this is the case. Although any of the correlations can be used. this is never usually available at the time that the completions are designed. Effect Of Restrictions Most oil and gas wells contain some types of flow control devices in the completion which choke flow. .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 54 OF 295 ENI S. Care is needed in the selection of tubing in that. For wells producing high gas-water or gas-condensate ratios. For critical flow. the phase velocities dramatically increase. For sub-critical flow. as the difference between the predicted pressure drops is generally greater than the effect of the deviation itself. even in low liquid rates. liquid loading can also be predicted using simplified methods presented with Turner et al which are independent of pressure drop calculations. In gas wells.A. Flow pattern and liquid hold up is very dependent on deviation angle. similarly. When a multiphase mixture flows through a restriction. wells can quickly ‘load up’ over a few weeks if it is not correctly sized.
they must be presented in the same plot from which the intersection of the lines can be used to predict the flow rate of a well at given set of stable flow conditions (Refer to figure 2. etc.p. will effect either or both the IPR and TPC and in consequence alters the production rate.A.. Systematically varying the system parameters allows comparison of the incremental effects on production and these can.Combining IPR and TPC Curves . 2.t ). Figure 2.4. to determine the threshold velocities for erosion to occur in piping systems but the validity of this for all conditions is questionable. GLR. Continuing in this manner provides information on which decisions can be made on optimum well configuration or optimum operating conditions.5. The API have published a method in API RP 14E. This section describes this analysis.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 55 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Effect Of Erosion 0 REVISION Erosion in completions occurs when there are high velocities and if there are solids particles in the flow stream. The most common points for erosion is where there are restrictions which cause increased velocities.T . reservoir pressure. Changing the system parameters like the tubing ID. in turn. be forecast and analysed for cost/benefit of the completion options. Flow Rate Prediction Following the establishment of both the IPR and TPC.
ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 56 OF 295 ENI S.A. the well will tend to head and flow at unstable conditions due to the cyclic build up of liquid and periodic slug lifting by accumulated pressure of the trapped gas. i. will give an intersection well to the right of the pmin and out of the flat portion of the TCP curve. On the other hand. Because of the inaccuracies of the two phase flow correlations and the difficulty in obtaining reliable data in this region. At low flow rates. Pmin.U. The TCP. the start of unstable flow conditions is rarely known especially with large size tubing.t. As the usual aim is to keep to the right of Pmin.v. If the intersection is either close to or to the left of the minimum (Refer to Figure). the gas escapes from the well and the hydrostatic gradient approaches the static pressure of the liquid. under these conditions. the hydrostatic component in the total pressure drop predominates. slippage occurs.t through figure 2.p. but without incurring excessive friction losses.Combined IPR and TPC Curves Under Unstable Conditions . In figure 2. the hydrostatic component reduces due the gas lift effect while the friction component increases until the minimum is reached when the friction pressure drop exactly offsets the decrease in hydrostatic pressure drop. occurs due to the gas and liquid phase velocities differ at low flow rates. the IPR and TPC curves intersect well to the right of the minimum and. As liquid velocities tend toward zero. the well will flow at a stable rate defined as the natural flow point. this is generally not a problem. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Natural Flow Point 0 REVISION The characteristic ‘J’ shape of the TPC means there can be several possible intersections with the IPR as shown in figure 2.e. The optimum tubing size. as the flow rate increases. Figure 2. or GLR.
the flow will become increasingly unstable and wells with large size tubing will die quickly. To obtain flow at these conditions. it is necessary to kick the well off quickly.v).IPR and TPC Curves with Two Apparent Intersection Points . Using smaller tubing may result in higher frictional pressure drops and if this reduces flow rates to below uneconomic levels.V .p. Where the curves intersect at two rates (Refer to figure 2. the intersection point to the left is always unstable and the well will either die or progressively produce more fluid until it reaches the stable flow point. whereas small tubing may sustain unsteady flow until the IPR and TPC curves become almost tangential. Figure 2. or to the left of the minimum.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 57 OF 295 ENI S. a tapered tubing string may be a consideration. a smaller size tubing or artificial lift system should be considered.A. Where the IPR and TCP curves intersect close to. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION If the natural flow point is in the unstable region.
p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 58 OF 295 ENI S.Combining Pump Performance and TCP Curves . pump differential versus rate) which is plotted below the well performance curves as shown in figure 2. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Artificial Lift Effects 0 REVISION A well will not flow naturally if the IPR and TPC curves do not intersect and in this case artificial lift could be used to provide the pressure differential between the curves (Refer to figure 2. An artificial lift system places an injection of energy into the flow system which displaces the TPC curve downwards. In gas lifted wells. the TPC is displaced as a result of the effect of the gas on the density.W. velocity and flow regime in the tubing above the operating gas lift valve. the displacement is dependent on the pump performance curve (i. From this an economic cost analysis can be produced to analyse capital and operating cost differences. By generating an outflow performance curve for each potential system.e.w). In a pumping well. to consider the effect of downhole gas separation on pump outflow performance.A. It is necessary when carrying out this analysis.w. Figure 2. This results in a combined outflow performance curve termed the pump intake curve. they can be used to compare the deliverability of the various methods.
Artificial lift is often widely used to improve flow stability and increase the production of existing producing wells.p.4 to 1. it is apparent that gas lift will maximise the deliverability of good wells (PI = 2. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION As shown in the example (figure 2. Figure 2.A.x below).ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 59 OF 295 ENI S. however the operating and capital costs of equipment must be justified against the incremental increase in production rate.X .Artificial Lift Options for Deep Wells with 5 1/2ins Casing . while submersible pumping gives the maximum rate from the poorer zones (PI = 0.5std/d/psi) provided 2 7/8ins tubing is installed.0stb/d/psi) provided there is no drawdown limitation.
analysis is still possible. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 3. There are two types of well test methods available: • Drill Stem Test (DST) Where Drillpipe/Tubing in combination with downhole tools is used as a short term test to evaluate the reservoir.1. in conjunction with the build up test. separates the fluids and measures the flow rates and pressures. WELL TESTING INTRODUCTION The main objective when drilling an exploration well is to test and evaluate the target formation. This was the original definition of a drill stem test or DST. This is termed drawdown. This is usually more applicable to gas wells but can be analysed using the Odeh-Jones plot for liquids or the Thomas-Essi plot for gas.A.1. It is normal to conduct a build-up test after a drawdown test. It is not usual to conduct solely a drawdown test on an exploration well as it is impossible to maintain a constant production rate throughout the test period as the well must first cleanup. Production Test Many options of string design are available depending on the requirements of the test and the nature of the well. • Many designs of well testing strings are possible depending on the requirements of the test and the nature of the well and the type of flow test to be conducted but basically it consists of installing a packer tailpipe. Types of Tests Drawdown A drawdown test entails flowing the well and analysing the pressure response as the reservoir pressure is reduced below its original pressure. . 3. During a test where reservoir fluids do not flow to surface. The drawdown data should also be analysed using type curves. 3.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 60 OF 295 ENI S. However. packer and downhole test tools and a tubing or drill pipe string then introducing a low density fluid into the string in order to enable the well to flow through surface testing equipment which controls the flow rate.p. it is not normal nowadays to plan a test on this basis. Multi-Rate Drawdown A multi-rate drawdown test may be run when flow rates are unstable or there are mechanical difficulties with the surface equipment.1. The normal method of investigating the reservoir is to conduct a well test.
D. or near to. . a simple form of test to evaluate the rate dependant skin coefficient. The flow and shut-in periods are of the same length. Usually the rate is increased at each step ensuring that stabilised flow is achievable. Flow-on-Flow Conducting a flow-on-flow test entails flowing the well until the flowing pressure stabilises and then repeating this at several different rates.p. the original pressure which is termed the pressure build-up or PBU. each rate of equal duration and separated by a pressure build-up long enough to reach the stabilised reservoir pressure. The durations of each flow period are equal. Modified Isochronal The modified isochronal test is used on tight reservoirs where it takes a long time for the shut-in pressure to stabilise. From these the permeability-height product. The flow rate again is increased at each step. This is the simplest form of deliverability test described below. Isochronal An isochronal test consist of a similar series of flow rates as the flow-on-flow test. where there is a flow rate dependant skin.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 61 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Build-Up 0 REVISION A build-up test requires the reservoir to be flowed to cause a drawdown then the well is closed in to allow the pressure to increase back to. This calculated rate is only of importance in certain countries where government bodies set the maximum rate at which the well may be produced as a proportion of this flow rate. This type of test is applicable to high rate gas well testing and is followed by a single pressure build up period. There are three types of deliverability test: • • • Flow on Flow Test Isochronal Test The Modified Isochronal Test. except the final flow period which is extended similar to the isochronal test. The final flow period is extended to achieve a stabilised flowing pressure for defining the IPR.A. AOFP. D. and the rate dependant skin coefficient. The AOFP is the theoretical fluid rate at which the well would produce if the reservoir sand face was reduced to atmospheric pressure. is to conduct a second flow and PBU at a different rate to the first flow and PBU. On low production rate gas wells. and in the case of gas wells the Absolute Open Flow Potential. IPR. This is the normal type of test conducted on an oil well and can be analysed using the classic Horner Plot or superposition. and the near wellbore skin can be analysed. Deliverability A deliverability test is conducted to determine the well’s Inflow Performance Relation. kh.
After the injectivity test. to provide a measurable pressure difference on the pressure gauges. The difference between the initial reservoir pressure. Pulse testing. Interference An interference test is conducted to investigate the average reservoir properties and connectivity between two or more wells. and the pressure to which it returns. Surface readout pressure gauges should be used in this test. It may also be conducted on a single well to determine the vertical permeability between separate reservoir zones. It is only applicable where there is no regional aquifer support. is achieved. the pressure fall-off is measured. which can be determined by conducting a step rate test. linear with time.p. biocide and oxygen scavenger. these must therefore be of the high accuracy electronic type gauges with negligible drift. Once a well is fractured. usually seawater offshore is injected to establish the formation’s injection potential and also its fracture pressure.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 62 OF 295 ENI S. Very high surface injection pressures may be required in order to fracture the formation. where the flowrate at one of the wells is varied in a series of steps. A well-to-well interference test is not carried out offshore at the exploration or appraisal stage as it is more applicable to developed fields. The water can be filtered and treated with scale inhibitor. if required. a short term injection test will generally not provide a good measure of the long term injectivity performance. The reservoir volume may be estimated directly from the depletion. . It is common practice to follow the extended drawdown with a pressure build-up. The volume produced must be sufficient.A. also the volume of produced fluid and the effective isothermal compressibility of the system. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Reservoir Limit 0 REVISION A reservoir limit test is an extended drawdown test which is conducted on closed reservoir systems to determine their volume. is sometimes used to overcome the background reservoir pressure behaviour when it is a problem. based on the maximum reservoir size. which may also be caused by the thermal shock of the cold injection water reaching the sandface. is the depletion. Injectivity In these tests a fluid. The well is produced at a constant rate until an observed pressure drop. The analysis of this test is similar to a pressure build-up. but is complicated by the cold water bank.
. it should be done in the simplest possible manner. The second premise is that. extent of formation damage and if there is a requirement for stimulation. in the most cost-effective manner. The test objectives must be agreed by those who will use the results and those who will conduct the test before the test programme is prepared. the Petroleum Engineer should not appear to be negative but work towards obtaining essential data.p. Such inter-disciplinary discussions should be formalised by holding a meeting (or meetings) at which these objectives are agreed and fixed. Currently. In many cases. which the company needs rather than that which is nice to have. if possible. completion practices. Testing is an expensive and high risk operation and.4) and. analysis can provide good data to help evaluate the productivity of the zone. such as coring. avoiding any operations which entail higher risk. therefore. The Petroleum Engineer should discuss with the geologists and reservoir engineers about the information required and make them aware of the costs and risks involved with each method. From this a Productivity Index (PI) or Inflow Performance Relationship (IPR) can be established (Refer to Section 2. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 3. By adopting this position. if testing is warranted. The objectives of an exploration well test are to: • • • • • • • • Conduct the testing in a safe and efficient manner Determine the nature of the formation fluids Measure reservoir pressure and temperature Interpret reservoir permeability-height product (kh) and skin value Obtain representative formation fluid samples for laboratory analysis Define well productivity and/or injectivity investigate formation characteristics Evaluate boundary effects. DST OBJECTIVE 0 REVISION A DST is conducted to determine the productivity characteristics of one specific zone. then actual producing rates can also be determined. actual well production rates can be accurately predicted from DST data as it shows what the well will produce against a gradually increasing back-pressure.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 63 OF 295 ENI S. such as running wireline or coil tubing through the testing string. should only be conducted for essential data. The starting premise should be that testing is not required unless it is clearly justified. They should select the easiest means of obtaining data.2. if the flowing pressure gradient in the tubing can be estimated.A.
smaller test tools will be required. considering packer fluids. For a 5 barefoot test. In the following description.25ins ID. refer to the Company ‘Well Test Manual’. prognosed production fluids. the bottom of the test string should be 100ft above the top perforation to allow production logging of the interval. . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 3.p. tools which are required both in production tests and conventional tests are included. if applicable. temperature and the stimulation programme. The list of tools is not exhaustive. In smaller casing sizes. the test string should be kept as simple as possible to reduce the risk of mechanical failure. The tools should be dressed with elastomers suitable for the operating environment. the tools should be full opening to allow production logging across perforated intervals. For more detailed information on well test strings and tooling. If conditions allow. DST STRING 0 REVISION The well testing objectives.A. Some generic test strings used for testing from various installations are shown overleaf. using full opening test tools with a 2. but similarly.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 64 OF 295 ENI S. In larger production casing sizes the same tools will be used with a larger packer. conventional test tools will usually be used with a packer set inside the 9 /8ins casing.3. and other tools may be included. In general. However. test location and relevant planning will dictate which is the most suitable test string configuration to be used. well tests are performed inside a 7ins production liner.
Typical Jack Up Test String With TCP Guns On Permanent Packer .A.A.p. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 3.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 65 OF 295 ENI S.
ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 66 OF 295 ENI S.Typical Test String With TCP Guns Stabbed Through Production Packer .p.B .A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 3.
C .A.p. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 3.Typical Jack Up Test String With Retrievable Packer .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 67 OF 295 ENI S.
A.D .Retrievable Packer .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 68 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 3.p.Typical Semi-Submersible Test String .
Can be detected if the reservoir is small and the test is conducted properly.p.4.A where: pws t’ ∆t’ pi q µ B k h = = = = = + = = = Measured pressure in the wellbore during the build-up. or calculated if not. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 3. mins Shut-in time. 3.4. from the wellbore. Depletion. mins Shut-in reservoir pressure. Radius Of Investigation. reservoir bbl/stb/day Formation permeability. 3. Damage ratio method permits estimation of what the well should make without damage. md Formation thickness. An estimate of how far away.6qµB t ′−∆t ′ log10 kh ∆t ′ Eq.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 69 OF 295 ENI S. These reservoir anomalies affect the slope of the pressure build-up plot. psig Flowing time. the DST if properly applied is an essential tool for the Completions Engineer. cp Formation volume factor. Measured if shut-in time is adequate. ft . In summary. They usually require substantiating data to differentiate one from the other. This may be better than core permeability since much greater volume is averaged.A. stb/day Fluid viscosity. Wellbore Damage. Pressure Build-Up Analysis Horner Equation Transient pressure analysis is based on the Horner pressure build-up equation which describes the re-pressuring of the wellbore area during the shut-in period as the formation fluids moves into the ‘pressure sink’ created by the flowing portion of the test: p ws =p i − 162.1. RESERVOIR CHARACTERISTICS 0 REVISION Reservoir characteristics that may be estimated from DST analysis include: • • • • • • Average Effective Permeability. Also effective permeability rather than absolute permeability is obtained. psig Rate of flow. Barriers/Permeability Changes/Fluid Contacts. the DST can ‘see’. Reservoir Pressure.
With a very short initial flow period. m is the change in pressure over one log cycle. then a plot of pws versus log10 ∆t ′ should yield a straight line and the slope (m) of the straight line should be: m= 162. selecting a value for t’p creates some problem mathematically. this is usually done. Experience has formulated some certain rules of thumb to help determine the shut-in time. In a multi-phase flow period DST.B The constant m is representative of a given fluid having physical properties µB flowing at a rate q through a formation having physical properties kh.A. depends on reservoir and fluid characteristics. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Conditions which must be assumed during the build-up period for eq. however little error is caused by assuming that t’p is the time of the flowing period immediately before the particular shut-in period.p. four points are the fewest to determine a straight line. t’p can be assumed to be the total of the flowing times with very little error.e shows an idealised Horner Plot with the pressure chart showing very simply how t’p and formation pressure pws at varied shut-in times ∆t’ are picked from the chart and related to the Horner plot. An important issue is the time required to approach steady state or straight line conditions. .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 70 OF 295 ENI S. . Usually pws is determined at 5min intervals along the shut-in pressure curve. Horner Build-Up Plot t ′ + ∆t ′ p Assuming these conditions are met. The ideal plot is where all the points align up in a straight line but is seldom found in actuality. figure 3.the slope m of the straight line is numerically the difference between the t’p t ′ + ∆t ′ t ′ +∆t ′ p =0 and at log10 p pressure value at log10 ∆t ′ ∆t ′ =1.a to be strictly correct are: • • • • • Radial flow Homogenous formation Steady state conditions Infinite reservoir Single phase flow.6qµB kh Eq. With equal flow periods on a multiple flow period DST. 3. and flow conditions.e. 3. As a rule of thumb. In figure 3. One of these is that generally the shut-in pressure must reach at least 65% of the static pressure. since ‘after-flow’ or wellbore storage effects cause deviation from the straight line in the early region.0 If the points are plotted on semi-log paper. Most of these conditions are met on a typical DST although steady state flow is the condition which may cause most concern particularly at early shut-in time.
B. 3. viscosity. 3.Idealised Horner Build-Up Plot Reservoir Parameters Obtained By Build-Up Analysis Average permeability. k. can be estimated from available correlations if the gravity of the crude oil and the gas-oil ratio are determined by measurement. h. determined from electric log analysis. can be calculated:: k= 162.6qµB m Eq. If the net thickness is not available then kh or formation capacity is determined: kh= 162. no analysis of the plot was possible unless the straight line was achieved. and formation volume.E . however. must be the net thickness of the productive zone.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 71 OF 295 ENI S. µ. sometimes reasonable estimates of formation parameters could be made. Formation thickness.p.6qµB mh Eq.D .A.C Parameters. Figure 3. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Prior to type curve matching methods.
md Flowing time. If the second build-up pressure was lower than st the 1 .0.E Static reservoir pressure.e.0 . 3. them depletion may have occurred.151 i ff −log m φµcrw Eq. mins . pi. s. psi Formation pressure at flow time T. vol/vol/psi Formation porosity.A. 3.85 s=1.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 72 OF 295 ENI S. log10 ∆t ′ = 0 .G where: pi pff c Φ µ rw k t’p = = = = = = = = Shut-in reservoir pressure. cp Well bore radius. Wellbore damage.F However.e. this factor cannot be readily applied to specific formations to obtain to show the potential of the zone would be if there was no damage. is: DR= m log φµcr 2 w −2. t ′ + ∆t ′ t ′ + ∆t ′ p = 1. fraction Viscosity of reservoir pressure. or as shown in figure 3. This was carried on a stage further introducing the concept of damage ratio.85 p i −p ff kt′ p Eq. DR. ′ ∆t st nd In figure 3. transmissibility kh 162. is presented by the empirical equation for the dimensionless value. psi (final flowing pressure) Fluid compressibility. q.p. skin factor: kt ′ p −p p +2. to the theoretical flow rate without damage: DR= qt qa An another equation. both the 1 build-up and 2 build-up plots extrapolate to the same static pressure lending confidence to the analysis. is obtained by extrapolating the Horner straight line to an ‘infinite’ shut-in time: At infinite shut-in time. 3.6q = m µB 0 kh is determined: µB REVISION Eq. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 If all the parameters are unknown. ins Effective permeability. which compares the flow rate observed. for calculation of DR based on the skin factor relation of Hurst and van Everdingen.
In summary.A.A’ in figure 3. If changes occur within the radius of investigation of the DST. Figure 3. then the build-up slope will change by a factor of 2.f . If it is seen that the rate of flow q remains constant. then permeability k or fluid viscosity µ are likely suspects for change as the wave of increasing pressure travels towards the wellbore. can cause a change in the slope of the Horner plot.F . leaves open the question of what caused the anomaly. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Reservoir And Fluid Anomaly Indications 0 REVISION Many times the Horner build-up equation does not hold up under actual case. Fluid viscosities change by phase change or type of fluid. This must be resolved through other geologic or reservoir information. or existence of a barrier. viscosity. they can be detected by a change in shape of the slope of the of the line. therefore the fact that a change of slope appears on the build-up plot. Alternatively. If the barrier is a straight line as A .Effect of a Fault . ‘Seeing’ a gas-liquid contact from an up-structure well would be difficult due to the normally short radius of investigation through a gas column. a change in permeability.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 73 OF 295 ENI S.p. seeing a gas-liquid contact from a down-structure well is a much more likely possibility. Permeability may change due to natural lensing or formation damage but it is doubtful that formation damage would affect sufficient volume of formation to be detected as a change of slope on the build-up plot. A sealing barrier such as a fault or permeability pinchout can cause a change of slope m.
3. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION The distance to the anomaly. 3. Obviously. change of permeability. or a fluid contact.p. hrs Exponential integral value. Eq. can be calculated: − 3. Depletion As explained previously.I Needless to point out.A.303ln p − E ∆t kt p a where: ra Tp ∆ta -E = = = = Distance to anomaly. then depletion may be the cause. the longer the flowing time. the deeper the radius of investigation.76×10 φµc 4 Eq. a reservoir would need to be extremely small for this to occur. Another reason that a recorded initial shut-in pressure may be higher than true shut-in pressure. ft Flow time. mins kt i 5. hrs Shut-in time at the point of slope change. whether it be a barrier. however there is plenty of field examples to prove that it occurs. This effect is termed supercharged which may be caused by leak off of filtrate over-pressuring the formation.H Radius Of Investigation The following equation from Van Poollen may be used to estimate the radius of investigation of any particular DST in an infinite radial flow system: ri = where: ri tp = = Radius of investigation Flow time. This effect needs to be diagnosed to confirm supercharging. .793r 2 a φµc t + ∆t a =2. ra. if the extrapolated pressure from a second build-up is lower than the initial pressure of the first build-up.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 74 OF 295 ENI S.
flow rate is calculated in scf/day or if in large quantities mscf/d. 3. For the Horner build-up plot. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Reservoir Parameters .Gas well Equations for permeability.J . pws. the values of Z and µ can be found from standard testing literature.Typical Horner Plot .p. R. and the absolute temperature factor. R = ( F + 460) Horner build-up slope for gas well 1637 q g Tf µZ mg h Eq. Figure 3. This involves correcting for deviation of the reservoir gas from the o perfect gas law using the gas deviation factor. during the build-up is t ′ + ∆t ′ p plotted versus ∆t ′ as shown in figure 3.Gaseous System 0 REVISION When conducting DSTs of gas zones. the square of the formation pressure. estimated wellbore AOFP for a gas zone are: Permeability: k= where: Z Qg Tf mg = = = = Gas deviation factor Rate of flow. mscf/day o o Formation temperature. Z.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 75 OF 295 ENI S.g.A.G . If the SG of the gas is known.
3.5Max AOF= qg p i p 2 i −p 2 ff Eq. 3. Ramey.A.65 p Absolute Open Flow Potential Using the single point back-pressure test method: AOF= where: n is an exponent varying between 0.L 2 n i −p i ) If n=1. 3.5 and 1. . It should be iterated that the Horner should be used whenever possible and type curves used to in picking correct straight line by indicating when wellbore storage effects have ended.p.0Max AOF= Eq. McKinley and Earlougher-Kersch methods have applications with McKinley being the easiest to use but the others perhaps more accurate.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 76 OF 295 ENI S.K (p qg p 2 i 2 ( ) n Eq.N Type Curve Methods There are several type curve methods are available for analysing early time DST data from pressure transient tests.M If n=0.0 qg p 2 i p 2 i −p 2 ff 0 REVISION Eq. Although these methods are generally used on longer term production tests. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Wellbore Damage: 2 2 p −p i ff EDR = 1 m g log t + 2. 3. they can be used on DST analysis to salvage some information from a test where sufficient data not available to obtain a straight line.
3.2. Common Test Tools Description Refer to the Company ‘Well Test Manual’.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 77 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 3. The downhole tester valve is opened to flow the well to clean up perforating debris and invasive fluids from the formation. After a suitable time (usually 1 /2 times the flow period).DST Typical Sequence of Events 3. When the string is successfully installed and all pressure and function testing is completed. 1 A description of the tools used in DST test strings are outlined in the next section.A. a fluid is circulated into the tubing to provide an underbalance to allow the well to flow after perforating. Bevelled Mule Shoe If the test is being conducted in a liner the mule shoe makes it easier to enter the liner top.p. the tester valve is then closed to allow the formation fluids to build-up back up to reservoir pressure which is recorded on pressure recorders or gauges. Figure 3. Basics Of DST Operations 0 REVISION In simple terms. the mule shoe allows entry into the packer bore. .4. a DST is carried out by running test tools in a BHA on a test string in the hole (Refer to previous Section 3.4.3).H . the tester valve is then reopened to conduct the planned flow and shut-in periods in accordance to the programme requirements to obtain other additional data and verification. If testing with a permanent packer. figure 3.h shows a typical schematic of a simple single flow operational sequence. The bevelled mule shoe also facilities pulling wireline tools back into the test string.
The valve is locked open on the first application of annulus pressure which is during the first cycling of the tester valve. It operates by manipulating the string (usually a combination of reciprocation and rotation) to unscrew and the upper part of the string retrieved. Gauge Case (Bundle Carrier) The carrier allows pressure and temperature recorders to be run below or above the packer and sense either annulus or tubing pressures and temperatures. Circulating Valve (Bypass Valve) This tool is run in conjunction with retrievable packers to allow fluid bypass while running in and pulling out of hole. Retrievable Test Packer The packer isolates the interval to be tested from the fluid in the annulus. .A.p. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Perforated Joint/Ported Sub 0 REVISION The perforated joint or ported sub allows wellbore fluids to enter the test string if the tubing conveyed perforating system is used. If the valve does not have a delay on closing. This valve should ideally contain a time delay on closing. hence reducing the risk of excessive pressure surges or swabbing. to prevent pressuring up of the closed sump below the packer during packer setting. This feature is important when running tubing conveyed perforating guns which are actuated by pressure. rather than the static bottom-hole pressure. It should be set by turning to the right and includes a hydraulic hold-down mechanism to prevent the tool from being pumped up the hole under the influence of differential pressure from below the packer. Pipe Tester Valve A pipe tester valve is used in conjunction with a tester valve which can be run in the open position in order to allow the string to self fill as it is installed. a large incremental pressure. it allows the test string above this tool to be recovered in the event the packer becomes stuck in the hole. This item may also be used if wireline retrievable gauges are run below the packer. The valve usually has a flapper type closure mechanism which opens to allow fluid bypass but closes when applying tubing pressure for testing purposes. It is automatically closed when sufficient weight is set down on the packer. should be chosen for firing the guns Safety Joint Installed above a retrievable packer.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 78 OF 295 ENI S. The DST tools can then be laid out and the upper part of the safety joint run back in the hole with fishing jar to allow more powerful jarring action. It can also be used to equalise differential pressures across packers at the end of the test.
This tool is available in either annulus or tubing pressure operated versions. but should be regarded as the minimum. One example of this is a system where the reversing sub is combined with two ball valves to make a single shot sampler/safety valve. The tubing operated versions require several pressure cycles before the valve is shifted into the circulating position.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 79 OF 295 ENI S. and therefore must only be used at the end of the test. This enables the tubing to be pressure tested several times while running in hole. Multiple Operation Circulating Valve This tool enables the circulation of fluids closer to the tester valve whenever necessary as it can be opened or closed on demand and is generally used to install an underbalance fluid for brining in the well.8 lbs/ft) should be sufficient weight on the packer. It also has a secondary function as a safety valve. They are non-rotating to allow torque for setting packers or operating the safety joint. 3 . The jar allows an overpull to be taken on the string which is then suddenly released. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Hydraulic Jar 0 REVISION The jar is run to aid in freeing the packer if it becomes stuck. delivering an impact to the stuck tools. This reversing sub can also be used in combination with a test valve module if a further safety valve is required. The valve is operated by pressuring up on the annulus. Downhole Tester Valve The downhole tester valve provides a seal from pressure from above and below. Normally two stands of 4 /4 ins drill collars (46. Eni-Agip’s preference is the annulus operated version. Single Operation Reversing Sub Produced fluids may be reversed out of the test string and the well killed using this tool. It is actuated by applying a pre-set annulus pressure which shears a disc or pins allowing a mandrel to move and expose the circulating ports.A. Drill Collar Drill collars are required to provide a weight to set the packer. providing better pressure data. The downhole test valve allows downhole shut in of the well so that after-flow effects are minimised. Once the tool has been operated it cannot be reset. Slip Joint These allow the tubing string to expand and contract in the longitudinal axis due to changes in temperature and pressure.p.
Sub-Sea Test Tools Used On Semi-Submersibles The sub-sea test tree (SSTT) assembly includes a fluted hanger.5. they are of the utmost importance as they connect every piece of equipment in the test string which have differing threads. The valve is very similar to the circulating valve (bypass valve) except it is closed by annulus pressure instead of weight. A control line is run to the valve through a conventional tubing hanger/spool arrangement.p. Some versions required by other operators are installed in the string immediately below a surface test tree in the BOP stack arrangement but this does not provide safety in the ultimate catastrophic situation when there is a collision by another vessel.4. 3. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Crossovers 0 REVISION Crossovers warrant special attention.A. slick joint. The designs can be like a modified lubricator valve or a completion type subsurface safety valve. they need to be tested and fully certified. Tools Utilised With Permanent Packer Systems A permanent or permanent retrievable packer arrangement is used on a Jack-up or Land Rig test utilising a production Xmas tree.4.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 80 OF 295 ENI S. If crossovers have to be manufactured.4. preventing the sump from being pressured up due to the volume of the seal assembly entering the packer. In addition. they must be checked with each mating item of equipment before use. Fluted Hanger The fluted hanger lands off and sits in the wear bushing of the wellhead and is adjustable to allow the SSTT assembly to be correctly positioned in the BOP stack so that when the SSTT is disconnected the shear rams can close above the disconnect point. If the tester valve can be run in the open position then this valve is not required. 3. . The tool equalises pressure between the sump and the annulus when the tester valve is closed. Tubing Hanger This will be spaced out to position the packer seal assembly into the packer and land off in the tubing hanger spool. Sub-Surface Safety Valve A subsurface safety valve is often run for safety being placed at least 100 ft below the mud line. and sub-sea test tree. Pressure Operated Bypass Valve This allows the test string to be stabbed into the packer in an un-performed well.
When closed it will contain pressure from both above and below. a latch assembly. . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Slick Joint (Polished Joint) 0 REVISION The slick joint (usually 5ins OD) is installed above the fluted hanger and has a smooth (slick) outside diameter around which the BOP pipe rams can close and sustain annulus pressure for DST tool operation or.p. The control umbilical is connected to the top of the latch which can. allowing safe killing of the well without hydraulic control if unlatched. It is usually run in conjunction with a deep water SSTT described below. Sub-Sea Test Tree The SSTT is a fail-safe sea floor master valve which provides two functions. it can prevent the full unloading of the contents in the landing string after closing of the SSTT. This valve eliminates the need to have a long lubricator to accommodate wireline tools above the surface test tree swab valve. Lubricator Valve The lubricator valve is run one stand of tubing below the surface test tree.4. under most circumstances be reconnected. fail-in-position valve. The SSTT is constructed in two parts. It also acts as a safety device when. Deep Water Tools Retainer Valve The retainer valve is installed immediately above the SSTT on tests in extremely deep waters to prevent large volumes of well fluids leaking into the sea in the event of a disconnect. The slick joint should be positioned to allow the two bottom sets of pipe rams to be closed on it and also allow the blind rams to close above the disconnect point of the SSTT. When closed it will contain pressure from both above and below 3. regaining control without killing the well. It is hydraulic operated and must be a fail-open or fail-in-position valve. the shut off of pressure in the test string and. if in an emergency disconnection. in the event of a gas escape at surface.6. contain annulus pressure.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 81 OF 295 ENI S. but open when a differential pressure is applied from above.A. the valve assembly consisting of two fail safe closed valves and. The lubricator valve is hydraulic operated through a second umbilical line and should be either a fail closed or. The latch contains the control ports for the hydraulic actuation of the valves and the latch head. The valves hold pressure from below. disconnection of the landing string from the test string due to an emergency situation or for bad weather.
A. with the large memory electronic gauges on the market today.4. with the modern type gauges. 3. The gauges record the events from initial running of the test string to well kill and retrieval procedures although. Downhole Pressure Recording The complete sequence of events are recorded by bottom-hole pressure gauges and some flow data may also be recorded on surface read-out systems. The problem then is to dump or ignore data points which are not relevant to data gathering. However. this is not necessary as they have sufficient memory to record at fast intervals throughout even long term tests without running out of memory. Other gauges. such as opening or shutting in the well. they may be programmed to ‘sleep’ while the string is being installed as it wastes memory.p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 82 OF 295 ENI S. when they change to very short time intervals where this facility is required. The fluid is vented into the annulus or an atmospheric tank to reduce the lag time and reducing closure time to seconds. . the tool operating procedures would be included in the test programme. If a programme required deepwater test tools. This system uses hydraulic power from accumulators on the tree controlled electrically from surface (MUX). The slow actuation is due to hydraulic lag time when bleeding off the control line against friction and the hydrostatic head of the control fluid. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Deep Water SSTT 0 REVISION As exploration moves into deeper and remote Subsea locations. This is overcome by use of the deepwater SSTT which has an Electro-Hydraulic control system. termed ‘smart’ gauges can be programmed to collect data at moderate time intervals until they detect a quick pressure change.7. the use of dynamic positioning vessels require much faster SSTT unlatching than that available with the normal hydraulic system on an SSTT. The Hydraulic Deep Water Actuator is a fast response controller for the deepwater SSTT and retainer valve.
gas-oil ratio and water oil ratio as a percentage of water in the total liquid stream. details of artificial lift system operation and all other effects on the well producing capability should be recorded. they provide periodic physical well conditions where unexpected changes such as extraneous water or gas production may highlight well or reservoir problems.5. sand build-up. to determine the capability of the well under various degrees of pressure drawdown.A. Productivity or deliverability tests are usually performed on initial completion. Gas production is reported as well as condensate and water. Periodic Tests Production tests are carried out routinely to physically measure oil. gas and water produced by individual wells under normal producing conditions. etc. In short. security of power fluid or gas lift gas supply.5. 3. well tests are tools which can be used to help establish the condition of production or injection wells. . with careful recording of the conditions is essential. tubing pressures. On gas wells. Descriptions of some of these tests are described earlier in this section. Choke size. Abnormal production declines may also indicate artificial lift problems. It is important that the well is produced at its normal conditions as flow rate will vary the relative quantities of oil. Accuracy in measurement. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 3. routine are less common as each well normally has individual measuring capability. On oil wells. Results may set production allowables. WELL PRODUCTION TEST OBJECTIVES 0 REVISION The main objective of well production varies from simple determination of the amount and type of fluids produced to sophisticated transient pressure determinations of reservoir parameters and hetrogenities. the wells must be produced at the normal rates. aid in selections of well completion methods and design of artificial lift systems and production facilities. Transient pressure tests require a higher degree of sophistication and are used to determine formation damage or stimulation related to an individual well. casing pressure. results are reported as oil production rate. Periodic production tests have the purpose of determining the relative quantities of oil. etc. or recompletion. scale build-up in perforations.1.p. volume and hetrogenities. gas and water produced under normal producing conditions. They serve as an aid in well and reservoir operation and meeting legal and regulatory requirements. pressure.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 83 OF 295 ENI S. Engineers need to make themselves familiar with the various test procedures and know their advantages and limitations in order for them to fully utilise them to optimise the design of completions. Potential production problems should be recognised in order that they can be properly handled such as emulsions. From the well and reservoir viewpoint. Similar to oil wells. gas and water. Well production tests may be classified as follows: • • • Periodic Productivity or Deliverability Transient Pressure. or reservoir parameters such as permeability.
3. therefore can be used as an indicator of well flow conditions or a basis for simple comparison of completion effectiveness among wells in a particular reservoir. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 3. pseudo-steady state or steady state flow.4. decreases exponentially with time.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 84 OF 295 ENI S. These tests are described in Section 2. This is then used to predict the PI (Refer to Section 2. depending on whether the pressure response initiated by opening the well had reached the drainage area boundary and on the type of boundary.5. they can be classified as: • • Flow-After-Flow Isochronal. They do. These tests are described in Section 2.4. During this the production conditions at the wellbore change rapidly and the BHPF. Commonly used deliverability tests for oil wells may be classified as: • • • • Productivity Index Inflow Performance Flow-After-Flow Isochronal. With a limited number of measurements. Most DSTs and many production tests are conducted under transient flow conditions and consequently the observed productivity will often appear greater than that seen in long term production.2. Gas well deliverability tests are designed to establish AOFP. Transient Tests Radial Flow Characteristics Flow from reservoirs are characterised as transient. This means that corrections need to made to compensate for transient flow behaviour as well as for skin effects.4. Productivity Or Deliverability Tests 0 REVISION This test is different from the periodic test in that the liquid flow performance can be determined empirically using measured flow rates at varying bottom-hole pressure drawdowns and they do not rely on mathematical descriptions of the flow process. They do not permit calculation of formation permeability or the degree of abnormal flow restrictions (formation damage) near the wellbore.1 or in Section 3. and is a result of the pressure disturbance moving out towards the outer boundary of the drainage area. pwf.1) and are successfully applied to non-Darcy conditions.3.4.p.1 above.1 above.5. Transient flow occurs when the well is initially opened or has a significant rate change. . they permit prediction of what a well could produce at other pressure drawdowns.1 or in Section 3. Termed multi-point backpressure tests.A. however include the effects of formation damage.4.
then PR will decline purely as a result of depletion and the flow is then termed pseudo-steady state. Accurate flow rate and pressure measurement is essential and more critical than on buildup or drawdown tests. Multiple rate analysis can be applied to several flow situations. Therefore. Pressure Build-Up Tests Pressure build-up tests are described earlier in Section 3.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 85 OF 295 ENI S.4. They minimise wellbore storage effects and phase segregation effects so provide good results where build-up or drawdown tests would not. a series of constant rates or constant bottom-hole pressure with continually changing flow rate. However if it is a no-flow boundary. 5 . flow becomes steady state or pseudo.g. then PR will not alter with time and is termed steady state. .A.1 . The rate changes must be significant enough to effect the transient pressure behaviour. Pressure Drawdown Testing Pressure drawdown tests have advantages over pressure build-up tests. Each type presents certain advantages and limitations and factors which are important for reasonable results. If the boundary is a constant pressure boundary.steady state. Multiple rate tests have the advantage of providing transient test data without the need for well shut-in. and an estimate can be made of the reservoir volume in communication with the wellbore.p. Transient pressure tests are classified as: • • • • • Pressure Build-up Pressure Drawdown Multiple Rate Injectivity or Fall-off Multiple Well Interference.DST tests. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION When the flow reaches the outer boundary. Multiple Rate Testing Pressure build-up or drawdown tests require a constant flow rate which is sometimes difficult to achieve over a long period of time. the well is stabilised and pseudo-steady state flow equations can be used to predict the long term deliverability of a well. production continues as the test is being carried out. e. uncontrolled variable rates. The analysis procedure is direct and simple but computations are more troublesome and are often conducted by computer software. the ‘Reservoir Limit Test’ can be used to estimate if there is sufficient hydrocarbons in place to justify additional wells in a new reservoir. Transient pressure testing and calculation procedures for oil wells are particularly well covered in SPE Monograph No. When the BHFP appears to be constant or declining slowly proportionally with time.Advances in Well Test Analysis.
Interference Tests (multiple well testing) In interference testing. a long duration rate change in one well creates a pressure change in an observation well that is related to reservoir characteristics. The responses may be very small. The injectivity parallels the drawdown test and a pressure fall-off test parallels the build-up test. Vertical pulse testing may indicate vertical formation continuity. Calculation of reservoir characteristics is similar. accurate pressure monitoring devices are required. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Injection Well Tests 0 REVISION Injection well transient testing is basically simple provide the mobility of the injected fluids is similar to the in-situ fluids. A pulse test is an interference test that provides data by changing production rate in a cyclic manner to produce short term pressure pulses which are measured in the observation well(s). .A. Using computers the data can be analysed to give a description of the variation in reservoir properties according to location. therefore.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 86 OF 295 ENI S. Orientation and length of vertical fractures may be estimated through pulse testing and reservoir simulation techniques. A stepped rate injectivity test can be carried out to estimate fracture pressure in an injection well which is useful in tertiary flood applications to avoid accidental injection of expensive fluid into uncontrolled fractures.p.
it is a completion design parameter. The production casing is the string. the production casing size may be swedged to accommodate larger tubing and completion equipment (i.a shows these various casing profile options. In low rate and deep land wells. The size of the production casing is primarily dictated to accommodate the optimum size of completion tubing and equipment. e. This larger tubing reduces friction losses. production casing sizes are typically 7ins or 1 3 5 5 /2ins. plugging back. there is a limit to the size of production casing which can be provided. the popularity of the mono-bore completion. However.p. The production casing and its cement isolates the producing intervals to facilitate reservoir control. anchor the completion equipment and act as a safety barrier to the uncontrolled emission of hydrocarbons. If there were a choice. etc.1.g. the completions engineer would always prefer the largest casing possible to provide the flexibility in well interventions. DRILLING CONSIDERATIONS These are primarily the responsibility of drilling engineering. This gives live well interventions much more scope to conduct stimulation. workovers and re-completions with artificial lift. however the production department provide the design parameters to the drilling engineers. etc.1.1. CASING DESIGN Refer to the Drilling Design and Casing Design Manuals for all casing design policies and criteria. figure 4. through which the well will be completed and controlled throughout its life. In high rate and offshore wells. which may have required a workover in previous times. or combination of strings.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 87 OF 295 ENI S. . This is a design which provides the greatest flexibility to live well intervention operations as the completion is full bore allowing regular tools to be run and used in the sump area eliminating the use of through-tubing devices. 10 /4ins. 4. offshore. 9 /8ins and 7ins are the common sizes (Refer to the Casing Design Manual). However today. straddle packing-off gassed out zones. where a large size tubing mates to a similar size liner utilising a PBR or similar type system. The production casing is usually: • • A full string of pipe cemented at TD. as is obvious in deep high pressure wells.e.A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 4. A drilled through casing and liner. 4. These manuals provide the policies and design procedures for both exploration and development wells. The decision whether to run a liner or not primarily lies with the drilling engineer however the impact of the completion needs to thoroughly considered. Casing Profile The surface and intermediate casings are designed to provide well control and borehole stability during the drilling operation. and/or artificial lift systems. TRSSV’s with control line) near surface or a hot string of isolated pipe. In highly productive wells.
Casing Specifications Design criteria and casing specifications are fully described in the ‘Casing Design Manual’. . production casing or liner below the production packer or liner hanger PBR system. However. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 4. The crossover between the two different materials must be selected in order that there is no localised erosion.A .2. will have similar specification to the tubing in order to combat corrosion from produced fluids.1.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 88 OF 295 ENI S.A. Casing exposed to H2S will have a specification in accordance to NACE MR01-75. Casing above the packer is exposed to the completion or packer fluid which must be chemically dosed to prevent any corrosion although.p. only a biocide and possibly corrosion inhibitor needs to be added. in general.Casing Schemes and Terminology 4. Specifically with regard to metallurgy. it is Eni-Agip’s policy to use standard service production casing where there is a casing tubing annulus as the tubing is designed for the well environment and isolates the production casing.
Completion tools or equipment operated by different methods must be adopted. . This is due to the poor performance of the API Buttress Thread.250psi.A. The main problem in casing design of producing wells over exploration wells is the increased temperature. The method of drilling horizontal wells also needs to be considered by the drilling engineer as the turning radius will be dependant upon the completion method employed. Refer to the ‘Directional Control and Surveying Procedures Manual’ and the ‘Casing Design Manual’. For instance. gravel packing and the completion process as wireline cannot be used above this limit. Although the drilling of highly deviated and horizontal wells is now commonplace it should o be noted that in wells above 70 deviation.2.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 89 OF 295 ENI S. there are problems with logging. Any anomalies found in the deviation survey needs to be communicated to the completion engineer to ensure that all potential problems are analysed and will not impede the completion of the well. To help overcome these problems. 4. a premium thread connection should be used to reduce the risk of leakage especially if the pressure is above circa 1. cementing. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 4. Usually production casing is held in tension but this may not be adequate enough in high temperature and thermal wells to prevent buckling.1. many operators drill ‘S’ shaped profiles with drop off through the pay zone for critical wells.000psi.p. Some operators specify premium connections if the wellhead pressure is to be above 5. Casing Connections 0 REVISION Where an annulus is to be used as a production conduit for gas production. however this does not satisfy all situations.3. injection or gas lift supply. the turning radius for an open hole or liner may be short but a long radius is required for gravel packing or installation of pre-packed screens. An overpull is often required especially if the casing is not cemented into the previous shoe. WELL DEVIATION SURVEYS A well directional survey must be carried out to ensure the tolerances for well deviation and doglegs have not been exceeded as the installation of the completion is sensitive to angle and getting fairly large diameter tubing through casing doglegs as well as placing extreme bending loads on the tubing.
4. The cement also acts to support and protect the casing from buckling. however this is not possible in high rate offshore wells where temperature increase in the casing/tubing annulus on the trapped fluids causes pressure which cannot be bled off at surface. Failure to cement washouts. CASING CEMENTING CONSIDERATIONS 0 REVISION The primary function of the cement around the production casing is to isolate individual formations to provide selectivity. Use cement with an API high temperature/high pressure fluid loss of less than 3 3 200cm /30 min for high permeability oil wells and 50cm /30min for gas wells. and bonding between the cement and the formation.A. Thermal wells are normally cemented to surface to avoid this problem. channelling and micro-annuli may be formed which are paths through which the formation fluids can flow. Use a 500ft low viscosity spacer with surfactant if required.1. This problem can be alleviated by thorough planning. Dissolution of evaporites by the cement. A cement job which does not successfully flush out the drilling fluid in front of the cement and.p. Production Casing Cementing The minimum cement column height requirements will depend upon local regulations. o Cement strength loss due to high temperatures (<230 F) when using normal Portland cement.3. The main problems associated with primary cementing are: • • • • • • • Channelling of the cement and bypassing of mud due to pipe eccentricity and poor fluid rheology. excessive movement due to pressure or temperature and external corrosion. Condition the mud correctly. using a good fluids programme and adopting good operating procedures. eccentric loading. Use a thin slurry at the front end. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 4. The cement column should extend well past (circa 500m) above the highest pay zone but also cover aquifers or any other potential producing zones. . Cement dehydration opposite high temperature zones. A minimum lap of 100m is normal. therefore is allowed to bleed off at the casing shoe. Use the highest practical displacement velocities. the list of recommendations given below will help improve the success of zonal isolation: • • • • • • Drill the hole within gauge. formation properties.3. if there is poor bonding between the outside of the pipe and the cement. Poor cement procedure leading to gas entry or cross flow. Poor formation bonding due to lack of mud cake removal. operating conditions. prevent movement of formation fluids along the well path for reservoir control. Many operators prefer to cement up inside the previous casing shoe to provide even greater support and protection. temperatures. In general. fluid properties and pressures.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 90 OF 295 ENI S. and to isolate higher weaker formations from well pressures.
200ft above the top of the pay zone.p.2. Centralise the casing in the pay zone.A.3. Generally there is ambivalence shown towards the results of cement bond evaluation logs and unless they show extremely poor conditions. The cement column should extend 1. Production Casing Cement Evaluation To ensure that the cement programme has been successfully isolated the formation/casing. the quality of the cement should be evaluated. Pipe reciprocation should be used or otherwise rotation. Use batch mixing whenever possible. Ensure quality control of the cement formulation is strict. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 • • • • • • 4. which uses eight helically mounted sensors to scan the cement and provides a measurement of the compressive strength which should in theory give a better detection. the tool averages the condition around the circumference of the casing and sometimes fails to detect small channels. . However. 0 REVISION Design the programme so as the cement has a minimum contact time of 4 mins at all points where zonal isolation is needed. formation/liner or casing/liner annulus. they tend to be ignored especially as repair of cement jobs is very difficult to conduct successfully. A more recent tool is the Schlumberger CET.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 91 OF 295 ENI S. This is carried out by running a cement bond log (CBL-VDL) which is an acoustic device that looks for channelling.
location. completions should be kept as simple in design as possible to minimise the installation risks and costs.p. Casing and tubing interface. in principle. environment. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 5. artificial lift method (if applicable). anticipated well problems and cost. Although the tools are available to provide the most complex completions to solve severe production or mechanical problems and meet the specific objectives. Tubing and wellhead interface. now need to be developed. that satisfy the above. the conceptual designs have been developed and the optimum well performance determined. it should never be forgotten that. particularly: • • • Reservoir and wellbore interface. The completion structure and procedures. it is necessary to describe the basic architectural components of a completion.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 92 OF 295 ENI S. This means that the SOR must be established. WELL COMPLETION DESIGN The aim of this section is now to develop the structure of the completion based on the work carried out according to the previous sections. Refer to figure 5. . However this cannot be carried out in isolation as well servicing and workover philosophies as well as the completion installation process need to be considered. To enable this process.a The solutions adopted will vary according on the well objectives.A.
Completion Design Interface Classification Options .A.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 93 OF 295 ENI S.A . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 5.p.
p. The downside of using multiple completions is there complexity.1. The effect of bridge plug setting and completion equipment lengths on zonal isolation must be considered as they may demand longer separation intervals. they may be inadvertently isolated behind a liner lap or shoe track. or as more likely. These aspects need to be considered as does perforating the lower sections in downdip wells in flank and bottom water drive reservoirs. Secondary Targets Potential secondary or re-completion targets need to be identified and included in the SOR because if they are not considered. .1. If fracture stimulation is planned the separation distance is approximately three times greater. Distance From Fluid Contacts The distance of producing interval from fluid contacts may influence the offtake rate and the perforating policy.A. e. FACTORS INFLUENCING COMPLETION DESIGN Reservoir Considerations Production Zone Isolation 0 REVISION Consideration of reservoir management and regulatory requirements will determine the zonal isolation in thick pay zones (<30m) or multiple-zone completions.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 94 OF 295 ENI S. between production packers. cost and installation. Minimum Zone Separation The main cementing service companies are able to provide information on the minimum separation by good cement between zones for effective hydraulic under differential depletion conditions. etc. however for the short term gain there may be increased penalties later with increased gas or water production which may need to be plugged off by a well intervention. They should be treated as a normal pay zone which will be left unperforated. Special attention must be given to layers with great in permeability variations to determine differential depletion.1. It is obviously economically attractive to perforate high permeable sections close to fluid contacts. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 5. A guideline chart for recommended isolation depth is shown in Fig figure 5. This can be achieved by drilling a well into each zone which is extremely costly.b below. The effects of partial peforating need to be considered on the well IPR. by using a multiple-string completion. Wells with gas cap or water drive reservoirs which need to be produced at controlled rates may also be candidates for a multiple completion.g. 5. With zones of have significant different inflow performance characteristics. then it may be more economic to segregate production.
This is particularly useful on perforated horizontal wells. 30 and 40ft. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 5. and underbalanced if desired. however one (or more sections) can be partially loaded.A. . The use of tubing conveyed means that great lengths can be installed and fired simultaneously. although deploying and retrieving these long lengths may impact on safety and needs use of a safe deployment method.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 95 OF 295 ENI S. To create an underbalance for other runs. 10 and 15ft and through tubing guns 20. Wireline guns are run and fired sequentially therefore only the first perforations can be carried out with a static underbalance.p. Casing guns standard perforating lengths are 5.B .Guideline for Length of Cemented Interval Required for Zonal Isolation Interval Length The interval length should be determined by reservoir requirements as perforating lengths can be adjusted to suit. the well needs to flowed which carries a risk of the guns being ‘blown’ up the hole.
1 for the Eni-Agip Company policy on the use of packers. is a mechanical barrier which is safer for BOP removal. Whenever possible and economical. this may mean running of a tapered casing string to accommodate the TRSV and control line. 5. To this end it is important to carry out the procedures to prepare the well by cleaning it and displacing to clean completion fluids and checking the internal drift. especially when running the completion from a moving floater so consideration needs to be given to the procedure or by using an automatic mule shoe. The type of production packer selected is dependent upon its application and installation method due to hole angle.3.1 and 4.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 96 OF 295 ENI S.1. Modern compact or high performance wellheads are preferred over the traditional spool systems as the completion may be installed with out BOP removal (Refer to the ‘Drilling Design Manual’). .A. etc. With completions large tubing sizes. Entry into liner laps in high angles are also problematic. Mechanical Considerations 0 REVISION The main mechanical influence on completion design is the casing profile and deviation discussed previously in sections 4.2. It is essential that sufficient clearance is available to allow the completion to fit comfortably inside the casing profile. perforated completions should be used over open hole for well control as the casing. whether it is single trip. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 5.2.1.p.2. Downhole safety valves are installed as per the En-Agip company policy given in section 8. Safety Considerations Safety of the personnel and well site installation are paramount in completion design and the completion procedures. Refer to section 8.1. once it is tested. Downhole packers in the completion string which anchor the tubing are barriers used to protect the annulus from well pressures and corrosion from well fluids although operationally they also isolate gas lift gas or pump power fluids from formation pressures in gas lift and pump completions.
A hole is now drilled through the formation exposing it to the wellbore. An open hole completions can subsequently be converted to a liner completion to overcome the selectivity problem.c). Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 5. Open Hole Completions Their use is predominately in thick carbonate or hard sandstone reservoirs that produce from fracture systems or thin permeable streaks which are difficult to identify on logs and are easily damaged by drilling and cementing operations.2. Slotted pipe Wire wrapped screens Open hole gravel packs Perforated completions. The well is now completed with no casing set across the formation (Refer to figure 5. They maximise the fracture intersections and inflow potential due to the large surface area if drilling and completion damage is avoided. Often referred to as a ‘barefoot’ completions. the method of completion entails drilling down to a depth just above the producing formation and setting the production casing.1.a): • • Open hole completions Uncemented liner completions. However they provide little or no selectivity in reservoir management to reduce unwanted water or gas production.2. The decision process depends on four key issues: • • • • Is there a risk of causing damage to well productivity with a cased and perforated completion ? Is zonal selectivity required ? Is fracture stimulation required ? Is there any potential sand production ? . Standard perforated Fracture Stimulation Cased hole gravel packs • 5. RESERVOIR-WELLBORE INTERFACE 0 REVISION There are three reservoir-wellbore interface options which can be further classified into seven major alternatives in completion architecture (Refer to figure 5.p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 97 OF 295 ENI S.A.
Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 5. sand screen or is gravel packed (Refer to figure 5.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 98 OF 295 ENI S.2. Uncemented Liner Completions Uncemented liners are used to overcome production problems associated with open hole completions and to extend their application to other types of formations.p.c).Open Hole and Uncemented Liner Interface Options 5. Although they have some advantages over open hole.C .2.A. they still have the same selectivity and undesired fluid problems. The formation is supported by a either a slotted liner. The selection process depends on four key issues is the same as for open hole completions: • • • • Is there a risk of causing damage to well productivity with a cased and perforated completion ? Is zonal selectivity required ? Is fracture stimulation required ? Is there any potential sand production ? .
The stability of the hole during under-reaming and the limitations this may impose on hole angle and screen length.1. however carries more risk than a cased hole gravel pack. External Gravel pack An open hole gravel pack is used where the sands are too fine or abrasive for a plain screen. The location of the packer and packer tailpipe. fluid viscosity and control objectives. A slot width that would retain the coarsest 10% of the sand is common practice in heavy oil wells with coarser slots for light oil wells.5ins on OD) and whether centralisers should be expandable.A. Slot width requirement which is dependent on the sand size and stability. reserve volume. the following additional issues need to be considered: • • • • Loss circulation control during under-reaming and tripping.254 . It also helps in liquid lift due to the smaller flow area. solid type. Wire Wrapped Screen A plain wire wrapped screen is used either as a simple filter to strain out small amounts of intermittently produced sand from a relatively stable formation or as a sand retention screen where high permeability. a designer must also consider: • • Whether to use the more expensive and finer wire wrapped screen or slotted pipe. Clearance required for washover (1 . volumes. and finer slots or pre-packed screens for filtering and for uniform sized sands. coarse sands would readily flow onto the screen forming a rubble zone. Is gravel packing more suitable alternative ? • • • For open hole gravel packs.p. it is the most effective sand control measure for weak sandstones and unconsolidated rocks. etc. The slot widths can range between 0. length of blank pipe. The open hole is under-reamed to remove drilling damage and to create a larger annulus for the filter sized gravel to pack against the formation wall.1. A slotted liner is used where there is a risk of wellbore instability to maintain a bore through the formation which otherwise might collapse and plug off all production. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION If a slotted liner or plain screen is to be used. and how the LCM can be subsequently removed before gravel packing. .016mm. Type of gravel packer and will it double as the production packer ? Slotted Liner This type of completion entails a liner with flow slots machined throughout its length installed below the production casing. or millable.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 99 OF 295 ENI S. Gravel pack design with regard to grain size. When properly installed.
Standard Perforated Casing Completions These are used when the rock is reasonably stable and permeable. shot density.p. underbalance or overbalance.g.d). Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 5. i. with the gravel forced into the perforations holding the formation sand in place. Unlike the open hole gravel pack. the deliverability requirements and method of perforating. The risk in fracture stimulation is that the fractures will more than likely not be contained within the pay zone and the casing cementing programme completion equipment rating. Since the gravel has an finite permeability. and perforating method. gun type. standard. Perforated Completions 0 REVISION This type of completions are the most common world-wide due to the selectivity. Cased Hole Gravel Pack Cased hole gravel pack completions are used to control sand production in perforated completions. the cased hole gravel is placed between the cased hole and the sand screen. flexibility.e. with the shot density dependent upon the vertical permeability and layer frequency. Fracture Stimulation Fracture stimulation is used to increase the effective sandface area and to provide a high permeability flow path to the wellbore increasing the IPR from low permeability rocks (<25md). would need to be designed with the additional loading of the stimulation operation.3. high shot density. Completion fluids programme selection with regard to fluid quality and formation damage. e. Type of formation and if special perforating techniques are required. Effective zonal isolation due to cement quality and distance between zones. etc. Deep penetrating perforating charges are generally used especially in hard rock. fracture stimulation and cased hole gravel pack (Refer to figure 5.2. The key issues in cased hole completion design are: • • • • Perforated interval selection. Perforating underbalance may also improved perforation clean-up. There are three subdivisions. . casing guns.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 100 OF 295 ENI S. lower costs. ideally. increased safety and convenience that they provide.A. The deep penetrating charges are desired to perforate through the damage zone cause by the drilling or completing process. through tubing guns or TCP. a large flow area must be achieved by using ‘big hole’ charges with the maximum shot density (dependent on gun size). ultra deep penetration or stimulation treatments.
A. Multi-string (dual) multi-zone segregated production using parallel strings using concentric strings.4.e): • • Commingled production allowing all zones to produce together. Single string multi-zone segregated production by initial (or eventual) commingling by sequential (or alternating) production. Multi-Zone Completions There are four main methods of completing multi-zone wells (Refer to figure 5. • • .p.2.Perforated Casing Interface Options 5.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 101 OF 295 ENI S.D . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 5. Sequential zonal production through live well intervention methods by re-completion.
They may also be used for reservoir management. If zones are close together. the initial completion can be installed to allow plugging and perforating of each zone by well intervention methods. Concentric strings may yield higher flow capability but obviously no downhole safety valve can be installed in the outer tubing. They can often double an individual wells productivity for a reasonably low cost increment. reservoir management and regulatory requirements. Dual String Multi-Zone Production Dual string multi-zone completions are often used offshore or on stacked reservoirs where the production rate is per zone is limited by inflow performance and the previous methods described above would be uneconomic.A. Downhole chokes or regulators can be installed to control flow from each zone when commingling to prevent cross-flow. Sequential Zonal Production Due to its simplicity and ease of installation. however there is a trade off in that flow efficiency of the deeper zones and depth access for artificial lift and well killing will be compromised. . If artificial lift is required parallel strings would normally be needed. completion designers prefer to use single string/single zone completion methods for mutli-zone situations. reduce excessive gas. Some operators use the casing tubing annulus as another flow conduit but this is subject to individual operator philosophy and regulatory rules dictating. This preference is subject. In this method. but generally they are not economic as they are too restrictive of well capacity. An option is to conduct a workover pulling the tubing and re-completing by moving the packer depth upwards. Either parallel strings or concentric strings can be used. etc. however. by allowing commingling or individual section production at different stages in the wells life in order to maximise the full potential of the reservoir. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Commingled Production 0 REVISION Commingled production is only allowable is limited instances where there are no reservoir management problems and regulatory rules allow. the zones are depleted from the bottom upwards and temporarily suspended or abandoned sequentially and then the next higher zone completed.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 102 OF 295 ENI S. to economics. Triple strings and indeed quadruple string have been used in the past.p. Single String Multi-Zone Production These provide easy methods of bring on other fresh zones when the first zone experiences production problems.
E .p.A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 5.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 103 OF 295 ENI S.Multi-Zone Completions .
104 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
STAP-P-1-M-7100 5.3. CASING-TUBING INTERFACE 0
There are three main casing-tubing interface options which have six sub-divisions (Refer to figure 5.f): • Packerless completions Anchored Unanchored Tubingless. Packer Completions Shallow set Deep set. PBR Completions Liner hanger.
Packers and PBRs are required to provide a seal between the tubing and production casing or liner for the following reasons: • • • • • • • • • To isolate the casing-tubing annulus from well fluids and pressure acting as a barrier on the annulus side. To prevent heading in the annulus improving flow conditions. Prevent annulus corrosion from well fluids. To allow the annulus to be used for supplying artificial lift fluids or injection of inhibitors. To allow the annulus to be used for production (if permitted). To isolate liner laps or casing leaks. To anchor the tubing if no tubing movement is desired. To facilitate well operations through having wireline nipples in a tailpipe, e.g. well plugging, BHP gauge positioning, etc. To protect formations from damage from well intervention or workover fluids by plugging in the tailpipe.
Some onshore low pressure wells are completed without a packer or liner PBR as the risk of damage to the wellhead, hence the risk of injury to personnel and pollution of the environment, is low. This has both advantages and disadvantages. There is one barrier less on the annulus side and the casing may be exposed to corrosive well fluids and the well pressure even if it is low and some operators do not allow this practice. On the other hand, on pump completions it is useful for venting off gas. It is essential for plunger lift completions which uses annulus gas as its energy source for unloading liquids. Tubingless completions, i.e. wells which use a small diameter casing or a tubing as the production casing, offers serious well control problems as there is no downhole safety at all. These are used on low rate, low pressure wells but are not allowed by most operating companies.
105 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
Anchored tubing completions are used on rod pumpers to keep the tubing in tension so that the reciprocation of the rods does not cause buckling on the upstroke and stretch on the downstroke unless the well is shallow and annulus clearance is small. Packer completions are the most popular due to their flexibility in the options in which they are available and their ability to be installed in an exact position at any desired depth compared to the liner PBR. The liner PBR completion offers a larger through bore than a packer option and, therefore are used in high rate wells and mono-bore completions where full bore access is gained to he formation. The liner PBR interface should not be confused with the packer PBR system which although is exactly the same in basic design, is used for packer-tubing sealing and catering for tubing movement.
Figure 5.F - Casing-Tubing Interfaces
106 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
STAP-P-1-M-7100 5.3.1. Packer Applications 0
Packer application with regard to completion design is addressed in this section as there are some basic features which affect the completion architecture. Although there are many varieties of packers available, there are three basic types used in completion designs: • • • Permanent Retrievable Permanent Retrievable.
Eni-Agip do not have any particular policy to the type of packer system to be used in a particular situation due to the wide range of packers available and changing technology but do operate a packer qualification system to ensure that any packer used meets with specific criteria. The packer qualification system is specified in STAP-M-1-M-5010. Retrievable Packer Systems The definition of a retrievable packer is that it is installed and retrieved on the completion tubing. They have advantages in that they can be installed in high angle wells although their operating differential pressure rating, temperature rating and bore size are less than equivalent permanent packers. It is important that designers fully consider the effects of pressure and tubing stresses on these packer systems and associated packer-tubing connections. Their packing element systems are also more sensitive to well fluids as they are more complex due to their ability to be retrieved but after redressing they can be reused. Retrievable packers tend to be used for the following applications: • • • • Completions which have relative short life span. Where there is likely to be workovers requiring full bore access. Multi-zone completions for zonal segregation. In relatively mild well conditions.
Retrievable packer setting mechanisms are by: • • • • Tubing tension Tubing compression Hydraulic pressure Tubing rotation.
Tension or compression set packers are very sensitive to tubing movement and are rarely used nowadays owing to the benefits and variety of other retrievable packers available.
107 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
STAP-P-1-M-7100 Permanent Packer Systems 0
The definition of a permanent packer is that it is retrieved from the well by milling. Permanent packers have high differential pressure and temperature ratings and larger bores. They have many options of both tailpipe and packer-tubing attachments to cater for a large range of applications such as: • • • • • Severe or hostile operating conditions with differential pressures > 5,000psi and o temperatures in excess of 300 F and high stresses. Long life completions. Where workovers are expected to be above the packer, hence not requiring its removal which is costly. Where workovers are expected to be above the packer and the packer tailpipe can be used for plugging the well and isolating foreign fluids from the formation. Providing large bore for high rate wells.
Permanent packer setting mechanisms are by: • • • • Wireline explosive charge setting tool. Tubing tension. Hydraulic pressure by workstring setting tool or on the completion string. Tubing rotation.
Permanent Retrievable Packer Systems Permanent retrievable packers are a hybrid of the permanent style packer designed to be retrieved on a workstring without milling. They offer similar performances as permanent packers but generally have smaller bores. All the packers above can be equipped with tailpipes to accommodate wireline downhole tools such as plugs, standing valves, BHP gauges, etc. 5.3.2. Packer-Tubing Interfaces Tubing can be interfaced with packers through three basic options: • Fixed By threaded connection to the packer mandrel as with retrievable packers. Snap latch requiring an overpull to release By an anchor latch system to a permanent packer. Free moving Seal unit in a packer bore. Seal unit in a PBR attached to the packer. Travel joint. ELTSR. Limited movement Seal unit set down in a packer bore allowing upward movement only. Closed PBR or ELTSR.
108 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
Free movement or partial movement options are used when tubing movement must be catered for otherwise it may be over-stressed due to tubing forces found through the stress analysis (Refer to section 7). However, sometimes they suffer from premature seal failure due to being dynamic seals and if the material type has not been correctly selected for the environment and pressure differentials. To help prevent seal failure, seal units can be shear pinned in a mid open or closed position to prevent seal movement until the stresses in the tubing reach a predetermined level. The selected packer-tubing interface has a significant effect on the completion architecture especially with regard to installation procedure, well kill method, stimulation treatment and type of hanger system. The most popular packer systems are those which have ‘one trip’ installation saving extra trips by workstring or wireline to install the packer before running the completion tubing. 5.3.3. Annulus Circulation Communication between the tubing and annulus on packer type completions is consider to be beneficial to efficient well killing, maintaining a fluid barrier in the annulus, circulating kill fluid before workovers or circulating in underbalance fluids well kick off. This is the same reasons for installing kill strings in packerless completions. Circulating devices, typically sliding sleeves or sliding side doors (SSDs) installed above the top packers, are used for this purpose but they have traditionally been a weak link in design when seals material was not suited to the well conditions. This would require a workover to replace the sleeve so other devices such as SPMs are used as the seals can be recovered and replaced by wireline methods. Some operators recommend that no circulation device be used which limits the flexibility of the completion and requires a tubing punch to be used for circulation before workovers. If a circulating device is undesired but the option is to kill the well by circulation rather than bullheading, a single shot shear kill valve can be installed which is operated by annulus pressure. Annulus circulation is used for: • • • • • Displace completion fluids and Kick-Off wells. Isolation/opening of producing intervals in single selective or dual selective completions. Well killing in tight formations where bullheading might be difficult. Installation of hydraulic pumps The SSD type circulating valves are normally equipped with a landing nipple profile in the upper sub to allow installation of a straddle to stop leaks or for normal wireline nipple uses.
Product specification level PSL (Refer to API spec 6A). mates and seals with the Xmas tree and provides annulus access to all the annuli. Retained fluid rating (Refer to section 6). Direct attachment to the Xmas tree (threaded). Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 5.A . oF -75 to 180 -60 to 180 -40 to 180 -20 to 180 0 to 150 0 to 180 0 to 250 -20 to 250 Table 5. annular safety system). . Ram type tension hangers. Downhole tubing hangers (e. Wellhead specifications are laid out in API Specification 6A and are rated by: • • Maximum working pressure according to the maximum anticipated surface pressure.API Temperature Classifications Above 250 F the working pressure is de-rated against temperature (down to o 72% of rating at 650 F.p.1.g. Temperature operating range.4. TUBING-WELLHEAD INTERFACE 0 REVISION The wellhead carries the casing and completion loads which is transferred to the ground through the surface casing. The casing head and tubing hanger spools are now commonly replaced by compact or unitised wellheads (Refer to the ‘Drilling Design Manual’) to reduce height and improve safety as there are less BOP removals for spool installations. Operating Range.4. o Temperature Classification K L M P S T U PSL O Tubing Hanger Systems There are five common types of tubing hanger systems available: • • • • • Slip and seal assemblies. • • 5. It also isolates the top of the tubing-casing annulus.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 109 OF 295 ENI S. Mandrel compression hangers.A. It consists of an assembly made up of casing head spools. tubing hanger/spool and Xmas tree.
flow or supply. Depending on the well location. well plugging for tree removal needs to be considered and that is usually satisfied by having a locking profile in the hanger bores.p. . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION The main consideration in hanger selection is whether the tubing is to be placed in compression or tension and/or the number of tubings. hence subsea tree. On subsea wells vertical annular access is usually required for well plugging which requires mandrel type hangers with orientation to the guide base and. downhole chemical injection lines. extended necks or annular ring seals.e. subsea. Dual hanger systems also need to be orientated to mate with the dual Xmas tree. either wireline nipple profile or a back pressure thread for land wells. i. downhole electronic gauge cables and ESP cables which are terminated by stab seals.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 110 OF 295 ENI S. Other considerations are DHSV control lines. platform or land.A.
p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 111 OF 295 ENI S.API Recommended Minimum PSL for Wellhead Equipment .G . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 5.A.
1 13 5/8 5000 13 5/8 5000 5. (psi) Btm (CSG) (in) ARPO MSCL 1 2.3 13 5/8 5000 13 3/8 & 9 5/8 MSCL 3 1.1 13 5/8 5000 9 5000 6.4 2.6 6.4 13 5/8 13 5/8 13 5/8 21 1/4 5000 13 5/8 5000 2.1 9 1.1 2.3 13 5/8 5000 11 7 1/16 7 1/16 7 1/16 9 21 1/4 5000 13 5/8 5000 2.B.3 13 5/8 21 1/4 5000 13 5/8 5000 2. W.1 13 5/8 5000 9 5000 6.P.2 13 5/8 5000 13 5/8 10000 5.3 13 5/8 10000 13 5/8 10000 10000 2.4 2. (psi) Ref.4 2.2 21 1/4 5000 20 & 18 5/8 10000 5000 5000 5000 10000 10000 2 x 2 3/8 2 x 3 1/2 3 1/2 2 x 2 3/8 2 x 2 3/8 2 x 2 3/8 DCSFSL 3 1.Typical outlines for on-shore.5 6.1 13 5/8 5000 9 5000 6.3 13 5/8 5000 13 3/8 & 9 5/8 5000 5000 5000 5000 2 7/8 3 1/2 5 2 x 2 3/8 MSCL 2 1. W.4 2.P.7 6.3 9 9 9 11 7 1/16 7 1/16 7 1/16 9 13 5/8 5000 13 5/8 5000 5. (psi) Top flange (in) Max.1 13 5/8 5000 13 5/8 5000 5. W.6 26 3/4 3000 21 1/4 5000 2.P.2 9 13 5/8 5000 13 5/8 5000 5.P. W.2 21 1/4 5000 20 & 18 5/8 (*) 24 1/2 1.2 21 1/4 5000 20 & 18 5/8 3° CASING HEAD SPOOL 10000 13 5/8 10000 1.2 13 5/8 10000 9 10000 5000 5000 5000 10000 10000 21 1/4 5000 13 5/8 5000 2. nr Diam (in) Max.2 13 5/8 5000 13 5/8 10000 5.8 6.2 21 1/4 5000 20 & 18 5/8 DCSO 1 1. off-shore single and dual completion class -A and class -B (STAP -M-1-SS-5701E) AGIP CODE CASING HEAD SPOOL Ref.8 13 5/8 5000 13 5/8 5000 5.4 6. W.2 13 5/8 5000 13 5/8 10000 5.1 13 5/8 5000 9 5000 6. (psi) Btm Flange (in) Max.2 21 1/4 5000 20 & 18 5/8 SCSO 1 1.4 13 5/8 5000 5000 10000 10000 21 1/4 5000 13 5/8 5000 2.A.5 21 1/4 5000 13 5/8 21 1/4 5000 13 5/8 10000 2. W.p.2 21 1/4 5000 13 5/8 5000 2. nr Btm Flange (in) Max. nr Max.P.5 2.9 6.2 21 1/4 5000 20 & 18 5/8 STAP-P-1-M-7100 DCSO 2 1.2 21 1/4 5000 20 & 18 5/8 DCSFSL 2 1. W.5 21 1/4 5000 13 5/8 5000 2.nr Top flange (in) Max.1 2.4 2.3 13 5/8 5000 13 3/8 & 9 5/8 DCSFSL 1 1.1 13 5/8 5000 13 5/8 5000 5. (psi) Top flange (in) Diam tbg (in) CASING HEAD SPOOL TUBING SPOOL TUBING HANGER CASING HEAD ENI S. nr Btm flange (in) Max.Eni-Agip Standard Wellhead Equipment Chart PAGE (*) Typical wellhead configuration for deep wells (po Valley) REVISION 112 OF 295 . Agip Division Ref. (psi) Ref. (psi) Ref.1 2.P. (psi) Top flange (in) Max.4 2.4 2.P.2 21 1/4 5000 20 & 18 5/8 IDENTIFICATION CODE DCSO3 1. W.1 26 3/4 3000 0 Table 5.P.1 13 5/8 5000 13 5/8 5000 5.
A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 4 3 2 1 20" 13 3/8" 9 5/8" 7" WP (psi) Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4 Section 5 3K (A) 470 620 472 - 3K (B) 470 620 472 - 5K (C) 470 625 472 - 5K (D) 470 690 670 581 - 10K (E) 470 690 660 700 - 10K (F) 510 850 700 700 -- 15K (G) 510 850 700 750 15K (H) 510 850 700 750 Figure 5.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 113 OF 295 ENI S.H .Typical Wellhead .p.
p.I .A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 5.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 114 OF 295 ENI S.Typical Unitised Wellhead and Xmas Tree .
4. Trees for sour service or high pressure will normally have two outlets. 15. Xmas Trees 0 REVISION The type of Xmas tree and construction are important as they have an effect on safety and cost. The kill wing is often permanently connected up to the kill line to a permanent pump or to allow quick and easy connection of a portable pump. . If the tree upper master valve and production wings are fully automated.4. production and kill wing sides.3. Pressure losses of the offtake system must be considered in the well deliverability analysis (Refer to Section 2. Chemical injection points are usually available at the tree or through the hanger system for downhole. 5.e. Metal-To-Metal Seals The purpose of metal-to-metal seals is to provide enhanced sealing where it is required in particular applications. Policy Metal-to-metal seals shall be used in the applications outlined in the following sections. The important pointers for the design engineer are: • • • Conventional composite flanged connection trees with a single master valve are the norm for land and low to moderate offshore wells. In very high pressure wells (i. the control system should be designed to close the wing valve first a few seconds before the upper master to avoid erosion or damage over a period of time to the upper master gate and seats as they are more difficult to repair.2. coiled tubing or snubbing services or for the BPV rod lubricator. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 5.3). A second master valve is normally required to enable repair to any of the other tree valves with two barriers in situ (the lower master valve and the tubing hanger plug). • • • • • A typical Xmas tree is shown in figure 5. Today it is normal to have to justify only a single master valve as the upper master is usually an ESD hydraulically operated valve which is at risk of undue wear and tear.A. The production wing.p. which is often a remote hydraulic operated valve.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 115 OF 295 ENI S.4.000psi) Eni-Agip normally installs an additional gate valve between the tubing spool and the Xmas tree to provide double barrier protection. A swab valve is an essential element to enable safe rig up of vertical well interventions by wireline.i. choke and flowline arrangement must be configured to meet with how the well is closed-in and opened up.
A. Oil And Gas Producers These tables apply equally to onshore and offshore wells.000 10. Between tubing hanger and tubing spool.p. Sweet Service Wells (with top hole temperature less than 100°C) ' = YES Sealing WP.000 10. C and D will be used in the tables in the tables below. psi 5. psi 5. These designations A.000 H2S Service Wells Sealing WP.000 >10. On production casing or production liner.000 10. psi 5.000 Gas Injectors Sealing WP. B.000 A B & = NO C D ' ' ' & ' ' & & & ' ' ' Sweet Service Wells (with top hole temperature exceeding 100°C) Sealing WP. On control line connections. psi 5.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 116 OF 295 ENI S.000 A B C D A B C D A B C D ' ' ' ' ' ' & & ' ' ' ' ' ' & ' & & ' ' ' ' & ' & & ' ' .000 10. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Application 0 REVISION The following criteria is applicable to the various conditions listed in the following tables: a) b) c) d) Between producing strings/casing/tubing hanger and tubing hanger seal flange.000 >10.
Well servicing or workover techniques also have an impact on the well area with regard to height and lateral space. The well location and type of development has a large impact on the techniques available and cost of well servicing and maintenance optimising the completion design around the potential problems and remedial techniques is a balancing act between effectiveness and cost. servicing can be conducted almost on demand. This will have an impact of the completion architecture and establish a philosophy. a design life for the completion will have been established. In this case to the stand-off can be increased but there is a penalty in lower initial production rates. Another example is on offshore subsea fields.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 117 OF 295 ENI S. where the stand-off from the water or gas zones increases the risk of producing early unwanted fluids.A. . This will have included identification of the potential reasons for well interventions or workover servicing. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Water Injectors Sealing WP.000 10.000 10. psi 5. As an example of this is horizontal completions selected to maximise initial well productivity. 5.000 A B C 0 REVISION D ' ' & ' & & ' ' Artificial Lift Wells (both onshore and offshore wells) Sealing WP. During this process future well servicing and maintenance will also have been planned. due to the high cost of subsea well re-entrys. FUTURE CONSIDERATIONS Built into the conceptual stage.p. well servicing should be minimised as they require a floating vessel from which to deploy the re-entry system.5. on an easily accessible land wells where servicing and workover methods are relatively much less costly. psi 5. This means well life should be planned for the life of the field or as long as feasible (typically 7-10 years) although some unplanned problems may occur. This may lend to the selection of a wireline retrievable type safety valve rather than a tubing retrievable type as in the event of failure. the valve can be replaced cheaply without requiring a workover. and may be problematic on platforms where space. Alternately.000 A B C D ' ' &(1) ' & & ' ' (1) If H2S is present it will be a YES. height and weight are at a premium.
2. The next production zone can then be perforated using through tubing perforating techniques (Refer to Section 9). then straddles are sometimes utilised to keep pressure off the SCSSV and Xmas tree.g. Excessive water or gas production due to fingering which requires continuing production from lower zones can be isolated by cement squeezing or if using a monobore type completion by installing a straddle across the interval on wireline or coiled tubing methods.1.5. If multi-zone multi-string completions are installed then the individual zones can simply be closed off by shutting in the well at surface or. producing zones are sometimes damaged by scale build up or movement of fines. If a multi-zone single string selective completion design has been installed then producing zones can be closed off or opened up by wireline techniques and hence. 5. . Formation Management As the fluid interfaces move through time and unwanted fluids are produced. by opening and closing isolation sleeves. If the costs of upgrading the well tubulars to resist these stresses are prohibitive. Stimulation 0 REVISION If future stimulation operations are required such as fracturing. Where this problem has not been planned into the completion design a complete workover to re-complete may be required.2. and need reperforating. If the well has been planned for these operations then the completion may have been designed to accomplish these operations without pulling of the tubing in a workover operation.4). This can be conducted by coiled tubing or snubbing services without killing the well. the surface pressure would demand a higher pressure rated Xmas tree than required for production only.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 118 OF 295 ENI S. if there are more than one zone to a string. If acid stimulations are planned. the effects of the pressures causing additional stresses on the tubing and packer need to be input and catered for in the tubing design process (Refer to Section 7).A. A single string sequential completion may be employed where existing perforations can be isolated simply by installation of a bridge plug on wireline but often the perforations require to be squeezed off with cement (Refer to Section 5. the effects on the completion materials needs to be considered or alternatively to use coiled tubing for spotting of the acid before pumping to the formation.5. Also. It could also increase the tubing movement and alter the choice of tubing movement device and spacing out. or as producing zones become depleted and require isolating before brining on other zones. etc. are more flexible but have higher initial capital cost. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 5. cement squeezes and reperforating techniques are required. e.p.
3. gas lift valves. etc. Well Servicing Techniques 0 REVISION Well servicing includes live well intervention services or major workovers to pull the tubing.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 119 OF 295 ENI S. Workovers can be conducted by: • • • Workovers rigs Drilling rigs Hydraulic workover units. Hydraulic workover cannot be deployed from any floating installation. chokes. A specialist subsea wireline technique has been developed for subsea well interventions without using the riser re-entry system which is much quicker and less costly. Snubbing. Fishing (when slickline has been unsuccessful. Coiled Tubing. standing valves.p. Slickline Is probably the most widely used well servicing method and is used for: • • • • • • • • • • Mechanical well clean out (tubing and sump) Installation and retrieval of flow controls (plugs. . Live well interventions can be conducted by: • • • • Wireline (electric line or slickline).A.5. Pumps. Snubbing cannot be deployed from any floating installation.) Tubing control (drifting) Calipering Swabbing BHP pressure and temperature monitoring Electronic memory logging Opening and closing of circulation devices Perforating Fishing. fishing electric line). Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 5. Braided Line Braided line is used for: • • Heavy duty wireline work (installing large heavy flow controls).
Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Electric Line Electric line is used for: • • • • • • Logging (PLT. 0 REVISION Coiled Tubing Coiled tubing (C/T) is used for: • • • • • • • • • Snubbing Snubbing is used for: • • • • • • • Stimulation (acidising) Cementing Cleaning out tubing and sump Gas lifting Installing flow controls (wireline type tools) Milling Drilling (underbalance side tracking.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 120 OF 295 ENI S. Snubbing has found a revival with platform horizontal wells where it is used to work in long horizontal sections where C/T may not be capable. Stimulation (acidising) Cementing Cleaning out tubing and sump Gas lifting Logging (stiff wireline) Installing flow controls (wireline type tools) Milling Drilling (underbalance side tracking. etc. . multi-laterals).p. Calipering Real time BHP surveys Perforating Packer setting Installing bridge plugs.A. multi-laterals) Fishing (generally when wireline has been unsuccessful).
6. This shifts the TPC minimum to a higher rate and. therefore widening the flat uncertain portion around the minimum. the selection may be for an even longer period of time.4). The net result should be higher production rates only if the IPR/TPC intercept remains to the right of the TPC minimum. This trend is downwards towards cessation of flow and . The following sub-sections describes the various factors and there effect on TPC. For example. the reduced fluid velocities experienced in larger tubing increase the hydrostatic head because of slippage. the maximum flow rate is obtained with /2” 7 tubing but only a slight reduction in flow rate is seen if the 2 /8” tubing is selected which gives steadier and regular flow. using the IPR for well 2. is greater than 1. As previously mentioned. at low rates. replace the tubing with a smaller size or to implement artificial lift which will have associated costs.05 of pressure minimum. It is generally recommended to select a tubing size such that the flowing pressure. the optimum tubing size will be a compromise maximising flow rate and having steady producing 1 conditions. Where high costs workovers are involved such as on subsea wells. typically 5-8 years. The choice at that time will be to reduce wellhead pressure. A fixed flow rate. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 5. it may be possible to accelerate offtake by the early installation of artificial lift. This usually means at the maximum initial flow rate and maintaining it as long as possible. pmin to ensure stability. Pwf. If the PI was infinite. Whatever the case. however. the selection process inevitably involves analysis of the gross fluid deliverability and flow stability under changing reservoir conditions to confirm that the production forecast can be met and to determine when artificial lift or compression is required. depending on the inflow capability (Refer to Section 2.obviously the tubing selected for the start of production will not be the optimum size after some period of time. incurring early loss of potential production.000stb/d and perhaps even larger tubing could be investigated. However. fluid velocities decrease and reduces the frictional effects. 1 .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 121 OF 295 ENI S. If the IPR curve intersects the TPCs in the region near the minimum. The optimum size of tubing is clearly the size which will be most cost effective over a number of years. one increase in API tubing size would double the maximum theoretical capacity. These changes are normally declining reservoir pressure and increasing water cut which will reduce flow rates. The example well #1 in figure 5.A. the changing conditions over the life of the well must be considered when selecting tubing size. as tubing size increases.j shows that the 4 /2” tubing size should be selected to ensure the offtake exceeds the target of 8.p. OPTIMISING TUBING SIZE 0 REVISION The optimum tubing size is selected to obtain the desired offtake rates at the lowest capital and operating costs.000 to 9.
ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 122 OF 295 ENI S.p.Effect of Reservoir Pressure on TPC .J . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 5.Example Tubing Sizes on Well Deliverability Figure 5.A.K.
facility malfunctions. Flowing Wellhead Pressure Any flowing wellhead pressure is actually back-pressure transmitted downhole to the bottom-hole flowing pressure. Gas-Liquid Ratio Increasing gas-liquid ratios cause a decrease in hydrostatic head and increase in frictional pressure drop which in the early stages may actually result in increased flow rates. However. figure 5.6. leading to decreasing natural flow rates. wells being produced or closed in which use the same flowline. This clearly shows how important the assumed wellhead pressure accuracy is in the well deliverability forecast and economics.3. it collapses towards the origin. In reservoirs where significant reductions in reservoir pressure are anticipated. above a critical point there will be a net increase in the overall pressure drop. All of these reduce the natural flow rate of the well. Also high wellhead pressures reduces the amount of free gas and compresses the remaining free gas. as illustrated in figure 5. 5.l shows the effect of increasing GLR.6. hence flow rates. build-up of wax.A. etc.g. The larger tubing sizes are more sensitive to changes in flowing wellhead pressure as the density factor dominates more than in smaller tubing. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 5. In these circumstances the frictional effects near surface become very dominant and can be alleviated by the use of a tapered tubing string.2. therefore reducing the potential drawdown. the effect on productivity must be considered during the completion design stage to find the most cost effective method of maximising productivity. Unstable flow conditions and eventually cessation will occur unless some other change in the system is made. e.1. . Reservoir Pressure 0 REVISION As reservoir pressure declines over time. both which increase hydrostatic head. 5. Again this means that smaller tuning may need to be selected instead of the ideal larger tubing to cater for anticipated changes in wellhead pressure. where workover costs are high to complete with smaller size tubing to ensure stability through the economic life of the well.6.k. Changes in wellhead pressure can be attributed to slugging in the flowline.p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 123 OF 295 ENI S.
L .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 124 OF 295 ENI S. Artificial Lift The intention of installing artificial lift is to reduce the hydrostatic head and.A.4. . This effectively shifts the TPC downwards bringing the intersection point further towards stable flowing conditions. Refer to section 10 for the applications and comparisons of the various methods of artificial lift.6. bottom-hole pressure.m. therefore. An example of rates which can be obtained by different artificial lift methods is illustrated in figure 5. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 5.p.Effect of Increasing GLR 5.
A.Examples of Artificial Lift Performance . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 5.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 125 OF 295 ENI S.p.M .
corrosion is an electrolytic process where electrical current flows during the corrosion process. .2. 6. In the presence of water. • Internal corrosion The well should be designed to contain any corrosive fluids (produced or injected) within the tubing string by using premium connections. To have a flow of current. • External corrosion Where the likelihood of external corrosion due to electrochemical activity is high and the consequences of such corrosion are serious.A. should be designed to withstand such an environment. during routine completion/workover operations or in the event of a tubing or wellhead leak. there must be a generating or voltage source in a completed electrical circuit. During the drilling phase.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 126 OF 295 ENI S. production casing strings are considered to be subject to corrosive environments when designing casing for a well where hydrogen sulphide (H2S) or carbon dioxide (CO2) laden reservoir fluids can be expected. The BOP stack and wellhead components must also be suitable for sour service. They should not be produced through the casing/tubing annulus. the production casing should be cathodically protected (either cathodically or by selecting a casing grade suitable for the expected corrosion environment). it is accepted that tubing leaks and pressured annuli are a fact of life and as such. Whether it may be present in large amounts or in extremely small quantities. CONTRIBUTING FACTORS TO CORROSION Most corrosion problems which occur in oilfield production operations are due to the presence of water. DEVELOPMENT WELLS Casing corrosion considerations for development wells can be confined to the production casing only. However. it is necessary to the corrosion process. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 6. 6. consideration should be given to setting a sour service casing string before drilling into the reservoir. CORROSION A production well design should attempt to contain produced corrosive fluids within tubing.p. if there is any likelihood of a sour corrosive influx occurring. Any part of the production casing that is likely to be exposed to the corrosive environment.1.
A. but usually also results in pitting. Other serious problems which may result from H2S corrosion are hydrogen blistering and sulphide stress cracking. • Temperature Like most chemical reactions. Using the partial pressure of carbon dioxide as a yardstick to predict corrosion. It is not as corrosive as oxygen. temperature and chloride content. Attack due to the presence of dissolved hydrogen sulphide is referred to as ‘sour’ corrosion. of the following conditions alone. Partial pressure 3-30psi may indicates high corrosion risk. It can cause severe corrosion at very low concentrations of less than 1. or in any combination may be a contributing factor to the initiation and perpetuation of corrosion: • Oxygen (O2) Oxygen dissolved in water drastically increases its corrosivity potential. The important factors governing the solubility of carbon dioxide are pressure. temperature and composition of the water. Oxygen is less soluble in salt water than in fresh water. . • Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S) Hydrogen sulphide is very soluble in water and when dissolved behaves as a weak acid and usually causes pitting. decreases the pH of the water and increase its corrosivity. Partial pressure <3psi generally is considered non corrosive. Oxygen usually causes pitting in steels. if any.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 127 OF 295 ENI S. it forms carbonic acid. temperature decreases the solubility to raise the pH.p. Pressure increases the solubility to lower the pH. It should be pointed out that H2S also can be generated by introduced microorganisms. The combination of H2S and CO2 is more aggressive than H2S alone and is frequently found in oilfield environments. Corrosion primarily caused by dissolved carbon dioxide is commonly called ‘sweet’ corrosion. • Carbon Dioxide (CO2) When carbon dioxide dissolves in water. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION The existence.0ppm. The solubility of oxygen in water is a function of pressure. corrosion rates generally increase with increasing temperature. the following relationships have been found: Partial pressure >30psi usually indicates high corrosion risk.
High velocities and/or the presence of suspended solids or gas bubbles can lead to erosion. • Velocity of fluids within the environment Stagnant or low velocity fluids usually give low corrosion rates. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 • 0 REVISION Pressure Pressure affects the rates of chemical reactions and corrosion reactions are no exception.p. above 80°C inhibit the SSC phenomenon.3. e. In gas wells. gas saturation with water will produce condensate water and therefore create the conditions for SSC. impingement or cavitation. . The procedure adopted to evaluate the corrosivity of the produced fluid and the methodology used to calculate the partial pressures of H2S and CO2 will be illustrated in the following sub-sections. More gas goes into solution as the pressure is increased this may in turn increase the corrosivity of the solution. FORMS OF CORROSION The following forms of corrosion are addressed in this manual: Corrosion caused by H2S (SSC) Corrosion caused by CO2 and Cl - Corrosion caused by combinations of H2S. but pitting is more likely. In oilfield systems. generally corrosion occurs only when the water cut becomes higher than 15% which is the ‘threshold’ or commonly defined as the ‘critical level’ and it is necessary to analyse the water cut profile throughout the producing life of the well.3. Sulphide Stress Cracking (SSC) The SSC phenomenon is occurs usually at temperatures of below 80°C and with the presence of stress in the material. Evaluation of the SSC problem depends on the type of well being investigated. Corrosion rates usually increase with velocity as the corrosion scale is removed from the casing exposing fresh metal for further corrosion. CO2 and ClCorrosion in injection wells and the effects of pH and souring are not included. 6. Higher temperatures. The H2S comes into contact with H2O which is an + essential element in this form of corrosion by freeing the H ion.A. vertical and deviated wells: a) In vertical oil wells. the primary importance of pressure is its effect on dissolved gases.1.g. In oil wells. corrosion. therefore knowledge of temperature gradients is very useful in the choice of the tubular materials since differing materials can be chosen for various depths. two separate cases need to be considered. 6.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 128 OF 295 ENI S.
e. is not known or the values obtained are not reliable. Undersaturated Oil In an oil in which the gas remains dissolved. . Gas Or Condensate Gas Well H2S partial pressure is calculated by: pH2S = SBHP x Y(H2S)/100 where: SBHP = Y(H2S) = = pH2S Static bottom-hole pressure [atm] Mole fraction of H2S Partial H2S pressure [atm] Eq.0035 atm and SBHP >4.5 atm. Material balance method. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 b) o REVISION 0 In highly deviated wells (i. because the wellhead and bottom-hole pressures are higher than the bubble point pressure (Pb) at reservoir temperature.e. the pH2S is calculated using both methods and the higher of the two results is taken as the a reliable value. even if in very small quantities. In this case the pH2S is calculated in two ways: • • Basic method.: Water cut >15% for vertical wells o Water cut >1% for horizontal or highly deviated wells (>80 ) 3 3 or if the GOR >800 Nm /m The pH2S calculation is different for undersaturated and oversaturated oil.A SSC is triggered at pH2S >0. is termed undersaturated. Otherwise the basic method is used. Firstly. deviations >80 ). the potential for SSC occurring is evaluated by studying the water cut values combined with the type of well and deviation profile. If the conditions specified above are verified then the pH2S can be calculated. Oil Bearing Well The problem of SSC exists when there is wetting water. the risk of corrosion by H2S is higher since the water. i. If the quantity of H2S in gas at the bubble point pressure [mole fraction = Y(H2S)].p. 6.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 129 OF 295 ENI S. The following formulae are used to calculate the value of pH2S (partial pressure of H2S) in both the cases of gas (or condensate gas) wells or oil wells. deposits on the surface of the tubulars and so the problem can be likened to the gas well case where the critical threshold for the water cut drops to 1% (WC <1%).A.
p. The pH2S is calculated by: pH2S = Pb x Y(H2S)/100 where: Pb = Y(H2S) = pH2S = Bubble point pressure at reservoir temperature [atm] Mole fraction in the separated gas at bubble point (from PVT data if extrapolated) Partial H2S pressure [atm] Eq. molar fraction in the separated gas at bubble point pressure (Pb) is higher than 2%.D where: PM Ci Mi d = = = = n mean molecular weight of the reservoir oil = Ci × Mi / 100 i =l Mole % of the ith component of the reservoir oil Molecular weight of the ith component of the reservoir oil Density of the gas at separator conditions referred to air =1 ∑ . PM : PM = γ × 1000 GOR γ × 1000 + × (d × 29 ) GOR 23. 6. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Basic Method 0 REVISION This method is used.A.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 130 OF 295 ENI S. without comparison with the other method. The value of H2S in ppm to be used in the calculation must also be from stable flowing conditions. 6.B Material Balance Method This method is used when data from production testing is available and/or when the quantity of H2S is very small (<2.000ppm) and the water cut value from is lower than 5% (this method cannot be used when the WC values are higher). Note: H2S sampled in short production tests. 6. is generally lower than the actual value under stabilised conditions.C The mean molecular weight of the produced oil.6 − 23. The following algorithm is used to calculate the pH2S: Step 1 pH2S is calculated at the separator (pH2Ssep): pH2Ssep = (Psep x H2Ssep)/106 where: Psep H2Ssep = = Absolute mean pressure at which the separator works (from tests) in atm Mean H2S value in the separator gas (generally measured in ppm) Eq. when the H2S value in the separated gas at bubble point conditions is known and is reliable or if Y(H2S).6 PM giac Eq.
p. Procedure For Calculating Henry Constant The value of the Henry constant is a function of the temperature measured at the separator.0035 atm and STHP >18. 6. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION The quantity of H2S in moles/litre dissolved in the separator oil is calculated: [H2S]oil = (pH2Ssep/H1 x (γ x 1000)/ PM ) where: H1 PM γ = = = Henry constant of the produced oil at separator temperature (atm/Mole fraction).A. The mapping method can be applied for temperatures at the separator of between 20°C and 200°C. There is SSC potential if pH2S >0. (See Procedure for calculating Henry constant) Mean molecular weight of the produced oil Specific weight g/l of the produced oil Eq. Given the diagram in figure 6.6 = = Gas oil ratio Nm /m (from production tests) Conversion factor 3 3 6 Eq. 6. H2S corrosion can occur at either the wellhead or bottom-hole without distinction.G (γ x 1000/ PM + GOR/23.63 atm.F The pH2S is calculated at reservoir conditions: pH2S = (([H2S]oil + [H2S]gas)/K ) x H2 where: K H2 = = Eq.6 x H2Ssep/10 ) where: GOR 23.E The quantity of H2S in the gas in equilibrium is calculated (per litre of oil): [H2S]gas = (GOR/23.a which represents the functions H(t) for the three types of oils: • • • Heptane PM N-propyl benzene PM Methylnaphthalene PM =100 = 120 =142 .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 131 OF 295 ENI S.6) total number of moles of the liquid phase in the reservoir Henry constant for the reservoir temperature and reservoir oil (see procedure for calculating Henry constant) In general. 6.
For this purpose the temperature values immediately before and after the temperature studied are taken into consideration. the H(t) curve of propyl benzene is used. the H(t) curve of heptane is used. If PM > 100. Comments On The H2 Calculation Having calculated the molecular weight of the reservoir oil PM res.A. If 120 < PM < 142 the mean value is calculated using the H(t) curve of heptane and the H(t) curve of propyl benzene. .d. the mean value is calculated using the H(t) curve of propyl benzene and the H(t) curve of methylnaphthalene.p. wellhead flowing temperature.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 132 OF 295 ENI S. H2 is measured in a similar way as H1. If PM > 120. If 100 < PM < 120. the H1 value is interpolated linearly on the chosen curve(s). using temperature measured at the separator. the H(t) curve of methylnaphthalene is used. Given FTHT. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Remarks On The H1 Calculation 0 REVISION Having calculated the molecular weight of the produced oil PM using the formula in eq. 6. the reference curve is chosen (given by points) to calculate the Henry constant on the basis of the following value thresholds: • • • • • • If PM > 142.
Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 130 Henry atm/Y[H2S] 120 110 100 90 methylnaphthalene PM = 142 80 N-propylbenzene PM = 120 heptane PM = 100 70 60 50 40 30 20 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 T C° Figure 6. Two situations can arise: Case A FTHP < Pb FBHP > Pb Case B FTHP < Pb FBHP < Pb .H(t) Reference Curves Oversaturated Oil Oil is considered oversaturated when the gas in the fluid separates because the pressure of the system is lower than the bubble point pressure.A .p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 133 OF 295 ENI S.A.
The error made can be high when Pb > FBHP. calculation of pH2S can be approximated on the basis of the following: • The PVTs are reliable. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Calculation Of Partial Pressure In Case A: 1) 2) 0 REVISION Calculation is of the partial pressure in the reservoir: In this case pH2S is calculated in the way described for undersaturated oil.p.e. the partial pressure is calculated as: pH2S = Y(H2S) x FBHP 1 where: Y(H2S) = Molar fraction in gas separated at FBHP and at reservoir temperature (from PVT) • The PVTs are not reliable.0035 atm and STHP >18. Y(H2S) >0. Basic Method pH2S = STHP x Y(H2S)/100 where: STHP = Y(H2S) = pH2S = Static tubing head pressure [atm] Mole fraction in separated gas at STHP pressure and wellhead temperature Partial H2S pressure [atm] The SSC phenomenon is triggered off at the wellhead if pH2S >0. these are the worst conditions. 1 . the material balance method can be used as in the case of undersaturated oil. 2 If the percentage (ppm) of H S in the separated gas under static conditions is not known.A. the corresponding value in reservoir conditions is assumed as being partial pressure at the wellhead. i. Calculation is of the partial pressure at the wellhead. Calculation Of Partial Pressure At Wellhead The calculation method is that used for case A (FTHP <Pb) 2 If the percentage (ppm) of H2S in the gas under static conditions is not known.63 atm. the 2 corresponding value in reservoir conditions is assumed as being partial pressure at the wellhead.2%. when FTHP <Pb: The data result from the production conditions and only the basic method is used.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 134 OF 295 ENI S. FBHP <Pb. Calculation Of Partial Pressure In Case B: Calculation of partial pressure in the reservoir: In the reservoir the gas is already separated.
e. If the conditions described in section 6. the possibility that corrosions exist in water cut values combined with the type of well and deviation profile is evaluated.2. Gas Or Condensate Gas Wells The partial pressure is calculated: pCO2 = SBHP x Y(CO2)/100 where: SBHP = Y(CO2) = pCO2 = Static bottom-hole pressure [atm] Mole fraction of CO2 Partial pressure of CO2 [atm] Corrosion occurs if pCO2 >0. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 6. The pCO2 values calculated in this way are used to evaluate the corrosion at bottom hole and wellhead. Corrosion Caused By CO2 And Cl0 REVISION In the presence of water.p.: • • Water cut >15% for vertical wells.e. Water cut >1% for horizontal or highly deviated wells (> 80 degrees). . Undersaturated Oil Wells The partial pressure of CO2 is calculated: pCO2 = Pb x Y(CO2)/100 where: Pb = Y(CO2) = pCO2 = Bubble point pressure at reservoir temperature Mole fraction of CO2 in separated gas at bubble point pressure (from the PVTs) Partial pressure of CO2 [atm] Corrosion occurs if pCO2 >0. CO2 gives rise to a corrosion form which is different to those caused by the presence of H2S.1 exist. then the pCO2 is then calculated.3.3.A.2 atm. pCO2 at wellhead is assumed as corresponding to reservoir conditions. Oil Bearing Wells The problem exists where there is wetting water. i. It also occurs only if the partial pressure of CO2 exceeds a particular threshold.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 135 OF 295 ENI S. i.2 atm. As in the case of SSC.
the corresponding value in reservoir conditions is assumed as being partial pressure at the wellhead 3 .p. Two situations may arise: Case A FTHP <Pb FBHP >Pb Case B FTHP <Pb FBHP <Pb Calculation Of Partial Pressure In Case A: Calculation of pCO2 in reservoir conditions: FBHP >Pb pCO2 is calculated in the same way as undersaturated oil wells earlier in this section.2 atm. If the percentage (ppm) of CO2 in the gas under static conditions is not known. Calculation Of pCO2 At Wellhead: pCO2 = STHP x Y(CO2)/100 where: Y(CO2) = STHP = Mole fraction in separated gas at STHP3 Static tubing head pressure [atm] Corrosion occurs if pCO2 >0.2 atm. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Oversaturated Oil 0 REVISION The oil is considered oversaturated when the gas separates in the fluid because the pressure of the system is lower than bubble point pressure. pCO2 = Pb x Y(CO2)/100 where: Pb = Y(CO2) = pCO2 = Bubble point pressure at reservoir temperature Mole fraction in separated gas at bubble point pressure (from the PVTs) Partial pressure of CO2 [atm] Corrosion occurs if pCO2 >0.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 136 OF 295 ENI S.A.
3. - If the percentage (ppm) of CO2 in the gas under flowing/static conditions is not known. In this case the problem is much more complex and the choice of suitable material is more delicate.p. 4 .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 137 OF 295 ENI S. the corresponding value in reservoir conditions is assumed as being partial pressure at the wellhead. CO2 And ClIt is possible to encounter H2S and CO2 besides Cl .3.2 atm. Corrosion Caused By H2S. The phenomenon is diagnosed by calculating the partial pressures of H2S and CO2 and comparing them with the respective thresholds. 6. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Calculation Of Partial Pressure In Case B: Calculation of pCO2 at reservoir conditions: pCO2 = FBHP x Y(CO2)/100 where: Y(CO2) = 0 REVISION Mole fraction in separated gas at pressure FBHP (from the PVTs) Calculation Of pCO2 At Wellhead: The calculation method is the same as the one used in the wellhead conditions in case A: pCO2 = STHP x Y(CO2)/100 where: Y(CO2) = Mole fraction in separated gas at STHP4 There is corrosion if pCO2 >0.A.
p.a below.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 138 OF 295 ENI S. Measure Control of the environment • • • • • • • • • Means pH Temperature Pressure Chloride concentration CO2 concentration 2 H S concentration 2 H O concentration Flow rate Inhibitors Surface treatment • Plastic coating • Plating the alloying elements micro Improvement of the corrosion resistivity of the Addition of steel structure Table 6.4.Counter Measures to Prevent Corrosion . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 6.A . CORROSION CONTROL MEASURES 0 REVISION Corrosion control measures may involve the use of one or more of the following: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Cathodic protection Chemical inhibition Chemical control Oxygen scavengers Chemical sulphide scavengers pH adjustment Deposit control Coatings Non metallic materials or metallurgical Control Stress reduction Elimination of sharp bends Elimination of shock loads and vibration Improved handling procedures Corrosion allowances in design Improved welding procedures Organisation of repair operations. Refer to table 6.A.
Stainless steels are strongly magnetic whatever the heat treatment condition. however it is occasionally used for production casing or tubing below the packer depth.6. CORROSION RESISTANCE OF STAINLESS STEELS Stainless steel is usually used in applications for production tubing. steam or other environments. standard batch. silicon. cooling waters. Martensitic Stainless Steels The martensitic stainless steels contain chromium as their principal alloying element. The most commonly used of the martensitic stainless steels is AISI Type 410. an iron alloy usually must contain at least 12% chromium in volume. metallurgical structure and mechanical properties these are: 6. extended batch) Continuous treatment Squeeze treatment Atomised inhibitor squeeze . a corrosion inhibitor is a substance which. and sulphur are added in small amounts for other properties in some grades. selenium. when added to an environment. The only grade of oilfield tubular used in this category is 13Cr. although some chromium content may be as high as 18%. the microstructure of these steels is martensitic. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 6.6. molybdenum. Thus. The corrosion resistance of stainless steels is due to the ability of the chromium to passivate the surface of the alloy. Stainless steels may be divided into four distinct classes on the basis of their chemical content. There are many techniques used to apply corrosion inhibitors in oil and gas wells: • • • • • • 6. The carbon content ranges from 0. To be classed as a stainless steel. The most common types contain around 12% chromium. either continuously or intermittently to prevent serious corrosion.1.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 139 OF 295 ENI S. The martensitic stainless steels are hardened by the same heat treatment procedures used to harden carbon and alloy steels. The main reason for the development of stainless steel is its resistance to corrosion.weighted liquids Capsules Sticks.p. columbium.08% to 1. decreases the rate of attack by the environmental on a metal. .5.10% and other elements such as nickel. CORROSION INHIBITORS 0 REVISION An inhibitor is a substance which retards or slows down a chemical reaction.A. The most important characteristic that distinguishes these steels from other grades is their response to heat treatment. As their name indicates. Corrosion inhibitors are commonly added in small amounts to acids. The martensitic stainless steels are included in the ‘400’ series of stainless steels. Batch treatment (tubing displacement.
The chromium content ranges between 13% to 27% but are not able to be hardened by heat treatment. The distinguishing characteristic of the precipitation hardened stainless steel is that through specific heat treatments at relatively low temperatures. Precipitation in alloys is analogous to precipitation as rain or snow. Austenitic stainless steels are grouped in the ‘300’ series. the most common being 304.6. and the carbon content is generally lower. stainless steel. with other elements added for particular reasons. the steels can be hardened to varying strength levels. Austenitic Stainless Steels The austenitic stainless steels have two principal alloying elements. Ferrite is simply body cantered cubic iron or an alloy based on this structure. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 6.2. Ferritic stainless steels are also part of the ‘400’ series. is the ferritic stainless steels. These are most commonly used for component parts in downhole and surface tools and not as oilfield tubulars.b for the various compositions of stainless steels. 316 high Cr and Ni which may include Mo. They are used principally for their temperature properties.A.p. Others commonly used are 303 free machining. The chromium contents of ferritic stainless steels is normally higher than that of the martensitic. These steels are widely used in the oilfield for fittings and control lines. and may range up to as high as 25% chromium and 20% nickel. They are not able to be hardened by heat treatment although they are hardenable to some extent by cold working and are generally non-magnetic. 6.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 140 OF 295 ENI S. but due to its low strength is not used for well tubulars. Their micro-structure consists essentially of austenite which is face cantered cubic iron or an iron alloy based on this structure.6. . Ferritic Stainless Steels 0 REVISION The second class of stainless steels.6. Most can be formed and machined before the final heat treatment and the finished product being hardened. Refer to figure 6.4. and there is a wide variety of compositions available. Most were developed as proprietary alloys. and 347 stabilised for welding and corrosion resistance. which are also strongly magnetic. The microstructure of the ferritic stainless steels consists of ferrite. 430.3. 6. and 436. which contain various amounts of chromium and nickel. They contain a minimum of 18% chromium and 8% nickel. but their strength is lower than martensitic and ferritic stainless steels. the principal types being 405. They combine the high strength of the martensitic stainless steels with the good corrosion resistance properties of the austenitic stainless steels. Austenitic stainless steels generally have the highest corrosion resistance of any of the stainless steels. Precipitation Hardening Stainless Steels The most recent development in stainless steel is a general class known as ‘precipitation hardened stainless steels’. chromium and nickel. which are similar to the martensitic stainless steels in that they have chromium as the principal alloying element.
A.Stainless Steel Compositions .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 141 OF 295 ENI S.B. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 6.p.
c and figure 6.7. 6. This material is used extensively for tubulars used in severe CO2 and H2S conditions. As a general note.5. Refer to figure 6. Casing and tubing material will be selected according to the amount of H2S and other corrosive media present.7.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 142 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 6. ferritic-austenitic (duplex) stainless steel consists of between 40-70% ferrite and has a typical composition of 22% Cr-5.6. the presence of CO2 may lead to corrosion on those parts coming in contact with CO2 which normally means the production tubing and part of the production casing below the packer. where there is H2S. if using carbon steel casing. consideration should be given to limit casing and wellhead yield strength according to API 5CT and ‘NACE’ standard MR-01-75. H2S Corrosion In wells. there is a large gap between the 13Cr and Duplex Stainless Steels used as tubulars for their good anti-corrosion properties. 6. . Generally. Duplex Stainless Steel 0 REVISION In general.p.14% N.5% Ni-3% Mo-0. resistant to corrosion. wells producing CO2 partial pressure higher than 20psi requires inhibition to limit corrosion. 6. This gap is attempted to be filled with ‘Super 13Cr’ tubing being developed. The resulting steel has properties that are normally found in both phases: the ferrite promotes increased yield strength and resistance to chloride and hydrogen sulphide corrosion cracking. Inhibitor injection.7.A. COMPANY DESIGN PROCEDURE CO2 Corrosion In producing wells.1.2.d for partial pressure limits. Corrosion may be limited by: • • The selection of high alloy chromium steels. while the austenite phase improves workability and weldability.
ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 143 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 6.Sour Gas Systems Figure 6.Sour Multiphase Systems .p.A.C .D .
These give the rules used by Eni-Agip sectioned on the basis of the conditions as listed above and the use in the well. all materials in class C-steel/L-A-steel can be used. refer to figure 6. OCTG. MATERIAL SELECTION 0 REVISION The choice of material is based on the application of engineering diagrams supplied by manufacturers of tubing and. . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 6.A. In the partial pressures of H2S and CO2 are below the critical thresholds established in the previous section. The choice of materials proposed is conservatively as recent develop materials such as 13%Cr and Super Duplex class have not been considered because experiments on these materials are not completed.8.e and figure 6. DHE materials and wellhead materials. hence the use of the modified SMI has been adopted. The tables regarding the choice of materials are shown below.p. Materials are sub-divided into three categories. otherwise the following combinations of conditions may exist: • • • • Solely H2S in oil wells Solely H2S in gas or gas condensate wells Solely CO2 and Cl Both H2S and CO2.f.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 144 OF 295 ENI S.
0035< pH2S max < 0.2< pCO2S max <100e 0.000 Cl* <50.000 22% Cr.2< pCO2S max <100 0.0035< pH2S max < 0.1 FBHT >80 C o FBHT <80 C o Material J55.005< pH2S max <0.0035< pH2S max < 0.2< pCO2S max <100e pH2S max <0. C90-1. P110 J55.2< pCO2S max <100e 0.1 0. C90-1.b below. T95-1 L80-Mod.000 Cl* >50.000 13% Cr-80KSI Max 22% Cr CW 25% Cr CW 22% Cr 25% Cr 25% Cr 25% Cr CW 25% Cr 25% Cr CW 28% Cr 22% Cr SA 25% Cr SA 28% Cr 28% Cr Alternately 22% Cr 25% Cr FBHT <200 C 150 C< FBHT <200 C 200 C< FBHT <250 C 200 C< FBHT <250 C FBHT <250 C FBHT <250 C 200 C< FBHT <250 C FBHT <200 C FBHT <250 C FBHT <200 C o o o o o o o o o o o o o o Cl* >50. OCTG Specifications Refer to table 6.B .8.1< pH2S max <1 0.005 0.1 0.1< pH2S max <1 0. T95-1 Alternately L80-Mod.2< pCO2S max <100 0. T95-1 OCTG Materials For Corrosion By CO2 And Cl* Conditions 0. T95-1 OCTG Materials For Corrosion By H2S Only In Gas Wells Conditions 0. H2S And Cl* Conditions 0.000 Cl* <50.0035< pH2S max < 0.000 Cl* <50.1 0.2< pCO2S max <100 FBHT <150 C o o 150 C< FBHT <200 C o o 200 C< FBHT <250 C o Material Cl* <50.005 0.1< pH2S max <1 0. 25% Cr Incoloy 825 28% Cr Incoloy 825 Incoloy 825 Incoloy 825 Table 6.000 Cl* <50.1 0. C90-1. T95-1 L80-Mod.0035< pH2S max <0.2< pCO2S max <100e 0. N80 L80 L80 Mod.OCTG Materials for Sour Service .005 0.000 Cl* <20.2< pCO2S max <100e pH2S max >1 FBHT <150 C o Material Cl* <50. T95-1 L80-Mod.005< pH2S max <0.A.1 pCO2S max <100e 0. K55.0035< pH2S max < 0.005 0.2< pCO2S max <100e 0.0035< pH2S max <0. K55.2< pCO2S max <100e 0.1 0.000 Cl* <50.0035< pH2S max <0.000 Cl* >50. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 6. C95.2< pCO2S max <100e 0. C90-1.005< pH2S max <0.005 0.000 13% Cr 22% Cr 25% Cr-SA Alternately 25% Cr OCTG Materials For Corrosion By CO2 . N80-2.p.2< pCO2S max <100e 0. C90-1. OCTG Materials For Corrosion By H2S Only In Oil Wells Conditions 0. N80.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 145 OF 295 ENI S.1 pH2S max < 0.000 Cl* <50.2< pCO2S max <100e 0. C90-1. K55.2< pCO2S max <100e 0. C95 L80 Alternately L80-Mod.1.1 FBHT >80 C o o 60 C< FBHT >80 C o FBHT >80 C o REVISION 0 Material J55.0035< pH2S max < 0.
C.000 Cl* >50.000 Cl* <50.000 Inconel 718 Incoloy 825 Inconel 718 Incoloy 825 Inconel 718 Incoloy 825 Inconel 718 Incoloy 825 22% Cr.DHE Material for Sour Service .1 pH2S max < 0.005 pCO2S max <100e pH2S max <0.c below.000 Cl* <50.1 pCO2S max <100e pH2S max <0. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 6. H2S And Cl* Conditions pCO2S max <100e pH2S max < 0. Materials For DHE Corrosion By H2S Only In Oil Wells Conditions pH2S max < 0.000 Cl* <50.000 Cl* >50.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 146 OF 295 ENI S.2.8.000 Cl* >50.005 pCO2S max <100e pH2S max < 0.000 FBHT <250 C FBHT <250 C o o Cl* <50.000 Cl* <50.1 pH2S max > 0.p.1 FBHT >80 C o FBHT >80 C o FBHT <65 C o FBHT <65 C o REVISION 0 Material AISI-41XX-110KSI-MAX AISI-41XX-80KSI-MAX AISI-41XX-HRC-22-MAX AISI-41XX-HRC-22-MAX Alternately Materials For DHE Corrosion By H2S Only In Gas Wells Conditions pH2S max < 0.000 9% Cr-1Moly 13%-Cr-80KSIMAX 22% Cr 25% Cr 25% Cr Inconel 718 Incoloy 825 22% Cr CW 25% Cr CW 25% Cr CW 25% Cr 28% Cr 22% Cr SA 25% Cr SA 25% Cr SA 28% Cr 28% Cr Alter Or 22% Cr 25% Cr Inconel 718 Incoloy 825 Inconel 718 Incoloy 825 100 C< FBHT <150 C 150 C< FBHT <250 C 200 C< FBHT <250 C 200 C< FBHT <250 C FBHT <200 C o o o o o o o o o Cl* >50.000 28% Cr Alternately Inconel 718 Incoloy 825 Materials For DHE Corrosion By CO2 .1 pCO2S max <100e pH2S max <1 pCO2S max <100e pH2S max <1 pCO2S max <100e pH2S max <1 FBHT <100 C 100 C< FBHT <150 C 150 C< FBHT <250 C 200 C< FBHT <250 C o o o o o o o Material Cl* <50.A.000 Cl* <50.005 pCO2S max <100e pH2S max < 0. Inconel 718 Incoloy 825 Inconel 718 Incoloy 825 Inconel 718 Incoloy 825 Table 6.000 Cl* <50.005 pCO2S max <100e pH2S max < 0.1 pH2S max < 0.005 pCO2S max <100e pH2S max <0.1 pH2S max < 0.005 pCO2S max <100e pH2S max <0. DHE Specifications Refer to table 6.1 FBHT >80 C FBHT <80 C o o Material AISI-41XX-80KSI-MAX AISI-41XX-HRC-22-MAX AISI-41XX-HRC-22-MAX Alternately Materials For DHE Corrosion By CO2 And Cl* Conditions pCO2S max <100 pCO2S max <100 pCO2S max <100 FBHT <100 C o o 100 C< FBHT <150 C o o 150 C< FBHT <250 C o Material Cl* <50.
035 pH2S-MAX < 0.A.8. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 6.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 147 OF 295 ENI S.2<pCO2 Max 100 FTHT < 150 Cl < 50000 pCO2-Max < 100 150 <FTHT <200 Cl.< 50000 - Tubing Hanger 13%-Cr80ksi-Max F6NM Monel-K500 Inconel-718 Tbg Head Adapter 13%-Cr80ksi-Max F6NM AISI-4135-IC Inconel-625 Tubing Spool AISI-4135 Cross 13%-Cr80ksi-Max F6NM AISI-4135IC Inconel 625 MonelK500 Top Adapter 13%-Cr80ksi-Max F6NM AISI-4135-IC Inconel -625 Monel-K500 Casing Spool Carbon-Steel AISI-41XX AISI-4135 Stud ASTMA193-B7 ASTMA193-B7 Nut ASTMA194-2H ASTMA194-2H AISI-4135 Automatic-Master-Valve Conditions 0.3.2 < pCO2-Max < 100e FTHT < 150e Cl < 50000 pCO2-Max <100e 150<FTHT< 200e Cl < 50000 - Manual Master-Valve Steam Body Bonnet Flanges 13%-Cr80ksi-Max F6NM AISI-4135-IC Inconel-625 Inconel-718 Gate & Seats 13%-Cr80ksi-Max Steam Monel-K500 17-4-PH Inconel-718 Body Bonnet Flanges 13%-Cr-80ksiMax F6NM AISI-4135-IC Inconel-625 Gate & Seats 13%-Cr-80ksiMax Monel-K500 17-4-PH Inconel -718 Inconel -718 .p. Wellhead Specifications Refer to below. Wellhead Materials For Corrosion Caused By H2S Conditions pH2S-MAX > 0.035 Body Bonnet Flanges AISI-4135HRC-22-MAX AISI-4135 Gate & Seats AISI-4140HRC-22-MAX AISI-4140 Steam AISI-4140HRC-22-MAX AISI-4140 Manual Master-Valve Body Bonnet Flanges AISI-4135HRC-22-MAX AISI-4135 Gate & Seats AISI-4140HRC-22-MAX AISI-4140 Steam AISI-4140 HRC-22-MAX AISI-4140 Wellhead Materials For Corrosion Caused By CO2 and ClConditions 0.035 Tubing Hanger AISI-4140 HRC-22MAX AISI-4140 Tbg Head Adapter AISI-4135 HRC-22MAX AISI-4135 Tubing Spool AISI-4135 HRC-22MAX AISI-4135 Cross AISI-4135 HRC-22MAX AISI-4135 Top Adapter AISI-4135 HRC-22MAX AISI-4135 Casing Spool AISI-4135 HRC-22MAX AISI-4135 REVISION 0 Stud ASTMA193-B7M ASTMA193-B7M Nut ASTMA194-2M ASTMA194-2H Automatic-Master-Valve Conditions pH2S-MAX> 0.035 pH2S-MAX < 0.
Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Wellhead Materials For Corrosion Caused By H2S.2 FTHT < 150 Cl < 50000 F6NM MonelK500 F6NM AISI-4135HRC-22Max F6NM F6NM AISI-4135 ASTMHRC-22-Max A193-B7M ASTMA194-2M ASTMA194-2M pCO2-Max < 100 pH2S-Max < 0.AISI-4135.8 FTHT< 150 Cl < 50000 - F6NM MonelK500 F6NM AISI-4135HRC-22MAX F6NM F6NM AISI-4135HRC-22MAX ASTMA193-B7M ASTMA194-2M MonelK500 ASTMA194-2M Inconel718 AISI-4135IC Inconel625 AISI-4135 HRC-22MAX AISI-4135.005 FTHT < 150 Cl < 50000 - Tubing Hanger F6NM Tbg Head Adapter 13%-Cr 80ksi-Max F6NM Tubing Spool AISI-4135 HRC-22Max Cross 13%-Cr80ksi-Max F6NM Top Adapter 13%-Cr 80ksi-Max F6NM Casing Spool Stud Nut ASTMA194-2M AISI-4135 ASTMHRC-22-Max A193-B7M pCO2-Max < 100 pH2S-Max < 0.AISI-4135 IC IC HRC-22-Max Inconel625 Inconel718 Inconel625 Inconel718 Inconel718 Inconel718 .A.8 Cl > Water 50000 pCO2-Max <100 pH2S-Max e > 0.8 - Inconel718 AISI-4135IC Inconel625 AISI-4135 HRC-22Max AISI-4135. CO2 and Cl Condition pCO2 -Max < 100 pH2S-Max < 0.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 148 OF 295 ENI S.2 FTHT < 150 Cl < 50000 pCO2-Max < 100 pH2S-Max <0.AISI-4135IC IC Inconel625 MonelK500 Inconel625 MonelK500 AISI-4135 HRC-22MAX MonelK500 pCO2-Max < 100 pH2S-Max <0.p.
Max < 100 pH2S. Inconel-625 Inconel-718 Inconel-718 Inconel-625 Table 6.I. Inconel-625 F6NM Inconel-718 Monel-K500 AISI-4135-I. pH2S.C.Max < 0.Wellhead Material for Sour Service .Max < 0.Max < 2 0.C.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 149 OF 295 ENI S.D.8 FTHT< 150 Cl <50000 - F6NM 13%-Cr-80 KSIMax Stellite-6 Monel-K500 F6NM 13%-Cr80KSI.005 FTHT < 150 Cl < 50000 F6NM pCO2.8 Cl Water 50000 pCO2.C.p.C.Max e > 0.2 FTHT < 150 Cl < 50000 pCO2. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Automatic-Master-Valve Conditions Body Bonnet Flanges Gate & Seats 13%-Cr-80 KSIMax Steam 17-4-PH F6NM Manual Master-Valve Body Bonnet Flanges 13%-Cr-80KSIMax F6NM Gate & Seats 13%-Cr80KSI.Max < 100 pH2S.Max Stellite--6 Monel-K500 AISI-4135-I.8 - Inconel-718 Inconel-718 AISI-4135-I.Max < 0.Max Steam 17-4-PH F6NM pCO2 -Max < 100 13%-Cr-80KSIMax pH S.Max < 100 pH2S.A.Max < 100 AISI-4135. Inconel-625 F6NM Inconel-718 Monel-K500 pCO2.
ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 150 OF 295 ENI S.STEEL J 55 N 80 P 110 FBHT >80 C J55 K55 N80-1 C95 P110-1 (only oil) or L80 mod C90 T1 LOW ALLOY STEEL L 80 mod C 90 T1 C 95 T1 10-3 65 < FBHT<= 80C J 55 K 55 N80-1 or L 80 mod C90 T1 T 95 T1 10-4 10-4 10-3 10-2 10-1 1 10 100 pH2S (atm) Figure 6.< 50000 ppm 25 % Cr-CW 200 < FBHT <= 250 Cl.E .<= 50000 ppm 13% Cr 150 > FBHT <= 200 C Cl.<= 50000 ppm 22% Cr 200<FBHT<=250 C 25% Cr-SA or 25% Cr FBHT<= 250 C and Cl.< 50000 ppm 22 % Cr 25 % Cr 200 < FBHT <= 250 C Cl.825 10 FBHT <= 200 C Cl-<=50000 ppm 22 % Cr-SA or 25 % Cr-SA 28 % Cr INCOLOY.825 FBHT <= 250 C Cl.> 50000 ppm 28 % Cr INCOLOY.<= 20000 ppm 25% Cr-CW FBHT<=250 C and Cl.OCTG Material Selection Diagram .825 FBHT<= 250 C Cl.C 90 T1 T 95 T1 10-2 C.> 50000 ppm 22 % Cr.p.A.<= 50000 ppm 25 % Cr-SA or 28 % Cr INCOLOY. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 100 pCO2 (atm) FBHT <= 150 C and Cl.CW 25 % Cr -CW 150 < FBHT <= 200 C Cl.> 50000 ppm 28 % Cr or INCOLOY.<= 50000 ppm 13 % Cr 80 Ksi max or 22 % Cr 25 % Cr FBHT <= 200 C Cl.> 50000 ppm 25 % Cr-CW (*) 1 10-1 FBHT < = 65 C L 80 or L 80 mod.<= 50000 ppm 25% Cr-CW 200<FBHT<=250 C and Cl.825 FBHT < 200 C 28 % Cr or INCOLOY-825 (*) FBHT<= 150 C Cl.
> 50000 ppm 28 % Cr or INCONEL 718 INCOLOY 825 1 200 < FBHT <= 250 C Cl.<= 50000 ppm 25 % Cr or INCONEL 718 INCOLOY 825 FBHT <= 200 C Cl-<=50000 ppm 22 % Cr-SA 25 % Cr-SA 28 % Cr INCOLOY 825 INCONEL 718 200 < FBHT <= 250 C Cl.<= 50000 ppm 13 % Cr 80 ksi max 150 > FBHT<= 250 C 25% Cr-CW or 25% Cr INCONEL 718 INCOLOY 825 200 < FBHT<= 250 C Cl.<= 50000 ppm 22 % Cr 25 % Cr INCONEL 718 INCOLOY 825 10 (*) 200 < FBHT<=250 C Cl.> 50000 ppm 22 % Cr-CW 25 % Cr-CW INCONEL 718 INCOLOY 825 AISI 41XX 22 HRC max 10-3 200 > FBHT <= 250 C Cl.> 50000 ppm 25 % Cr INCONEL 718 INCOLOY 825 10-1 FBHT < = 65 C AISI 41XX 22 HRC max 10-2 C-STEEL or AISI 41XX 65 < FBHT <=80 C C-STEEL 80 Ksi max AISI 41XX FBHT > 80 C C-STEEL 110 Ksi max AISI 41XX 100 < FBHT <= 200 C Cl.A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 100 pCO2 (atm) FBHT <= 100 C Cl.DHE Material Selection Diagram .<= 50000 ppm 9 Cr 1 Mo 100 < FBHT <= 150 C Cl.825 INCONEL 718 FBHT < 200 C 28 % Cr or INCOLOY 825 INCONEL 718 (*) 150 < FBHT <= 200 C Cl.p.> 50000 ppm 28 % Cr INCOLOY.> 50000 ppm 25 % Cr-CW INCONEL 718 INCOLOY 825 10-4 10-4 10-3 10-2 10-1 1 10 100 pH2S (atm) Figure 6.<= 50000 ppm 25 % Cr-SA 28 % Cr INCOLOY 825 INCONEL 718 FBHT<= 250 C Cl.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 151 OF 295 ENI S.F .
p. Cold die stamping is prohibited. Recommendations for casing to be used for sour service must be specified according to the API 5CT for restricted yield strength casings. (This treatment is superior to tubulars heated/treated by other methods.g. The pipe must be tested to the alternative test pressure (see API Bulletins 5A and 5AC). The couplings must have the same heat treatment as the pipe body. ORDERING SPECIFICATIONS 0 REVISION When ordering tubulars for sour service. P105 or P110 tubulars are not acceptable for orders for J55 or K55 casing. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Downgraded grade N80. all markings must be paint stencilled or hot die stamped.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 152 OF 295 ENI S. in addition to those given in the above table. 6) 7) Note: The casing should also meet the following criteria: • • The steel used in the manufacture of the casing should have been quenched and tempered. Three copies of the report providing the ladle analysis of each heat used in the manufacture of the goods shipped. Shell modified API thread compound must be used. as per API Specification 5CT. . must be submitted. e. All sour service casing should be inspected using non-destructive testing or impact tests only.9. the following specifications should be included.A. Three copies of a report showing the physical properties of the goods supplied and the results of hardness tests (Refer to step 3 above) must be submitted. together with all the check analyses performed. normalising and tempering). Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 6.
Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 7.35 applies to the ratio of the calculated stress in a string to the minimum yield strength of the selected tubing of CRA materials. A safety factor (SF) of 1.A. preferably using an appropriate up to date computer programme.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 153 OF 295 ENI S. the SFs may be reduced. 7. All tubing strings should be designed for stress.10. it is necessary to calculate the variations in length for the stresses applied under load conditions. TUBING DESIGN POLICIES All completion tubing strings will have tubing movement calculations conducted to ascertain the maximum load applied to the string and/or completion tubing movement to be catered for in the completion design. it is first necessary to understand the properties of steels used in the manufacture of tubing. Tubing movement occurs due to only two reasons: • • Temperature changes Change in pressure induced forces.2.6). To fully understand these effects. refer to the criteria in section 7. Under some special conditions. THEORY During completion tubing design process.p.10 Stress Calculations. Tubing movement upwards (contraction) is assumed to be negative and downwards (lengthening) is positive. Movement can only occur if the tubing is free to move. . A safety factor (SF) of 1. the calculation should be run again substituting. Currently Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates recommended programme is the Enertech WS-Tube programme to the latest version. either a heavier weight or. Tubing size shall be determined by the reservoir engineers using IPR curves and Nodal analysis (Refer to section 5.2. When these have been determined it will confirm the suitability of the selected tubing. This relationship is fully explained in section 7.1. 7. If the tubing is not free to move and is anchored to a packer then stress will be subjected to the tubing string and packer. a higher grade of pipe. If the stress SF is less than these limits.25 applies to the ratio of the calculated stress in a string to the minimum yield strength of the selected tubing in carbon steels.
With all solid materials. or the ratio of stress to strain within the elastic range. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7.1. or permanent. the material behaves elastically. both are explained in figure 7. some deformation may be sustained without permanent deformation. wear.2. compression and shear. and if fracture occurs with little or no plastic deformation. Buckling may cause failure of the part without any fracture of the material. and other causes. is the modulus of elasticity E. the elastic deformation is accompanied by varying amounts of plastic.. it is classed as a ductile material.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 154 OF 295 ENI S. and the slope of this line.A .a. deformation takes place before any final fracture occurs. In this. Figure 7.Stress-Strain Curve for Tubing Steel . but the tension test is the most common and is qualitatively characteristic of all the other types of tests. i.b. A typical curve for steel is shown in figure 7. yield. Beyond the elastic limit.e. the shattering of glass). These failures are failures of the material.p. The action of a material under the gradually increasing extension in the tension test is usually represented by plotting apparent stress (the total load divided by the original cross-sectional area of the test piece) as ordinates against the apparent strain (elongation between two gauge points marked on the test piece divided by the original gauge length) as abscissae. the material is classed as brittle. Tests of materials may be conducted in many different ways. corrosion. sometimes called Young's Modulus.A. deformation. This gives rise to Poisson’s Ratio. such as by torsion. the elastic deformation is approximately a straight line as called for by Hooke's Law. If a material sustains large amounts of plastic deformation before final fracture.g. As load is applied. Mechanical Properties of Steel 0 REVISION Failure of a material or of a structural part may occur by fracture (e.
see figure 7.Deformation Constants for Tubing Steel . Figure 7. If the stress is released in the region between the elastic limit and the yield strength. permanent or plastic strain occurs.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 155 OF 295 ENI S. leaving a permanent set.B . the material will contract along a line generally nearly straight and parallel to the original elastic line. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Beyond the elastic limit.A.p.a.
Depending on the type or grade. e.Casing and Tubing requirements. known as yielding. Others are shown in figure 7. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION In steels.000 psi. L-80 . The lines indicating equivalent hardness of 22 and 23 Rc indicates the tolerances for use of the materials in H2S conditions according to NACE which is fully described in section 7.000 psi.g. it is customary to designate the end of the straight portion of the curve (by definition the proportional limit) as the elastic limit.: H-40 . yield strength 55. API specifies the yield strength as the tensile strength required to produce a total elongation of 0.2% is widely accepted in the industry). The maximum stress reached in this region is called the upper yield point and the lower part of the yielding region the lower yield point. The stress at the maximum point is called the tensile strength or the ultimate strength of the material and is its most often quoted property. tubing and drill pipe are laid down in API specification of further specs.p. The mechanical and chemical properties of casing. the material becomes stronger causing a rise of the curve. 5AC. yield strength 40. yield strength 80. a curious phenomenon occurs after the elastic limit. but at the same time the cross-sectional area of the specimen becomes less as it is drawn out. . 5A. 5AX and 5AQ .A.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 156 OF 295 ENI S.min.c. This loss of area weakens the specimen so that the curve reaches a maximum and then falls off until final fracture occurs.min.000 psi. In materials that do not exhibit a marked yield point. and in the case of the yield point even maximum requirements (except for H-40). it is customary to measure a yield strength.6% of the gauge length. This gives rise to a dip in the general curve followed by a period of deformation at approximately constant load. As extension continues beyond yielding. as required by definition. 5CT which is a combination of former specs. This is arbitrarily defined as the stress at which the material has a specified permanent set (the value of 0. the yielding phenomenon is less prominent and is correspondingly harder to measure. Similar arbitrary rules are followed with regard to the elastic limit in commercial practice.5% to 0. and under certain conditions of temperature.4. Careful practice qualifies this by designating it the proportional elastic limit. Instead of determining the stress up to which there is no permanent set. For steels used in the manufacturing of tubular goods.9. J-55 .min. minimum requirements are laid down for the mechanical properties. In the harder and stronger steels. The denominations of the different grades are based on the minimum yield strength.
Strengths of Various Grades of Steel . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 7.p.C .A.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 157 OF 295 ENI S.
Temperature 0 REVISION Temperature changes cause expansion and contraction in metals which is a significant factor in tubing strings. All subsequent changes in temperature or pressure induced forces are calculated form this initial condition.g.3. then the tubing is unable to move as it can in the free movement scenario and. or latched to.2 will expand or contract due to changes in temperature or pressure induced forces. 7.9 x 10 in/in/F°. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7. The movement determined by calculation should be used to select a device which accommodates this movement with a margin of error. a TSR or travel joint (Refer to figure 7. All metals have a particular expansion rate which is termed the ‘Coefficient of thermal expansion’. The tubing is connected to the packer by being threaded to. 10ft. ELTSR or a travel joint depending on which type of packer system is utilised. If the tubing is free to move then the calculations will determine the maximum expansion or contraction which needs to be catered for by the utilisation of a tubing movement compensation system such as a packer and seal unit. unless the movement was subsequently restricted as described in the next section. . which is the ‘initial’ tubing condition.3ft = total 9ft. There are three methods in which tubing is connected to the packer: a) b) c) Tubing is fully free to move either way. changes in tubing stress will be exerted.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 158 OF 295 ENI S. the packer -6 Further explanation of these three modes are explained below. a PBR. as seen in the previous section 7. These devices are usually available in 10ft stroke lengths or multiples of 10ft. with a calculated movement of + 6ft and . an object will expand or contract through temperature change by the Co-efficient of thermal expansion for the type of material.A.d below).e. e.2. Tubing Movement/Stress Relationship Steel tubing.2. 20ft and 30ft. For a given volume. a) Free Movement The tubing is free to move fully upwards or downwards using the packer bore with a seal assembly. in this case. a PBR.2. This may increase or decrease the stress already exerted to the tubing when it was installed.p.2. If the tubing is attached to a packer. The co-efficient of liner expansion for tubular steels is usually 6. The tubing is positioned where it is fully free to move upwards but its downward movement is restricted and stress applied to the packer. Calculations must be conducted to establish the full tubing movement in order that the length of tubing movement device can be determined. i. a 20ft device should be selected as a 10ft device would not provide enough contingency for error.
F .D . etc. otherwise permanent deformation will occur.e). the calculations will determine that the tubing stress limit is not exceeded.Free Moving Figure 7. it will result in increased tensional and compressive forces. This may be acceptable when temperature and pressure changes are not excessive.f). When the tubing is anchored to the packer and movement is eliminated. hence increased stress in the tubing. Ratchet Latch. correspondingly to the packer. Similarly. (Refer to figure 7.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 159 OF 295 ENI S.A. This additional stress will be calculated during the tubing movement calculations and must not exceed the stress limit for the tubing.Limited Movement Figure 7. This restricted downward movement results in further stress applied to the bottom of the tubing and.E . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 b) Limited Downward Movement 0 REVISION In this case the tubing is fully free to move upwards but is restricted in its downward movement (Refer to figure 7. Figure 7.Anchored Tubing . c) Anchored Tubing In this case the tubing is anchored to the packer by being threaded to it (as in the case when using retrievable packers) or by using an anchoring device such as an Anchor Latch.p.
selection of a tubing are: • • • • • • • • 7.3. 7. Similar to the pressure data. straight pull or torque can be applied to the tubing downhole at the packer depth overcoming any frictional drag. hence.3. 7. Tubing Data The optimum tubing size. . Temperatures (Static and Flowing) Accurate well temperature data are vital in tubing movement/stress analysis as the temperature effect is usually the effect which causes the greatest tubing movement. is required and is the basis of all the calculations.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 160 OF 295 ENI S.1. determined by nodal analysis conducted by the reservoir engineers.3.4. Bottom-hole Pressure Accurate initial and prognosed future formation pressures both static and dynamic are fundamental to tubing movement/stress calculations. Each casing or liner weight and corresponding length of section must be known to enable calculation.A.3. The tubing grade is selected in accordance to the criteria listed in section 6 to combat the effects of any corrosion from the well conditions.p.1. 7. Casing Profile/Geometry The planned casing design and contingency plans are required as they affect the tubing movement calculations (Refer to 4. Deviation tables are also required. The well deviation is also important to determine the type of packer/tubing seal device and/or tubing movement device to ensure that.3. The average temperature of each section of tubing and casing must be known or determined to input into the calculations.1).3. temperature data may be found from previous well test results. either. weight and grade is confirmed then the appropriate rated completion components can be specified in order that the purchasing department can prepare tender documents. Casing design profile Casing programme contingency profile Tubing size from optimisation analysis Pressure gradient Temperature gradient Reservoir fluids specific gravities Completion fluid specific gravities Production/injection or stimulation forecast.2. The tubing movement/stress calculations will then determine the tubing weight or any change in grade required to meet with the applied SF for stress. 0 REVISION The well data and parameters required (or already determined) to produce an accurate tubing movement/stress analysis and. Once the tubing size. These pressures can be obtained from previous well exploration test data or appraisal well test reports. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7. WELL DATA.
These effects are: a) b) c) Piston effect. therefore it is essential that a detailed corrosion study is completed to enable the choice of materials and/or inhibition procedures. In the presence of water and under certain temperature conditions.5. however if this choice is not economic and some corrosion inhibition process was suitable then this would be a fallback position. This is subject to any corrosion inhibition methods which may be implemented.6. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7.3. 7. It should be selected to provide an overbalance at the top of the reservoir. it will have completion fluid in both the tubing and the annulus.4. If justified economically. All subsequent conditions are calculated from this initial condition. Buckling effect. usually a brine. this is referred to as the initial condition. Particular importance should be paid to Hydrogen Sulphide.A. the constituents of the produced reservoir fluids will initially determine the material required for the tubing.p. well tests carried out earlier and other sources which may be useful in the decision making process. the material chosen should combat the effects of corrosion. Ballooning effect. either with a tubing seal unit in a packer bore or a tubing movement device. It also must be selected for its stability over long time periods and not suffer from dehydration or deterioration.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 161 OF 295 ENI S. Each of these effects are addressed in this section.3. . these corrosive agents can cause serious problems. is chosen for its compatibility with the formation and its fluids so as not to cause any formation damage. it should be suitably dosed with corrosion inhibitors and oxygen scavenger to prevent corrosion to the exposed tubulars and elastomers. PRESSURE INDUCED FORCES When a well is completed. therefore the materials should be chosen to last the planned life of the completion. The information required to make a considered selection may be obtained from the ADIS (Advanced Drilling Information System) database (which holds all the data regarding the drilling of the well). 7. These are three pressure induced effects which produce forces that moves the tubing. Completion Fluid The completion fluid. Reservoir Fluids 0 REVISION As described earlier. As the completion fluid (sometimes referred to as the packer fluid) will be left in the annulus. Carbon Dioxide and Chloride levels. Future parameters must also be considered as water may rise and the GOR will change.
7.1.h illustrate this piston force for two cases. Piston Effect 0 REVISION Tubing. the equation becomes: ∆L1 = − where: L EAs [(Ap − A1) ∆P1 − (Ap − Ao ) ∆Po] Eq. The tubing is run into a completion fluid with equivalent fluid density inside and outside the tubing which results in a reduction of the load due to buoyancy. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7. and tubing smaller than the packer bore.7 and figure 7.4. when run in a well must first withstand the load of its own weight which may be a significant factor especially in deep wells. This will alter the tensile load on the top and bottom of the tubing. If there is an alteration from this initial condition causing a change in pressure forces across the packer seal unit then a piston effect is caused. 7.A Substituting for F. This tensile load is greatest in the joint immediately below the tubing hanger.p. The force (F) change is caused by the change in piston force from the initial conditions created by a change in pressure in the annulus or tubing at the packer. tubing larger than the packer bore. 7. The formula in each case is the same: ∆L1 = − L F EAs Eq.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 162 OF 295 ENI S.A.B L E As Ap Ai Ao ∆Pi ∆Po = = = = = = = = Length of the tubing string to the packer depth (ins) Young’s Modulus of Elasticity (psi) 2 Cross sectional area of tubing (ins ) 2 Area of the packer bore (ins ) 2 Area of the tubing ID (ins ) 2 Area of the tubing OD (ins ) Change in tubing pressure at the packer (psi) Change in annulus pressure at the packer (psi) . The change in length due to these alterations is calculated from Hooks Law: Where E is the modulus of elasticity (sometimes referred to as a Young’s Modulus formula).
4. The exact point between the buckled and straight sections is the ‘neutral point’ (Refer to figure 7.2.i).ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 163 OF 295 ENI S.G .Packer Bore Smaller Than Tubing OD Helical buckling is initiated by compressive force acting on the bottom of the tubing and is the formation of helical spirals in the tubing string. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Ao Ai Ao Ai r r Po Po Ap Pi Ap Pi Figure 7.i has a variable pitch as the compressive force is progressively lowered by the weight of the pipe hanging below. Buckling Effect Figure 7. The helix shown in figure 7. some of the tubing will be buckled and the rest straight.Packer Bore Larger Than Tubing OD 7. Unless the tubing string is short or the compressive force is exceedingly high.p. The buckling effect is greater when pressure differential is applied across the pipe.H . 7.C .Wo Ai x Weight of fluid inside the tubing Ao x Weight of fluid outside the tubing Eq.A. The neutral point can be calculated from the following: n= where: W Wi Wo = = = F w Ws + Wi .
Neutral Point When the neutral point is within the tubing length (and so the helix can fully develop).D I= π (D 4 − d 4 ) 64 . 7.i) can be calculated by the following formula: F2 r2 ∆L2 = − 8EI w where: Eq.I . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 7. the length reduction due to helical buckling (Refer to figure 7.A.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 164 OF 295 ENI S.p.
165 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
F Figure 7.J - Helical Buckling If the tubing is very short (as happens for example on selective type completions between two packer’s) all the string may be affected by buckling and there is no neutral point. In this case, the length reduction due to the buckling effect is dependant upon the entire length of the string and can be calculated by the following formula:
∆L2 = −
F 2 r 2 Lw Lw F 2 − F 8 EIw
As seen, the formulae for both piston effect and helicoidal buckling above has so far used F, i.e. the change in the piston force acting on the bottom of the tubing. However, in order to complete the understanding of the effects which lead to variations in length due to buckling, we must also consider the effect caused by pressure differential across a pipe. If the internal pressure in a pipe is greater than the external pressure, the tube remains straight only if it has an axially symmetric cross-section with no deformation to change its shape. This configuration is unstable and any distortion can lead immediately to a stable equilibrium condition which is helicoidal buckling. Helicoidal buckling is caused by the effect of the pressure which acts on the lateral surface of the pipe wall as the convex surface of the bend in a greater force is larger than the concave surface (Refer to figure 7.k). The internal pressure will therefore exert a greater force on the convex side of the helix, than that exerted on the concave section of the same bend. The resulting force will, therefore, create the helicoidal buckling configuration. The same occurs when the stable external pressure is greater than the internal pressure also resulting in helical buckling.
166 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
Moreover, the effect of the external pressure on the tubing lateral surfaces is equivalent to a tensile force applied at the tubing bottom of:
F f = Ai Pi
= − Ao Po
Figure 7.K - Pressure Induced Helical Buckling Effect From this it can be concluded that the effect of the internal pressure on the tubing lateral surfaces is equivalent to a compressive force applied at the bottom of the tubing. Therefore the tubing will be buckled by the piston force and by the sum of Ff and Ff . The fictitious force Ff is obtained from the sum of the three elements:
Ff = Ff + Ff
F f = A p (Pi − Po )
If Ff is greater than zero it will cause helical buckling and hence, if it is less than zero there is no deformation. It is however important to relate that the only force actually applied at the bottom of the tubing is the piston force, while the fictitious force is used only to calculate the buckling effect.
167 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
It should be remembered that, to calculate the variations in length, the variations of the forces compared to initial conditions must be calculated. Therefore, to sum up: in the ∆L1 (Hooke’s law), the variation of the piston force Fa must be used; in the ∆L2 (buckling), the variation of the fictitious force Ff must be used when this is positive, otherwise, being a tensile force, it cannot buckle the string and ∆L2 = 0. The theory above was developed considering Pi = Po in the initial conditions, it thus follows that the Ff is equal to zero and that the variation of fictitious force ∆Ff is therefore equal to the final fictitious force. 7.4.3. Ballooning Effect The third element which changes the length of a string, due to the changes to internal and external pressure, is caused by ballooning. This effect occurs when ∆P = Pi - Po is positive and tends to swell the tubing which, contracts axially or shortens (Refer to figure 7.m). On the other hand, when ∆P = Pi - Po is negative, the tubing is squeezed and, expands axially or elongates. This is termed reverse ballooning (Refer to figure 7.l). The normally used simplified formula to calculate the ballooning or reverse ballooning effect is: • •
∆L3 = −
2ν ∆Pim − R 2 ∆Pom L E R2 −1
In this the average internal and external pressure variations are defined by the formulae:
+ Pi ( final ) − Pi (initial ) Pi ( final ) − Pi (initial ) tophole bottomhole ∆Pim = 2
+ Po ( final ) − Po (initial ) Po ( final ) − Po (initial ) tophole bottomhole ∆Pom = 2
Eq. 7.L Again this is developed from Hooke’s law using Young’s Modulus of elasticity (already used in the piston and buckling effect) and Poisson’ ratio. Poisson’s ratio v as earlier expressed is:
∆t / t ∆L / L
168 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
Figure 7.L - Reverse Ballooning 7.4.4. Temperature Effect
Figure 7.M - Ballooning
The final effect considered when calculating tubing length variations, is the temperature effect which usually induces the largest movement. During a well operation, e.g. stimulation, the temperature of the tubing may be much less than that in, either, the initial or flow rate conditions. During well stimulations, significant quantities of fluids are pumped through the tubing at ambient surface temperature which may change the temperature of the tubing by several degrees. The formula used to calculate the change of length due to temperature effect is:
∆L4 = α ∆TM L
Eq. 7.M where the average temperature variation in the string can be calculated as follows:
− Tinitial )tophole + (T final − Tinitial )bottomhole 2
169 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
In the formula α represents the material’s coefficient of thermal expansion. For steel this value is: α = 6.9 x 10-6 in/in/°F. figure 7.n shows typical geothermal temperature gradients during both stimulation and production conditions. It can be seen that the temperature variations to which the tubing is subjected may cause considerable changes to its length.
300 T (°F)
7500 D (feet)
Figure 7.N - Typical Geothermal Gradients 7.5. EVALUATION OF TOTAL TUBING MOVEMENT The sum of the length changes obtained from the changes in pressure induced forces and temperature effects, gives the total shift of the bottom end of the string at the packer depth where it is free to move in the packer-bore. This sum is calculated:
∆Ltot = ∆L1 + ∆L2 + ∆L3 + ∆L4
Eq. 7.O With free moving packer/tubing seals systems, the calculations are made for the selection of an appropriate length of seal assembly, PBR or ELTSR with anchored packer/tubing systems, this same calculation can be made to select the length of tubing movement devices such as telescopic or expansion joints. However, if no movement is converted to stress in the tubing, the resultant is stress on the packer (Refer to section 7.6).
Moreover. once this force is known.p where it is presumed that the tubing can move away from its anchored condition while maintaining the seal with the packer and that the tubing undergoes only ∆L4 contraction caused by the temperature effect. To understand this concept better. ANCHORED TUBING 0 REVISION In some completions the tubing is firmly fixed to the packer. it is possible to use a graphical approach. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7. Figure 7.O . .A.P However. the load on the tubing can be calculated to check if the completion components have sufficient strength. preventing any movement of the string when well conditions vary (figure 7. Subsequently. Since no force is applied at the end of the tubing which could cause buckling. consider figure 7. all the movement is linear and to restore to the tubing’s real anchored position. it is sufficient to impose a ∆L4 elongation by applying a force FP which is obtained from Hooke’s law: ∆L = − FL EAs ⇒ FP = − ∆L4 EAs L Eq. In this situation the tubing-packer forces generated by the presence of the anchoring must be determined so as to be able to confirm if the tubing-packer anchoring system and the packer have sufficient strength to safely withstand all the forces exerted.o). 7.Tubing Anchored To Packer The tubing-packer force can be calculated by initially assuming that the tubing is free to move in the packer seal-bore and it is possible to calculate the final total length change of the tubing under pressure and temperature variations of all conditions.6. the force needed to re-anchor the tubing to the packer can be determined.p. in general the problem of identifying the tubing/packer reaction is not linear due to the helical buckling effect and so.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 170 OF 295 ENI S.
This can be plotted using the following formulae: ∆L = − ∆L = − FL EAs FL F 2 r 2 − EAs 8 EIw ( for F < 0 ) ( for F > 0 ) Eq. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION The first step is to plot the characteristic strength/length variation of the system. on the curve. is then identified. the cause of the buckling would be eliminated and the neutral point would return to the bottom in the tubing. The origin of the axis moves to the point found in this way (Ff . if a force of Ff. ∆L4 Fp ∆L ∆L4 Fp F Figure 7.q the Fp force. Indeed. on the material.P . the tubing representative point in the well when it is subjected to the fictitious force.Q The second step is to identify. This curve.Graphical Representation Of Movement .A. On the curve given in figure 7. ∆Lf).p is determined by the size of tubing. radial distance between the tubing OD and casing ID and on the fluids in the well.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 171 OF 295 ENI S.p. shown in figure 7. was applied at the end of the tubing.q this condition is identified by intersection point (Ff. so to position the tubing in the packer after contracting the string must be elongated accordingly. As shown in figure 7.∆Lf) and the diagram obtained has a total length variation of ∆LP = -∆ltot. 7. transferred between the tubing and packer. even when this is negative.
Tubing Permitting Limited Motion Another method which may be used in some types of completions is that the tubing is fully or partially limited in downhole movement.6.1. after the packer is set.p.Q .r).Graphical Representation of Force 7.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 172 OF 295 ENI S. In this method. . putting the tubing into compression or slackened-off (Refer to figure 7. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION ∆Lp Fp ∆L Fp ∆Lf ∆Lp F Ff Figure 7.A. some of the weight of the string is set down on the packer.
The ∆Lso value is determined using the following formula: 2 Fso L Fso r 2 ∆Lso = − − E As 8 E I w Eq. applying slack-off is the same as moving the packer upwards by ∆Lso. In practice.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 173 OF 295 ENI S. compressing the string and thus causing part of the length variation which would occur in any case at a later stage due to the effects described above. during an injection operation.R . ∆Ltot. ∆Pso. possible to limit the movements of the tubing with respect to the packer and consequently the length of the packer seal-assembly. the total length variation calculated as the sum of the above described effects. for example. on the other hand. The same considerations can be made if ∆Ltot < 0 during the operation while. With this type of anchoring it is. i. If an anchored type constraint is considered then the tubing-packer force with respect to the anchored tubing can be reduced. e. therefore. makes it possible to limit the length variations of the string. any elongation of the string would be prevented.R where: Fso = slack-off force released on the packer.A. 7. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 7. in an injection operation.e. therefore. .g.Limited Downward Movement The shortening of the string caused by this.p. causing a force on the packer which would be equal to that of the slack-off amount. is decreased by ∆Lso.
the designed test pressures should be equal to or greater than any other subsequent pressures applied to the completion so the magnitude is high. This may be of particular concern when using large bore tubing movement devices as the forces generated by the test pressure are greater than packer tubing seal arrangements.1.7. Hydraulic packers are set by plugging the tubing below the packer either by dropping a setting ball onto a shear out ball seat. These pressures may be applied more than once during the installation operation. This stress needs to be taken into account to determine the total stress applied to the tubing. However. temperature and mechanical loads for each condition imposed. This in turn places stress in the tubing after the packer is set and the pressure is bled off.2. The operations normally carried out on a well for which the string control is necessary are illustrated below. It is therefore obvious why.7. to analyse the characteristics of each operation in order to be able to identify the heavier loads which may be imposed. Pressure Testing The very first load condition experienced during and after the installation of the completion string is pressure testing. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7. therefore the only load applied is the pressure induced forces of piston effect buckling and ballooning. .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 174 OF 295 ENI S. Packer Setting 0 REVISION A particular problem arises in tubing tied to packer completions when using hydraulic set packers. This involves applying predetermined test pressures to both the tubing and annulus. it is essential to identify exactly what operations will be carried out in future to determine the consequent loads and thus the associated load conditions. During the time taken to install the tubing. 7.A.p. It is important. or by installing a plug with wireline. when selecting the type of tubing for a completion.6. the completion will have warmed up to ambient well conditions. These should be seen only as an example of load conditions as each case must be addressed individually as planned operations may vary. The formulae for determine this tubing length change are: ∆Fa L EAs 2ν ∆Pim ∆L3 = − L E R2 −1 ∆L1 = − where: (Hooke’s law) (ballooning) ∆Fa = − Ai ∆Pi and ∆Pim=∆Pi 7. as pressure is applied to the tubing to set the packer. TUBING LOAD CONDITIONS The load conditions of the tubing string during the well’s life causes stresses through the pressure. A manual or computer programme is then used to calculate and then ascertain whether the given tubing is able to withstand the maximum load with an acceptable safety level. in any case. it changes the length of the tubing during the setting process.
ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 175 OF 295 ENI S. This equipment must therefore be protected using special isolating tools or protection sleeves. This operation is carried out by pumping a predetermined quantity of acid down the tubing to the formation at set pressures and flow rates. 7. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7.2. it is important to assess the drop in temperature caused by the injection of colder fluid which. To check the string design is suitable. in Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates case are in-house software which allows reproduction of the correct temperature trend.3.A. These fractures reach from the well bore deep into reservoir and allows better drainage. The pressures which can be attained. From the point of view of the stresses exerted on the tubing string. is carried out at high flow rates even though of short duration. Friction reducers may also be used to increase flow at the same wellhead pressure. At times during these early stages. To carry out fracturing. using computer programmes. which. . Other data are often needed for more complex calculations. selecting the end of the operation as the final conditions but with a well head pressure equal to the maximum estimated. together with the temperature variations caused by the injection of colder fluid.p. figure 7. This may lead to greater cooling down of the tubing with reduced pressures. in order to exceed the fracturing gradient. It may be necessary in some cases. With regard to the stresses on the string similar to acid stimulations. It is important to monitor the pressure and temperature trends during the operation as the acid rate will probably increase due to the effect of the acid on the formation. the formation must be pressurised until one (or more) fractures are created. the maximum pressure able to be applied at the well head must be considered in order to determine the rate of acid which can be applied. according to the classical Lubinsky theory. the maximum allowable pressure for some well head equipment may be reached. especially during the early injection stage.s shows the pressure and temperature trends required to be known so as to ensure stress control of the string. The calculated flow rate is applied during the operation and the pressure trend (which usually decreases when the fracture is created due to the reduction of load losses in the formation) is monitored. to reduce the loads on the tubing by preheating the acid in order to limit the thermal expansion and pressurising the annulus to reduce the tubing ballooning effect. This entails obtaining in advance the injection parameters from various injectivity tests with increasing flow rates. and decreasing the bottom hole pressure thus reducing the load.7. Fracturing Fracturing involves the propagation of fractures in the formation for the improvement of productivity of hydrocarbons.7. are higher than that during acid jobs. Acid Stimulation 0 REVISION Acid jobs are carried out to remove formation damage caused during drilling by the invasion of fluids and cuttings or to stimulate the formation by improving permeability. the pressure and temperature trends can be plotted as shown by the previous example of the acid stimulation (figure 7.s).
Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION If during the initial stages of the operation.S . and the second with marked temperature variations and lower pressures. therefore two conditions should be checked. the first with high pressures without temperature variations.A.Pressure and Temperature Trends During Fracturing .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 176 OF 295 ENI S. The latter condition may be too conservative. a significant break-down is forecast (by a marked reduction of pressure when the fracture is opened up in the formation).FINAL CSG 2500 FINAL TBG 5000 7500 D (feet) 0 0 5000 FINAL CSG 10000 FINAL TBG 15000 P (psi) 2500 5000 INITIAL TBG INITIAL CSG 7500 D (feet) Figure 7.p. 0 0 100 200 300 T (°F) INITIAL CSG AND TBG .
5. at the moment of shut-in. temperature differences between the beginning and end of the productive life or the need to increase or decrease the flow rate for reasons external to the well. . 7. It is therefore very important to establish. the string undergoes temperature increases which cause elongation in the string. Shut-In Once a well is in production. pressuring up the fluids in the tubing.A. figure 7. Flowing 0 REVISION In this case it is not an operation carried out on the well but the normal flowing load conditions to which the string is being subjected.g. making it necessary to ensure a collapse control of some sections.u shows typical pressure and temperature trends after a shut-in.u.t and figure 7. external pressure may be greater than internal pressure.7. The situation is now similar to that during production but with well head pressures which are greater and hence increase the stresses on the string. This shut-in operation involves closing the well during which the well head pressure increases because the reservoir pressure rises to static condition. Different production situations will occur which cause changing load conditions. the pressure and temperature profiles during the life of the well. or at least approximate. it is necessary to interrupt production for maintenance or in order to take some data measurements.p. e. which give the pressure and temperature bottom hole trends as a function of the depth at production start up and when the reservoir is depleted.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 177 OF 295 ENI S.7. This load condition is considered critical as. The resulting compressive forces may lead to the buckling phenomena and even cause the tubing to exceed its elastic limit. the temperature of the string does not vary greatly due to the thermal inertia of the well. As shown in the diagrams of figure 7.4. Compared to the initial condition. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7.
Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 0 0 100 200 300 T (°F) 2500 FINAL TBG 5000 INITIAL CSG E TBG .Pressure and Temperature Trends in Normal Production Conditions .FINAL CSG 7500 D (feet) 0 0 5000 10000 15000 P (psi) 2500 FINAL TBG INITIAL TBG 5000 INITIAL CSG .T .FINAL CSG 7500 D (feet) Figure 7.p.A.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 178 OF 295 ENI S.
FINAL CSG 7500 D (feet) .A.p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 179 OF 295 ENI S.U . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 7.FINAL CSG 7500 D (feet) 0 0 5000 FINAL TBG 10000 15000 P (psi) 2500 INITIAL TBG 5000 INITIAL CSG .Pressure and Temperature Trends in Depleted Reservoir Production Conditions 0 0 100 200 300 T (°F) 2500 FINAL TBG 5000 INITIAL CSG E TBG .
V .A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 0 0 100 200 300 T (°F) 2500 FINAL TBG 5000 INITIAL CSG AND TBG .CSG FINAL 7500 D (feet) 0 0 5000 10000 15000 P (psi) FINAL TBG 2500 INITIAL TBG 5000 INITIAL CSG .Pressure and Temperature Trends After Shut-In .FINAL CSG 7500 D (feet) Figure 7.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 180 OF 295 ENI S.p.
p. is reached. . By using an iterative method. In both cases the problem of completing the well is solved but it is necessary to verify both cost and whether it is better to use on CRA. and knowing the completion configuration. generally this is greatest in the section above the packer and below the well head. that the optimum solution is found through a sequence of approximations. i. the relative loads on the sections of the string can be calculated. it is necessary to assess all the various possible solutions. the correct safety factor for all the calculated load conditions expected during the life of the well.A. in any case. As shown in the examples above. it is important to be able to plot the pressure and temperature trends of the casing and tubing on the two pressure/depth and temperature/ depth diagrams for the moment before the packer is set (initial conditions) and at the end of this operation (final condition) or. Alterations are then made to the draft completion until the ideal safety factor. Using the above diagrams. intermediate packers. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7. The Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates approach to choosing the tubing string is similar to that followed when designing any other mechanical part. it will be necessary during the control stage to know the pressure and temperature data of all the packers and of the tubing cross-section variations and is good practice to plot these data on diagrams. If the string is tapered or has one. during the stage considered most critical as regards the loads applied.e. A typical example is that of wells with the presence of corrosive agents where either strings and down hole equipment can be made in Corrosion Resistant Alloy (CRA) or carbon steel with inhibitors injected downhole can be used. by choosing and verifying the various possibilities. or more. A draft design is considered based on the expected well conditions and then this design is checked to obtain the safety factor(s). Since the economic factor plays a primary role of importance when selecting a completion.6. TUBING SELECTION The tubing string selection procedure and subsequent stress analysis is fundamental to the completion design process as it is during these two stages.8. can be obtained.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 181 OF 295 ENI S. 7. Load Condition Summary 0 REVISION The operations described above were chosen because they are the most common and show which aspects of an operation must be known in order to determine which loads will have to be considered to verify string design.7. which may differ depending on the local environmental conditions and on some parameters discussed below. avoiding future workovers or if it is more economical to use carbon steel with an inhibition system and scheduled workovers.
etc. especially when the severity of the conditions suggest the use of expensive CRA materials (Refer to section 6). it is always necessary to determine.) must fit inside the production casing and/or liner. it is best to base the choice on an appropriate corrosion study which takes into account many other parameters. this method does not provide a solution to using carbon steel in conjunction with an inhibition system. chlorides and water from production tests and to enter these data into an expert system. Given that the dimensions of the tubing and components of the string (safety valves. in terms of all the mechanical stresses and corrosivity of the fluids. 7. frequency of workovers. In general.A. In this case. When CRA steels are used (which must be cold worked in order to obtain the required mechanical characteristics). Once the choice of materials has been identified. Indeed.2.p. outlined below. CO2.g. Critical Factors 0 REVISION The main factors driving the choice of the string are described below. the exact quantities of H2S. and if the string has more than one size of tubing as in a tapered string. Note: It is vital that any detrimental impact caused by the casing programme is discussed with the drilling engineers to solve any problems. wall thickness and grade of tubing which is optimum to requirements. is often sufficient though these only reach a maximum grade of T95 (95 ksi yield) therefore do not always meet with stress requirements in high pressures and great depth. The inside and outside diameter of the tubing. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7. The presence of residual tension may induce stress corrosion and over-stressing problems which must also be taken into consideration. it is then possible to identify the optimum mechanical solutions. it will be necessary to take into consideration their mechanical properties to ensure that a suitable factor can be verified in the subsequent stress analysis stage. However. Taking into consideration the well conditions. . whether this entails changes to either the casing programme or the completion design. thickness of the corrosion product. or for a quicker choice. landing nipples. the possibility of anisotropies must be checked into as they generally imply a lower compressive yield load than tensile yield load and corresponding reductions for their use at high temperatures.8. etc. With regard to corrosion studies.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 182 OF 295 ENI S. Tubing Size And Weight One of the main elements of the completion string design process. e. the ideal material is determined by the results of corrosion studies carried out prior to the tubing design stage. it is essential to establish the size in order to find out if it impacts on the casing design. to complete a well with the presence of corrosive agents (H2S and/or CO2) the use carbon steel with controlled hardness and/or martensitic steel. economics. using the engineering diagrams supplied by manufacturers.8.1. is the choice of the size. Materials The choice of material for the tubing string depends mainly on the well environment. the length of each section needs to be determined at this point.
the new string (maximum thickness. it may be necessary to increase the weight or grade because the string is too weak. hence. mechanical strength and practical feasibility. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION The first indications of tubing size obtained is from tubing inflow performance analysis. such as cost. maximum weight) and the workover stage (minimum thickness. These threshold velocities can be found in API RP 14E. minimum weight) must both be taken into consideration when calculating the string’s stress resistance. production. The strings of these wells.A. Another reduction of thickness which must be taken into account on used tubing.e. Once the projected size of the tubing is established for the required flow rate then in gas. i. Once this calculation has been made. carried out to remove tong marks. As explained in the following section. it may be more appropriate to choose more structurally efficient solutions which use a tapered string with different diameters thus reducing the amount of material needed and therefore the cost. etc. These studies can generally be completed quickly using Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates software which directly provides the diameters of tubing for the expected flow rates and projected rates. it is necessary to calculate the velocities in the string during production.p. which take into account the type of fluid. . The two cases. by grinding. When choosing the thickness of the tubing forming the string. surface pressures. Calculation of the tubing inflow performance is very complicated and time consuming in most cases and is not covered in this manual.5% eccentricity tolerance which means one point on the tubing’s circumference probably has less thickness. The above factors can often lead to a variety of solutions. faster wall thickness reduction. the loads resulting from the various load conditions (acid jobs.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 183 OF 295 ENI S. which provides a better safety factor under similar conditions.) applied to the selected string. This rate must be lower than the rate at which erosion occurs. This value for CRA tubing’s is often only 10%. or gas condensate wells. so it is necessary to evaluate each one in order to obtain the most suitable solution in terms of cost. API standards for carbon steels define a 12. the safety factor under these loads against the yield strength are calculated. In the case of a very expensive super austenitic steel string for example. Wells in which hydrocarbons containing corrosive agents are produced are sometimes completed using carbon steel and it is accepted that a certain amount of the material will be lost through corrosion during the life of the well. In some particular situations non-traditional solutions must be chosen as some parameters. It is prudent in such cases to reduce through tubing interventions which knock off the corrosion exposing fresh material and. may be due to repairs. The most important value to be decided on the selected tubing is its mechanical strength. bottom hole pressures and other parameters. which generally will be equipped with a corrosion inhibitor injection system. it is useful to consider the thickness tolerance adopted by the manufacturer of the selected tubing. limit the choices. should therefore have added thickness so as to have sufficient material to last until the scheduled workover.
. the free moving system is the first choice and if the loads it creates do not allow for a suitable safety factor during well operations are other systems considered.W . The best solution. This type of anchoring provides the solution to seal life. due to the use of static seals. This will reduce movement of the packer seal assembly by eliminating downward movement and upward movement would only occur in certain limited lead conditions (stimulations or fracturing). Free Movement Limited Downward Movement Attached Figure 7. but leads to greater stressing of the tubing string. using a NoGo locator shoulder fitted above the seal assembly where it is positioned to prevent the elongation of the string while leaving it free to shorten.A. This system does. will generate different loads in the string will be generated. In preference.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 184 OF 295 ENI S. which shows the three most common types of packer/tubing systems.p. the operations carried out during the life of a well cause movement of the tubing string which can depend on the type of tubing/packer seal system used between the bottom of the tubing and the packer. This will extend seal life. Another important problem of free tubing. have some disadvantages which are often unacceptable such as dynamic seals. In very deep wells.8. however. it is clear from this that the least severe system is where the tubing seal assembly is free to move in the packer bore. is the continuous movement of the seal elastomers which may become damaged due to wear or from the debris deposited in the annulus above the packer. is systems to screw the tubing to the packer using a threaded connection on retrievable packer systems or to a tubing anchor (which allows the packer to be released when necessary) on permanent packer systems. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7. From figure 7. Anchoring Systems 0 REVISION As illustrated earlier.e.Tubing/Packer Systems The second preference is where downward tubing movement is restricted i.3. with high pressures and temperatures the movements of the lower end of the tubing may reach several feet in magnitude and hence very long seal units would need to be used in the packer which brings related assembly and protection problems during running in.w.
The use of premium connections for production casing is advised but not mandatory. termed Application Levels (AL).1. The connections to be used shall be qualified according to the requirements as set in the Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates procedure ‘Connection Procedure Evaluation’. 7.5006 or API 5C5. To date three tubing connections have been qualified for the most severe conditions ALI. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7.9.A. Application Level I applies to the most severe service conditions. PJD Dalmine and Antares MS have not yet been subjected to the complete qualification programme as per STAP M-1-M.2.p. In conjunction Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates also recommended that a premium connection be used for production casings and production liners. . Class of Service According to the specification STAP M-1-M 5006 ‘Connection Procedure Evaluation’. 7. TUBING CONNECTIONS 0 REVISION The Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates policy for tubing connections is that ‘the use of premium connections is mandatory’. there are two service classes. They may be used for all service condition where an Application Level II connection is required. Policy • • The use of premium connections for tubing is mandatory. They have however been used successfully for years with good results. They are : Coupled Connections AMS 28 ( manufacturer Dalmine) Vam ACE ( manufacturer Vallourec and Sumitomo) Integral Connections Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates A-DMS (Dual Metal Seal) Other connections like Hydril CS. especially when the annulus is to be used for gas lift or an underbalance fluid is used as a completion fluid. I and II.9.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 185 OF 295 ENI S.9.
8000 psi Table 7.A.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 186 OF 295 ENI S.4000 psi Differential WP 4000 .B .9. Selection Criteria 0 REVISION The following are the selection criteria for connections used in different types of wells and operating conditions. Work string or well testing string: Integral AL1 connection shall be used Horizontal wells with Build up ≥ 20°/100 feet: Integral AL1 connection should be used Wells with TVD ≥ 4500m: Integral AL1 connection shall be used Producing Oil And Gas Wells (TVD < 4500m) Criteria NACE Close Proximity Differential WP 0 .4000 psi Differential WP 4000 .A .Connection Specification Storage/Injection Gas Wells (TVD < 4500m) Criteria Differential WP 0 .Connection Specification Requirement AL I AL II .8000 psi Differential WP over 8000 psi (*) For Gas Injection wells.3. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7. AL I no yes AL II AL I AL I no no AL II AL II (*) AL I Requirement yes yes AL I AL I AL I yes no AL II AL I AL I Table 7.p.
Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Water Injection Wells (TVD < 4500m) Criteria Differential WP 0 .4000 psi Differential WP 4000 .9.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 187 OF 295 ENI S.p.C . .A.Connection Specification A flow chart reaffirming the above is shown in figure 7. Note: Section 7.8000 psi Table 7.4 explains the NACE and Close Proximity definitions.x. 0 REVISION Requirement AL II AL II Differential working pressure is the maximum differential pressure (internal and/or external) to which the production string is subjected during the life of the well.
Connection Application Level Selection Flow Chart .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 188 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 7.X .p.A.
Texas Railroad Commission Rules The following information is taken from Texas Railroad Commission Rule 36: For determining the location of the 100ppm radius of exposure: X = [(1.589) (mole fraction H2S) (Q)] 0. place of business. town. Close Proximity A proximity assessment should be prepared to consider the potential impact of an uncontrolled well flow condition on the life of personnel and the environment around the wellhead. Well is located in or near inland navigable waters Well is located in or near surface domestic water supplies.A. city limits. The following list of criteria can be used for determining this potential risk. Well is located within 50ft. Well is located in state waters. hospital. 500ppm ROE of H2S is greater than 50ft. government building. state. county or municipal street or road owned or maintained for public access or use. • • • • • • • Well is located in any environmentally sensitive area such as parks. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7. Well is located within 350ft of any dwelling. all or any portion of a park. Other criteria for consideration should be included when necessary. church. a public road. 100ppm Radius of Exposure (ROE) of H2S is greater than 50ft. wildlife preserve.6258 For determining the location of the 500ppm radius of exposure: X = [(0. NACE And Proximity Definitions NACE Requirement 0 REVISION This applies to the partial pressure of hydrogen sulphide (H2S) in the produced fluid as defined by NACE Standard MR 01-75. city. These conditions are recommended minimum considerations. village. from the wellhead and includes any part of a public area except a public road. Well is located within 150ft. etc. of a public road (lease road excluded). or other similar area that one can expect to be populated. It will be necessary to meet any other local regulatory requirements. of an open flame or fired equipment.4. school. Public area shall mean a dwelling. from the wellhead and includes any part of a public area including a public road.9. Public road shall mean any federal.4546) (mole fraction H2S) (Q)] 0.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 189 OF 295 ENI S. school bus stop.p.6258 .
but where hydrogen sulphide may be expected. as is applicable: For the new wells in developed areas. the escape rate shall be determined by using the current adjusted open-flow rate of offset wells.9. 7. CRA Connections For steels with a high chrome content (>13%). Computer programmes are very useful in this phase as it is possible to make repeated calculations quickly with different parameters. . or the field average current adjusted openflow rate. At this point of the process all the possible elements needed for the design verification are available. After these calculations are made. the type of tubing and materials to be used to meet the requirements outlined in section 6. a 100ppm radius of exposure equal to 3. Using the calculation theory illustrated previously. whichever is the larger.e.10. The escape rate used in determining the radius of exposure shall be corrected to standard o conditions of 14. TUBING STRESS CALCULATIONS The final stage of the completion string design is the calculation of stress in areas under the highest loads. hence protection. information about the load conditions.000ft shall be assumed. When a well is in an area where insufficient data exists to calculate a radius of exposure. there is a tendency to gall during make up. it is possible to determine how close the stresses are to the material’s yield strength. the fictitious and piston forces in the string sections. Mole fraction of hydrogen sulphide in the gaseous mixture which could escape. The anti-galling treatments (e. it is possible to calculate the forces acting on the packer.g. and consequently. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 where: X = Radius of exposure in feet Q= H2S = 0 REVISION Maximum volume determined to be available for escape in cubic feet per day.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 190 OF 295 ENI S.6. The string or load conditions or the tubing strength must therefore be altered until the calculation produces an appropriate safety factor (SF). Bakertron or copper plating) is always applied to the couplings to ensure the utmost coating.p. During the verification stage it may be seen that the loads on the string are unacceptably high.8. 7.5.A. The volume used as the escape rate in determining the radius of exposure shall be that specified below. Fp.65psia and 60 F.9. i. This requires special surface treatment in the connection’s pin and box. 7. Connection Data Data on tubing connections are available from API specifications and tables in industry handbooks.
Calculation Methods 0 REVISION Taking.y.D .y. string design must be verified at all the appropriate sections where there are variations in diameter. it is sufficient to use an intermediate length ‘l’ ( L > l > 0 ) measured from the packer.A. to calculate forces on intermediate sections between the well head and packer depth.E . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 7. the tables below summarise the forces acting on the sections of the string which will be used for the design verifications.p. The asterix distinguishes the forces calculated in a completion with the string anchored to the packer verses those calculated for a string free to move in the seal bore. instead of ‘L’ of the previous formulae.1. the sections where the string design must be verified are indicated by x-x at the well head and y-y at the downhole just above the packer.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 191 OF 295 ENI S. Section Y-Y (Packer) Tubing-Packer Mode Free tubing Tubing permitting limited motion and anchored Piston Forces Fictitious Forces Fa Ff Fa* = Fa + F p Table 7. the forces at the well head coincide with those at the packer depth if L = 0. have intermediate packers or other discontinuities. With reference to figure 7. Therefore. For other types of completions.10. the type of completion shown in figure 7.Forces at X-X F f tp = F f − wL F f*tp = F f* − wL As can be seen.Forces at Y-Y F f* = F f + F p Section X-X (Well Head) Tubing-Packer Mode Free tubing Tubing permitting limited motion and anchored Piston Forces Fictitious Forces Fa tp = Fa − w s L Fa*tp = Fa* − w s L Table 7. as an example. .
.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 192 OF 295 ENI S.A.Y . σb is calculated only if the section of the string to be verified is buckled.Example Completion #1 The piston forces obtained in this way are used to calculate the axial stress which is given by the expression: σa = Fa As The fictitious force is used to calculate the axial stress caused by the tubing bending when helically buckled. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION X X Y Y Figure 7.p. it is given by the expression: σb = Dr Ff 4I therefore.
1 which gives the SF values to be used by Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates. In this case the equivalent force will be the greater of the two. therefore. both calculations must be made to determine the higher of the two values while.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 193 OF 295 ENI S.p. its functionality. the equivalent stress is σeq = σi The higher of the stress values determined above will make it possible to obtain the SF of the string for the load conditions and the section considered: SF = σ sn σ eq The SF must be greater than the minimum dictated by policy and listed in section 7.A. Carbon and CRA Steels up to 13%Cr The acceptable SF for these types of materials is: 1. the stress which. 2 P − P P − R Po σ o = 3 i 2 o + i 2 +σa ±σb R −1 R −1 2 2 P − R 2 Po R 2 (Pi − Po ) σ σ i = 3 + i 2 +σa ± b 2 R −1 R R −1 2 2 As stated above. if the section to be calculated is buckled.2. by applying suitable criterion (for the materials used in the oil industry the most appropriate is Von Mises). The Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates policy is to apply different types of material due to their different mechanical behaviours and resistance to corrosion. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Now all the factors needed to determine the equivalent stress σa. calculated using the expression below.e. allows comparison of the stresses due to the different effects in a particular section of the string against the material yield stress rating. σb. if there is no buckling σb = 0 and the greater stress is that in the inside wall. Safety Factor A completion string’s safety factor is defined as the ratio between the yield stress and the maximum value of the stress obtained as described above. even if only slightly. 7. i.10.25 . which gives the equivalent stresses in the outside and inside wall of the considered tubing section. To calculate the SF the yield limit values of the material are taken into consideration so that there is no permanent corkscrewing of the string which could jeopardise. provides a quick reference parameter to evaluate the magnitude of the stresses present in the tubing compared to the maximum acceptable. Po and Pi are available. It.
p. from both the viewpoint of stress corrosion and mechanical strength. figure 7. Figure 7. The different SF’s between the carbon and CRA steels can be attributed to the different behaviour of these materials for stress values above the yield point. for some particular operations and for specific well conditions.z shows the stress/strain diagrams for the above two types of materials. As can be seen.g. low pressure oil wells.A. the acceptable SF can be lowered to 1.20.15 for some particular operations and for specific well conditions.Z .Stress/Strain Diagrams COLD WORKED CARBON STEEL σ σ σsn r σ σr σsn σr = breaking point σsn = yield point ε = elongation ε ε .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 194 OF 295 ENI S. It is. Cold Worked (CW) CRA Steels The acceptable SF for these types of materials which include duplex. super-austenitic and Incoloy is: 1. the engineer may evaluate whether. Furthermore. This is a dangerous situation which occurs at the breaking point. therefore. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION In each individual case the string design and stress analysis engineer may evaluate whether the acceptable SF can be lowered to 1.). the SF should be slightly higher. the SF is calculated using the yield point but also the collapse rating of the string. economic decision not to use the next grade of tubing etc. the cold worked materials retain residual stress so. apart from the yielding the cold worked materials reach breaking point soon after the yield point while the carbon steels maintain a greater plastic deformation margin before the breaking point. (e. clear that a higher SF for Cold Worked materials is required in order to maintain the same safety factor relevant to the breaking points for the two types of materials.35 Similarly. As stated previously.
If the force exerted by the tubing on the packer (Fp = set-down. In order to comply with the specifications of the supplier. it is possible to calculate this value under various well conditions. 7.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 195 OF 295 ENI S. once D/t and Yp are known. greater tensile loads can be applied and vice versa. due to the depletion in reservoir pressure. Another example is downhole pumps for artificial lifting and are operated by the power fluid pumped down the annulus. from which it is possible to make a comparison with the yield load. In order to use the API Bul 5C3 formulae. Calculation of external pressure is carried out using the formulae supplied by API Bulletin 5C3 which identifies four types of collapse at external pressure in relation to the D/t ratio and the Yp yield stress of the material. Po<Pi below). when the pressure in the annulus increases compared to that in the tubing.4. A typical diagram for packer force limits is shown in figure 7.A. By evaluating the magnitude of this force and considering other factors such as the possibility of future recovery. Any other SFs. conditions may occur making it necessary to limit the external pressure on the string. For example. the type of formula is chosen then the maximum withstandable pressure calculated. cannot be compared in any way to those described in this manual because they take into consideration only one mode of loading.3.aa. takes into consideration all the stress components to determine the σeq. are known. By using diagrams supplied by the manufacturer. can be determined. referred to. in a state of monoaxial stresses. the tensile strength in this case is positive. In fact the causes of collapse can range from material yield as in the case of pipes with a low D/t ratio. One example is a well at the end of its productive life with less pressure in the tubing than in the annulus. Fp = tension. if negative. However. the Yp value for use for calculations is adjusted using a special formula. If an axial force is applied to the pipe as well as external pressure.p.10. if referred to only as in the condition of triaxial stress which. 7. it would be incorrect to use the SF for tension alone because during the life of the well it will be subjected to a combination of stresses. which require substantial differential operating pressures.10. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION The SF discussed up to this point is valid. if applied individually. this diagram can be used to ascertain the suitability of the condition. is positive) and the differential pressure above and below the packer (Po>Pi above. causes a state of monoaxial stress. the most suitable type of packer in relation to the completion type. tension tubing. External Pressure Limit During the productive life of a well. to the section’s elastic limit which occurs in thin-walled pipes. Packer Load Limits If the Fp force value transmitted by the string to the packer is known. As can be seen. it is possible to check whether well conditions come within the limits set by the packer rating. therefore. .
bb. Data: Tubing 2 /8in 6. During a cement squeeze operation.p.5lb/ft : 7 2 Ai = 4.49in 2 As = 1. Example Manual Calculation As an example of applying the method detailed above.A. the analysis of the possible packer/tubing configurations available in this set-up is free tubing to packer and fully anchored. (below) Figure 7.10.Typical Packer Force Limit Diagram 7.61in Dpb = 3. we can consider the single completion in the well shown in figure 7.178 ws = 0.25in 2 Ap = 8.68in 2 Ao = 6.094in r = 1. This allows calculation of the variations in length and thereafter the anchoring force in the packer.61in σsn = 80.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 196 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 400 (tension) 300 200 (Thousands) FORCE 100 0 Safety zone (set-down) -100 -200 -20 -10 0 10 20 (Thousands) (above) PRESSURE DIFF.5.000ft = 120.542lb/in 4 I = 1.3in L = 10.000in Casing 7in 32lb/ft: Packer bore: Length of string: .AA .81in R = 1.000psi ID = 6.
cc shows the pressure and temperature variations against depth. to a pressure gradient of 0.Example Completion #2 . X X Y Y Figure 7.000psi.7795psi/ft). Final Conditions Final conditions are cement displacement with a specific gravity of 15lb/gal. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Initial Conditions 0 REVISION Initially both the tubing and the annulus are filled with 30° API oil.0649lb/in and to a pressure gradient of 0. therefore. It should be noted that 30° API corresponds to a 3 specific gravity of 0. figure 7.38 psi/ft. obtained by pressurising the tubing at 5.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 197 OF 295 ENI S.p.A.BB .0317lb/in and. This operation causes the string to cool to 160°F at the bottom hole and creates the pressure and temperature trend 3 shown in figure 7. while the temperature is 60°F at the well head and 200°F at the bottom hole.000psi and the casing at 1.cc (15lb/gal corresponds to a specific gravity of 0.
3 − 6.49) = 30751.Initial and Final Condition (Example #2) Calculation Method a) Calculation of variations in length The variation in the piston force between initial and final conditions is expressed by: ∆Fa = ∆Pi (Ap − Ai ) − ∆Po (Ap − Ao ) = 8995 (8. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION O P (psi) O 60 T (°F) GEOTERMICO CSG e TBG 10000 3800 10000 200 D (feet) D (feet) FINAL CONDITIONS O 1000 5000 P (psi) O 60 T (°F) TBG SQUEEZE CSG 10000 4800 12795 10000 160 D (feet) D (feet) Figure 7.9 lb .3 − 4.p.68) − 1000 (8.A.CC .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 198 OF 295 ENI S.
fully immersed in fluids.4. w.2. not all the string is buckled. which is initially zero because Pi = Po. so it is necessary to determine the position of the neutral point in order to calculate the ∆L2. The weight of string.96 in The fictitious force.61×66358.3037 − 0.16 .p.640 = 103685.5 ) 8×30000000×1.16 in As this distance is less than the length of the string.3037 lb/in w fo = Ao γ fo = 6. is given by: F f = A p (Pi − Po ) = 8.64 = −46.5 = 0.2057 lb/in w = ws + w fi − w fo = 0.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 199 OF 295 ENI S. is calculated using the first of the two formulae in section 7.20567 = 0.9 x 120000 =− E As 30000000 x 1.5 lb As this value is positive.68 x 0.6×10.0649 = 0. ∆L 2 = − =− F2 r 2 8Elw 2 −(1. The variation in length ∆L2.A.0317 = 0. then the string is buckled.3 x (12795 − 4800 ) = 66358.81 = − 67. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION so the variation in length according to Hooke’s Law (piston force) is given by: L1 = − Fa L 30751. is calculated in the following way: w fi = Ai γ fi = 4.49 x 0.640 lb/in The neutral point from the bottom hole is therefore: n= Ff w 66358.542 + 0.
5 psi ∆Pom = (1000 − 0 ) + (4800 − 3800) 2 = 1000 psi Therefore. the average variations in pressure along the string can be calculated using the formulae in section 7.4.3: ∆Pim = (5000 − 0) + (12795 − 3800 ) 2 = 6997.4.5 − (1.4. .178)2 − 1 = − 34. As regards the variation in length due to temperature.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 200 OF 295 ENI S. is used to calculate the average variation in temperature along the string: ∆TM = (60 − 60 ) + (160 − 200) 2 = − 20 °F The variation in length is therefore: ∆L4 = α ∆TM L = − 16.4 in. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION As regards the variation in length due to ballooning.9 x 10 − 6 x (− 20 ) x 120000 The variation in total length of the tubing. the formula in section 7.56 in. if the tubing can freely move in the packer-bore. the variation in length caused by ballooning is as follows: ∆L3 = − 2ν E x ∆P − R2 x ∆P im om xL 2 R −1 2 =− 2 x 0.73 in.3 6997.178) x 1000 x x 120000 30000000 (1. is therefore given by ∆Ltot = ∆L1 + ∆L2 + ∆L3 + ∆L4 1 = − 165. = 6.p.A.
41 − (− 49.48 lbs/in.A.485 = 41266.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 201 OF 295 ENI S.485 = − 49. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 b) Tubing Permitting Limited Motion 0 REVISION The variation in length calculated above. n= from the bottom of the string. As can be seen.4 in.1483 lbs/in w = w s + w fi − w fo = 0.1483 − 0.20575 = 0.61 x 20000) 20000 x 120000 =− − 30000000 x 1.81 8 x 30000000 x 1. oil is the fluid inside the tubing and so: w fi = Ai γ fi = 4. may sometimes be unacceptable.73 in.61 x 0. it makes it possible to use the formula in section 7.68 in.p.6 in order to obtain: 2 Fso L Fso r 2 ∆Lso = − − E As 8 E I w (1. During initial conditions. when there is a tubing permitting limited motion is given by: ∆Lso = ∆Ltot − ∆L so tot = − 165.73) = − 115. The slack-off operation modifies the variations in length the string will undergo during the subsequent cement squeeze stage as shown below. . this value is lower than that calculated for a free tubing. as it would create seal assembly lengths which are not practicable for the planned type of completion. the neutral point is located as: Fso w 20000 = 0. 2 The variation in the length of the string during the cement squeeze job.000lb.68 x 0.542 + 0. as it off-loads weight on the packer after it is set (slack-off) and compresses the string. One method for containing these elongations is to use a tubing permitting limited motion. Assuming that the slack-off force off loaded on the packer is 20.0317 = 0. As this value is less than the total length of the string.
5 F F2 − 452.cc shows.000lbs and the packer is forced upwards by the same amount.68 in. it is possible to identify the point where the origin of the axes has moved to. movement in the direction of elongation by a ∆Lp value is made in order to locate the point which is distant from the curve by a Fp value. so the string is subject to stress at its lower end which is equal to 37. calculated according to section 7. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 c) Anchored tubing 0 REVISION If we assume a condition obtained with a tubing which only permits limited motion. = Pi (A p − Ai ) − P0 (A p − Ao ) + F p F f* = F f + F p = 29358 lb . are: Fa* = Fa + F p = 629 in. Figure 8.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 202 OF 295 ENI S. d) Tubing Stress Control If we consider a tubing anchored to the packer during a cement squeeze operation.6. This value may still be unacceptable so it is necessary to use anchoring in both directions. Fp = 37000lbs.p. giving so ∆Ltot = -115. the fictitious and piston forces. If the diagram is plotted with the value of the fictitious force calculated previously (66358.5lbs). with a slack-off of 20.68 in .6 shows the diagram obtained using the formulae which supplies the force/elongation characteristic for tension and compression. the formulae below are obtained (the diagram can be quickly plotted by entering any F values and calculating the corresponding ∆L): ∆L = − ∆L = − F 452. As figure 7. thus so setting the elongation ∆Lp =-∆Ltot =115. From this point. In this case as slack-off after setting the packer is present it is necessary to determine the force required to position the end of the tubing in the packer (Fp).5 95403727 [in] for F<0 [in] for F >0 . When the data of the example are replaced.A.000lbs.
A.bb).5 x 10000 = − 64371 in. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION In the section above the packer (figure 7.DD . 50 20 trazione [lbx1000] 40 60 allungamenti [in] 100 allungamenti [in] 80 100 compressione [lbx1000] -40 -20 -50 Fp -100 -150 ∆Lp -200 Ff 20 40 compressione [lbx1000] Figure 7.p.Anchored Tubing (Example #2) accorciamenti [in] .64 x 120000 = − 47442 in. the forces at the well head are: Fa*tp = Fa* − w s x L = 629 − 6. F f* tp = F f* − w x L = 29358 − 0.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 203 OF 295 ENI S.
61 = 21095 psi If we replace the σa e σb.61 x 29358 = 4 x 1. values. along with Pi = 12795 psi e Po = 4800 psi.875 x 1.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 204 OF 295 ENI S.10: σo = 51688psi σi = 60223psi . the result is σeq = σi. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Bottom Hole The piston force generates an axial stress equal to: 0 REVISION Fa* σa = As 629 = 1. σb = 0 and the greatest amount of stress is generated on the inner wall of the tubing: σa = Fa*tp As − 64371 = 1.33 Well Head * As Ff tp < 0 the string at the well head is not buckled. if we consider the highest value found as equivalent force. therefore.81 = − 35564 psi . the values below are obtained using the formulae in section 7.p. we can obtain the following bottom hole safety factor: SF = = σ sn σ eq 80000 60223 = 1.A.81 = 347 psi the deformation due to buckling generates an axial stress equal to: σb = Dr * Ff 4I 2.
please refer to the notes in Appendix D and the user’s manual available in the Company’s library.6. therefore: SF = 1. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION If we replace the σa value obtained and as pi = 5.33 This value is acceptable because the lower limit for a carbon steel string is 1.000psi and po = 1.10. have been deliberately omitted as this programme is no longer used by Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates. Example Computation As an example we have included two cases of string calculations.000psi. The first example is the same as that dealt with by Lubinsky. Examples done with the Vertubing programme. Particular attention should be paid to data entry and presentation of results in order to obtain knowledge of how the programme handles these two cases. the well head safety factor is: SF = = σ sn σ eq 80000 36117 = 2. Therefore only a brief description has been given in Appendix D.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 205 OF 295 ENI S. 7.10: σi = 36117 psi therefore as σeq = σi.25.p. For a description of the programme’s general functions. carried out using the Wellcat programme supplied by Enertech. analysed during completion studies for the Villafortuna-Trecate field. For further information please refer to the user’s manual. . the value below is obtained using the formula in section 7. .21 The safety factor for the cement squeeze operation results as the lowest of obtained values. The second is a case history.A.
operating diagrams for the packers supplied by the manufacturer of the particular packer and to the pressure ratings for retrievable packers. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 8.p.1. the next stage is establish its performance to meet with all the expected operating conditions (applied force and pressure differences). The proposed criteria for the choice only take into consideration general technical aspects and do not cover the individual characteristics of particular models or tools.A. Once the packer type and model have been defined. i.A . For this reason regarding permanent packers.1. 8. while still reflecting the needs which lead to selection of the most commonly used models. Type Of Packer Permanent Setting Method Mechanical Hydraulic Setting Tool • Hydraulic setting tool • Electric line N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Sealbore Features • Std/Large/Dual • Std/Large/Dual Std/Dual Std/Large/Dual Std/Dual Permanent/ Retrievable Retrievable Mechanical Hydraulic Hydraulic Hydrostatic Weight Table 8.3.e. SUB-SURFACE EQUIPMENT PACKERS The types of packer systems and applications have already been described in section 5. The packers considered are listed in table 8. reference is made to the operating ‘Envelopes’.Packer Types .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 206 OF 295 ENI S. This section defines the series of criteria for choosing packer characteristics to apply to single and selective completions.a below.
unplanned) Type of de-compression operations. identifying the standard procedures for each stage (Refer to figure 8.2. These data also include type of packer chosen and setting. .A.p.). off-shore under water) Pressures and temperatures Type of well (production. the most important being: • • • • • Location (on-shore/ off-shore platforms.a. etc. Completion Data This includes the following parameters such as: • • • Type and density of the completion fluid Perforation of the casing using tubing-conveyed or wireline techniques Use of a production liner. This section illustrates the flow diagrams. Operational Data The following operational data are required: • • Stimulations (planned.1. The selection process includes the following categories of data: General Well Data This includes data which effects the configuration of the well to be completed. refer to section 7. injection) Type of fluid produced (oil. Selection Criteria Various representations can be used to describe the categories of criteria.1. stress analysis is carried out to check the completion string (packer and tubing) under the stress to which they are exposed.5 which describes the iterative process of tubing weight/grade/stress calculations. in particular: a) removal of the tubing by itself b) • • removal of the tubing and packer simultaneously Planned frequency of de-compression operations Potential damage to the formation caused by the workover fluid. Selection Procedure Packer selection has three stages: 1) 2) 3) 0 REVISION Selection of type of packer Selection of setting mechanism Selection of main packer accessories including the tubing-packer connection In stage 3. 8.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 207 OF 295 ENI S. setting depth. deviation angle). gas) Deviation (max.1. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 8.
Selection Process Diagram . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 8.A .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 208 OF 295 ENI S.A.p.
SBHP > 700 atm. Highly critical wells: • • • • • • Deep depths > 4500m.000 and 4. To this end four classes of well have been identified which are used to analyse the various problems involved in the selection of the packer: 1) High corrosive wells • 2) The fluids have high corrosive problems. Platform well having the risk of failure due to the potential collision from a vessel with the structure. If the well has high corrosive. ITHP above 3. Temperatures below 100 °C.p. High pressures.000psi.3. Gas injection well with pressures. with priority be given to the former.b).ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 209 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 8.000m. If the well is critical or non-critical. Well Classification 0 REVISION An important parameter for defining the characteristics of a packer is the ‘degree of difficulty of the well to be completed’.500m.1. .A. 8. select a permanent packer. High temperatures. Subsea well-head well. SBHT > 130°C. 4) Non-critical well • • Depth of less than 3. The depths indicated are true vertical depths. Packer Selection For Single String Completion Type Of Packer Procedure The choice is mainly linked to the type of well: 1) 2) 3) In the case of a highly critical well.4. 3) Critical Well • • Temperatures between 100 and 130°C Depths between 3. (Refer to figure 8.1. select a permanent/retrievable or permanent packer.
b: (A) High frequency of tubing pullout. (C) Use of TCP drilling techniques. (D) Measured well depth ≥ 3000 m.000psi. (F) The packer fluid is a high density mud (> 1.p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 210 OF 295 ENI S. (E) The workover fluid damages the formation. (G) Gas injection well with injection pressure > 3.6 kg/l) with probable solid deposits on the packer. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 8. (B) High frequency of tubing-packer pullout.B . .A.Type of Packer for Critical and Non-Critical Wells Explanation of figure 8.
Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION At points A and B.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 211 OF 295 ENI S. The completion fluid = mud with density > 1. . If the well is critical or not critical. in particular. with a maximum deviation angle > 50°. the priority is indicated by a number (‘1’ corresponds to a higher priority than ‘2’).Packer Setting Method for Critical and Non-Critical Wells For a mechanical type permanent packer. The rectangle ‘Choose’ indicates the choice between the two alternatives.C . in the choice is made on the basis of point (D) then there are no particular constraints (no workovers. Gas a production liner with inclination > 30°. The same procedure will also be used later for packers of the type used in a selective type completion.c).A. The safety factor of using a retrievable packer or not depends on the criticality of the well and. (Refer to figure 8. on its depth.p. the setting is defined by the conditions detailed in (A). Figure 8. high frequency of extraction corresponds to a completion life of less than five years. Is a deviated well.6 kg/l. Packer Setting Method Permanent and Permanent/Retrievable Packers The selection is dependent mainly on the well characteristics: 1) 2) 3) If the well is corrosive or very critical. For example. or requests due to the completion fluid characteristics). choose hydraulic setting. Reference (A) is only true if one of the following conditions are relevant: • • • • SBHT > 150 °C (= 270 °F).
d: Figure 8. The vertical depth of the packer setting is > 2. The bottom-hole temperature (SBHT) is > 60 °C.p. Check (B): • Using TCP shooting techniques. following the diagram in figure 8. Stimulations are planned.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 212 OF 295 ENI S.000m (this is true to definitive and not test completions). .Retrievable Packer Setting Method 1) Check (A) is only true if one of the following conditions are relevant: • • • • 2) The well is deviated with a maximum deviation angle of > 20°.6 kg/l) with the probability that it leaves solid deposits on the packer.D. 3) Check (C): • There is high frequency of tubing pullout (life of the completion < 5 years). 4) Check (E): • Completion fluid and damage to the formation 5) Check (F): • The packer fluid is a high density mud (> 1.A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Retrievable Packer Setting Method 0 REVISION The method of setting used for retrievable packers is made.
fixed. . 5 If the failure of the stress analysis is due to the tension caused by the tubing-packer connection. a configuration which fulfils the stress analysis requirements must be considered for the packer-tubing connection5.p. If during the application of the stress analyses of the string gives negative results.A.g. alternatively. The maximum force is determined using stress analysis (to take into account the tolerance of the nominal shear value ± 5 to 10%). a permanent/retrievable packer will be utilised and consequently.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 213 OF 295 ENI S. e. Tubing-packer connections seal assembly elements will be of the moulded seal type when subjected to alternating pressure cycles. At present the stress analysis procedure is developed using the “Veritas “ software package . The shear value is checked for the stress conditions at the wellhead section during the packer release stage. the approach is the same as that for an anchored tubing-packer. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION The decision of whether to use a hydraulic. a dynamic seal is used (Refer to figure 8. Permanent And Permanent/Retrievable Packers Setting Method There are principally two aspects to analyse: • • The choice of the tubing-packer connection.Veritas is the UNIX version of the VERTBG package. The main consideration is the required setting pressure (lower for hydrostatic packers) which influences the wellhead pressure rating. in particular the choice is made between a shear release or anchor seal assembly. defines the type of anchoring on the basis of the conditions for (A). an anchor seal assembly is used. gas injection wells where the IBHP is greater than the packer fluid pressure and SBHP is lower than the packer fluid pressure. The conditions at the moment of packer setting decides whether to use a retrievable packer. the corresponding setting procedure will have to be adopted (see permanent packers above). To integrate this choice with the stress analysis procedures. If these are outwith the capacity of the retrievable packer. Highly Critical Well: Anchored Completion For a highly critical well. or hydrostatic.d). The type of anchor to be used can be defined during this first stage for an anchored completion (without shear release): • If the packer is set mechanically. The shear ring value is generally set by increasing the maximum force applied to the packer by 25%. If anchor is needed. set is left to the engineer. the anchor will be a ratchet type or. If the stress analysis results are negative: • • If a shear release is needed.
Dynamic Seal Check (A) . Highly Critical Well: Dynamic Seal This stage considers an anchored completion which fails the stress analysis calculation because of problems associated with the tubing-packer connection. an anchor will be used and the check will be carried out again.E .Anchored Completion Option Check (A): Deviated well: • if it is an injection well it cannot be critical (see section 8. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 8. In this case a dynamic seal is used (Refer to figure 8.1.3).ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 214 OF 295 ENI S.A. Figure 8.p.F .f). For an anchor with shear release: • If the stress analysis upon releasing is negative.
Figure 8.G . following any failure of the stress analysis. This is only possible with hydraulically packers. Here.f gives a general description of the criteria behind the choice of dynamic seal to be adopted. The packer is not set hydraulically.6 kg/l) which may leave solid deposits on the packer.g is followed. the procedure illustrated in figure 8. i. The packer is one trip installation. The well is not an injection well. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 • Check (B): • 0 REVISION The packer fluid is a high density mud (> 1.e. Reference will be made to this later and also for cases which are different to those described in highly critical wells above. Seal Element .Critical and Non-Critical Wells. If these conditions do not apply.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 215 OF 295 ENI S. The procedure illustrated in figure 8.A.p. the stress analysis results are corrected using factors other than the seal element. This is the case with the following conditions: • • • No stimulations are planned. when using dynamic seals. in general. Non-Critical Well The easiest solution in these cases is to choose a Standard Seal Locator. run on the tubing. no other rules are apply as. Critical.
6 kg/l) which may leave solid deposits on the packer. the outlet conditions included in the rectangle indicate. Particular conditions raise questions over which type of retrievable packer to use. or a dynamic seal whenever feasible. the need to use the packing setting procedure specified.A. Retrievable Packer Tubing-Packer Connections The choice of the tubing-packer connection for retrievable packers (hydraulic and set down weight) is made on the basis of that in figure 8. besides the choice of tubing-packer connection. . anchored completion is not recommended. Again in figure 8. deviation angle > 20. In these cases. (B): • (C): • (D): • the packer is set mechanically. a permanent/retrievable packer is the priority or a permanent should be used and consequently the associated setting procedure and seal assembly selected. In the case of a deviated well.p. expected life of the completion < 5 years. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Check (A): • 0 REVISION the packer fluid is a high density mud (> 1. No additional adaptation of the seal element is foreseen as a consequence of any stress analysis.h.g. deviated well with max.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 216 OF 295 ENI S. It is better to use a completion with a shear element which is more easily releasable.
1. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 8.Tubing-Packer Connections for Retrievable Packers 8. The solutions given are for a case with only 2 zones and if a third zone is to be taken into consideration it is assumed that the selection made for the upper zone of the two zone scenario applies. . Packer Selection The first case classifies the well on the basis of depth characteristics (≥ 4.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 217 OF 295 ENI S. Single Selective Completion Packers The criteria illustrated here are valid for selective completions with 2 or 3 producing zones.5.H .000m) but more on the basis of its complexity.A.p.
however.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 218 OF 295 ENI S.I . If the conditions as of figure 8.p. as for example in figure 8.Single Selective Packer For Complex Wells if several different configurations are available. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 8.i.A. the engineer has a certain degree of freedom of choice but is. governed by the order of priority specified along with the choices.i. these cases are classified by well depth: . are not applicable.
000 and 4.000m Figure 8.Selective Single Well with Depths Between 1.A.J .K .500 and 3.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 219 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 8.Selective Single Well with Depths Between 3.p.000m .
it is strongly recommend that a retrievable type packer be used. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 8.500m In the case of depths less than 1.L .Selective Single Well with Depths Less Than 1. and a permanent or permanent/retrievable packer are in the list of possible choices.l is common with the only exception. being that the order of priority for the lower zone can be changed by applying the following rules: • • If workovers are planned with removal of the tubing and packer.A.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 220 OF 295 ENI S. then it should be selected. in the case of multiple choices. If the completion fluid is a mud with deposition problems.i through figure 8. and a retrievable packer is one in the list of possible choices. Application of the criteria illustrated in figure 8.p. then the permanent/retrievable should be selected over of the retrievable.500m in a well not considered complex. .
l.k and figure 8.e. if the completion fluid is a brine. i. In cases where there is no specific mention of an Intermediate zone. hydraulic setting should be used for this type of packer.i with all permanent packers. hydraulic type setting should be used or else the packers can be set mechanically. three zones are assumed (upper. It is essential to check with manufacturers that the distance between the packers is sufficient for the packers to be set. the zones are be treated separately. Due to this. if the setting distance between the packers is > 500m (check with the packer manufacturer). in these cases the reference packer is permanent and the other packers are the retrievable or permanent/retrievable type. the results of the stress analysis specifically identifies the packers with releasing problems. In some cases.j. Permanent Stacked Packers: Refer to figure 8. . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Packer Setting Method 0 REVISION The type of setting method proposed depends on the following factors: • • Type of packer Setting distance between the packers. Mechanical setting is preferred for the reference packer and the setting should be by electric line when the distance between the packers is < 500 m. All packers are Retrievable Refer to figure 8. figure 8. modifications are be made only to those packers which have the problems. If the reference packer is set by a workstring. or wireline) are those already defined for the single completion described in section 8. lower). it is treated with the same criteria used for the upper zone. Generally. choose hydraulic setting for all the packers or else mechanical setting.A.4. a depth control procedure is necessary to verify the depth of the packer setting to ensure positioning of the blast joint across the upper zone which is open to production.k and figure 8. Lower Permanent Packer With Upper Retrievable: Refer to figure 8.1. With these type of packers. It is recommended in any case to re-check the completion after having made the modifications.p. Tubing-Packer Connection Selection The criteria continues by classifying the packers by type and setting with the zones treated separately. The setting criteria of a mechanical permanent packer (on a workstring.l where all packers are retrievable. intermediate.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 221 OF 295 ENI S.
1. an anchor or retrievable type packer will be used. . Initially an anchor with shear release should be selected. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Upper packer 0 REVISION The rules described for the single completion are applied to the upper packer (Refer to 8. The lower zone packer is a retrievable.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 222 OF 295 ENI S. In the case of failure of the stress analysis on this packer. a longer locator with seal bore extension should be used. In the case of failure in the stress analysis a dynamic seal with telescopic joint will be used. a dynamic seal will be used (anchor with PBR or telescopic joint). a standard length locator. a telescopic joint should be used when there is failure in the stress analysis. In the case of failure of the stress analysis.4). The lower zone packer is a permanent with mechanical setting.p. For the intermediate zone in the three zone case. for the intermediate packer. in particular.A. A dynamic seal should be used. Lower or Intermediate Packer There are three possible ways of treating the lower zones: 1) All the packers are of the permanent or permanent/retrievable types with hydraulic setting. 2) 3) For the intermediate zone in the case of three zones.
2.g. SUB-SURFACE SAFETY VALVES 0 REVISION This section provides the Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates policy and guidelines for the application and selection of Sub-Surface Safety Valves (SSSV). either. The choice of SSSV for a particular development will depend on: • • • • Well location Fluid properties Required flow area Well intervention capabilities.2.2. 8.A. shall only be sanctioned by the Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates Head Office. Surface controlled sub-surface safety valves (SCSSV’s) shall be used accordingly to the criteria listed below in section 8.2. the valve may fail to close.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 223 OF 295 ENI S. a flowline rupture. The use of these valves should be avoided as they are set up to operate on predetermined conditions representing a major leak at surface. A derivative of the storm choke is the injection valve which is held open by water or gas injection and closes when injection ceases.1. Any variation to this policy and selection procedures herein. 8. Both types are generally referred to as ‘storm chokes’. Applications The applications for SSSV’s are given in section 8.5. flow erosion of the valve internals may alter the closure settings.2. Wireline Retrievable Safety Valves Wireline retrievable valves may be. The policy defined shall be applied to all Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates completion designs world-wide. sub-surface controlled sub-surface safety valves (SSCSSV) otherwise known as direct acting valves or surface controlled sub-surface safety valves (SCSSV). In conjunction.4. . but under some circumstances. SSCSSV’s are either pressure differential or ambient pressure operated valves.2. 8.3. when there is a leak of insufficient rate.p.2. e. Policy All Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates completions shall incorporate a SSSV in the completion string to provide safety in the event of an uncontrolled well flow. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 8. This will determine whether the selected SSSV is Wireline Retrievable (WRSV) or Tubing Retrievable (TRSV).
• All wells. Gas producer Gas storage Gas injection Water injection Artificial lift H2S in produced fluids Table 8. Well Type Oil Producer Criteria • All new offshore development.A. • All old wells being recompleted.Criteria For Use of SCSSV's 8. • All wells onshore which can sustain natural flow.B . tubing and only annulus if used for gas venting. • All wells.2. • All wells. Note: All valves with ball type closure mechanisms are not recommended for use as they are less reliable than flapper valves. wireline retrievable or annulus safety valve systems. The guidelines given in section 8. • Electrical submersible pump. Surface Controlled Sub-Surface Safety Valves 0 REVISION These are designed for tubing retrievable. • All new offshore development. Valve Type/Closure Mechanism Selection This section gives recommendations on the choice of valve with the corresponding type of closure mechanism. tubing and annulus.5 indicate in which applications WRSV’s and TRSV’s should be used. • All isolated wells.5.2. They are controlled normally by surface applied hydraulic pressure through a control line clamped to the outside of the tubing string.2. The following table 8. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 8. Hydraulic pressure opens and then retains the valve open. • All old wells in above categories which are to be recompleted.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 224 OF 295 ENI S. Removal of the pressure allows the valves to close.4. These valve systems are fail safe and are preferred to SSCSSV’s.p. • All wells on gas lift. . • All wells.b specifies when SCSSV’s shall be used.
1. These two different cases will be considered separately below. CONTROL/INJECTION LINE SELECTION The purpose of this sub-section is to define the basic criteria for the selection and the use of small diameter tubes for SCSSV control line and injection line applications.3. under the pump.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 225 OF 295 ENI S. Wells with surface flowing temperature greater than 130°C. 8.C . In this case. • As on insert valve for tubing retrievable SCSSV’s. • Jet pump wells. are also installed with the tubing string. Subsea wells. • Gas lift wells. Wireline Retrievable Surface Controlled Flapper Valve Storm Chokes Annular Safety Systems Wireline Retrievable Injection Valves Table 8.SSSV Closure Mechanism Applications Gas or water injection wells may have either a tubing retrievable or wireline retrievable SCSSV. therefore. The line length required in this case. • As a backup to the WRSV above when there is a control line failure. 8. • Wells with shut-in surface. 8.p. the length of line required is generally relatively short.A. will be considerably longer.2. .3.3. Wells with the presence of H2S or CO2. Control Lines Tube used as ‘control line’ to operate downhole safety valves are installed along with the production string. • ESP wells with gas venting. Set in the next lowest wireline nipple. SCSSV’s are usually set at shallow depths and. Injection Lines Tube used as ‘injection lines’ to inject chemical products such as corrosion or scale inhibitors down hole or as deep as possible in the well. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Type of Valve Tubing Retrievable Flapper Valve • • • • Applications Offshore platform wells. • All waste wells.
is /4” OD and the wall thickness chosen from among the following sizes according to the pressure requirements: • • • 1 1 1 /4” OD x 0. The working pressure (WP) is defined as follows: WP = Safety Valve WP + Valve Opening Pressure Safety Valve WP is as specified by the manufacturer. Once the working pressure has been defined as explained in the following paragraph. Control Line Working Pressures A down hole safety valve is usually set at a relatively shallow depth.035” wall thickness /4” OD x 0.065” wall thickness. Usually it ranges between 1.500 to 2. In the seamless tube manufacturing process. ranging about 30m to 50m from well head for on-shore installations or from sub sea level in case of off-shore activity.3. The cycles of cold drawing with a floating plug drawing method is preferred and annealing operations performed to reach the desired dimensions and produce a weld zone homogeneous with the rest of the tube material. provided by the manufacturer. In the case of welded tube process.d for the selection of the size which most suits the requirements. Valve Opening Pressure.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 226 OF 295 ENI S. the raw material comes in the form of extruded hollows.049” wall thickness 1 /4” OD x 0.p. For this reason the configuration of the control line is not effected by the well deviation. is the pressure required to overcome the closing force of the spring plus resistance due to friction effects. The standard size for both applications. . Tube Specifications Size 0 REVISION Small diameter tubes for control or injection line applications are manufactured either as seamless or seam-welded and sunk.A. refer to table 8. Welded tubes can be produced in extra long coils more than 3200 ft by butt welding lengths of tubings together. of 1000 ft in length). which are then reduced to the desired diameter and wall thickness by a cold drawing operation. They are usually available in a full range of materials and sizes. Welded tubes are considered the norm as opposed to seamless which are considerably more expensive and limited in length (usually a max. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 8. control and injection line.000psi depending on the manufacturer. Both types of lines comply with ASTM specification A269 ‘Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service’ and ASTM-B751 specification ‘General requirement for Ni and Ni alloy Seamless and Welded Tube’.3. therefore in most cases external encapsulation it is not recommended. the raw material comes in strips which are first rolled into tube form which is fed through a welding head to perform a fusion weld.
Once the friction losses for laminar flow have been calculated then the diameter size can be determined accordingly. Hydrostatic pressure of injection fluid. Injection rates referred to in this application are always low.n). The definition of working pressure is based on the following considerations: • • • • Well configuration.A where: WP = BHSP= Pfr = Phd = BHSP + Pfr .B Variables are defined as: P Ys Ys WP OD ID = = = = = = computed pressure (psi) ultimate tensile strength to compute ‘Burst Pressure’ (psi) yield strength (2% offset) to compute ‘Test Pressure’ (psi) 80% of test pressure (psi) outside diameter (in) inside diameter (in) .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 227 OF 295 ENI S.f and they are rated to temperatures between -20 and 100°F. Friction losses (see figure 8. 8. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Chemical Injection Line Working Pressures 0 REVISION Chemical injection lines are run to injection mandrels which are installed as close as possible to the bottom of the tubing.A.n shows the graphs of pressure losses per 100m versus flow rate plotted for various internal diameters and various values of fluid viscosity.p. The pressures given in the table are computed with ultimate and yield tensile strength values given in table 8. Values obtained are based on the Lamè’s formula for thick section pipes using internal pressure only and stress defined at the internal diameter face. figure 8. combining radial and tangential stress to determine an equivalent resultant using the Von Mises Theory of Distortion Energy: OD 2 Ys − 1 ID P= 4 OD 3x +1 ID Eq. (Refer to table 8. the selection of the tubing size to meet with requirements can be made. Working pressure is defined as follows: WP = BHSP + Pfr − Phd Eq. Once the working pressure has been defined as explained below.Phd Bottom hole static pressure. 8. Injection rates to choose the correct diameter and evaluate friction losses. Total pressure required to inject chemicals through the line. Injection fluid characteristics such as density and viscosity.d). therefore the flow profile can be assumed to be laminar. therefore total vertical depth.
375 Table 8.333 5.D .786 17.323 12.035 0.250 0.967 7.035 0.142 8.831 12.065 0.438 15.Theoretical Working.250 0.375 0.914 30.780 17.333 5.049 0.e together with their relative characteristics.250 0.459 9.416 6. Material Selection Among the stainless steels and nickel alloys available.250 0.375 0.250 0.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 228 OF 295 ENI S.004 5.250 0.065 0.250 0.250 0. .965 42.328 7. Compatibility of packer or completion fluid with the selected material must be confirmed by means of condition specific laboratory testing.457 15.809 3.035 0.642 30.914 30.854 21.035 0.011 4.f shows the mechanical properties of these materials in the annealed condition.A.250 0.250 0.355 26.065 0.390 8.035 0.006 9.089 5.035 0.049 0.p. the most commonly used for control or injection line applications are listed in table 8.049 0.084 21.035 0.006 12.035 0.709 52.866 4.972 9. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Type of alloy AISI 316 L OD (inch) 0.112 7. Bursting and Testing Procedures (for welded stainless steel tubing at between -20°F to 100°F) 8.375 Wall (inch) 0.965 12.3.4. table 8.049 0.250 0.564 6.065 0.118 8.375 Incoloy 825 0.646 24.965 12.763 12.605 7.013 Monel K400 0.659 8.375 0.268 31.049 0.250 0.049 0.515 22.010 Burst (psi) 18.255 7.515 18.112 7.954 15.459 9.651 5.646 24.375 0.025 Test (psi) 6.049 WP (psi) 5.375 Inconel 625 0.518 21.427 10.908 30.757 15.252 37.831 12.780 17.898 11.983 21.049 0.
000 85.000 70.000 28.2% Offset (psi) 25.000 120. It is susceptible to chloride stress cracking when the presence of stress is combined with a packer fluid containing chlorides. Is an austenitic nickel-base alloy with good resistance to pitting in chloride solutions and to stress corrosion has improved resistance to corrosion by many acids. based on pressure ratings and working environment. Control or Injection line made of the above material shall comply with the following ASTM specifications: AISI 316L Monel K400 Incoloy 825 Inconel 625 In accordance with ASTM specification A269 (TP316L).000 35. Has good resistance to grain boundary attack and improved resistance to pitting and crevice attack.Stainless Steels and Nickel Alloys Most Commonly Used Once the type of material to be used has been defined. In accordance with ASTM specification B423.p. Is a nickel-copper alloy resistant to corrosion and stress corrosion over a wide range of conditions. Monel K400 Incoloy 825 Inconel 625 Table 8.E .Nominal Mechanical Properties in Annealed Conditions (For temperatures between -20 to 100°F) .A. Is a Nickel-base alloy with a higher percentage of molybdenum to give the highest resistance to chloride attack.000 Yield Strength at 0. In accordance with ASTM specification B165.000 60. Tensile Strength (psi) 70.F . In accordance with ASTM specification B704.000 Type of Alloy AISI 316 L Monel K400 Incoloy 825 Inconel 625 Table 8. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Type of Alloy AISI 316 L Main Characteristics Is an austenitic stainless steel with reduced carbon content. the corrosion department should be consulted to confirm compatibility with the packer fluids.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 229 OF 295 ENI S.
230 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
STAP-P-1-M-7100 8.3.5. Fittings 0
Connections for either SCSSV control lines or chemical injection lines shall be performed as follows: In case of pressure rating < 5000 psi, line connections shall be of the ‘Swagelok’ type. • In case of pressure rating > 5000 psi, line connections shall be of the ‘Autoclave’ type as recommended by API Spec. 6A (Wellhead & Christmas Tree Equipment) at the paragraph ‘Equipment specification requirement’ under ‘test and gauge connections’. It is suggested to avoid, as far as possible, any intermediate connections to reduce potential leak paths. 8.3.6. Protectors Control line protectors are designed to support and avoid (bare or encapsulated) crushing at where it is most exposed, e.g. where it crosses large offsets like couplings, downhole safety valves or gas lift mandrels. Protectors shall be designed for small annular clearances allowing sufficient annulus flow area. They should be of the “one piece” type without loose parts and designed so as to be quickly installed and removed. ‘Across coupling tubing protectors’ are recommended for use with both SCSSV control and injection lines applications. For control lines used on SCSSV’s installed at shallow depth (less than 250m), other types of protectors may be used. In general, ‘steel banding’ or ‘banding straps’, ‘rubber based’ and ‘mid joint protectors’ shall be avoided at all costs. The following technical requirements will identify protector performance: • • • • • Material shall be of all metal construction. No structural welding shall be allowed. Lab corrosion tests shall be run to verify compatibility with annular environment. Capable of firmly supporting bare or encapsulated lines when performing completions and recovery during workover allowing control line and protector reuse. Force indicated in ‘l’ or ‘tons’ that the protector will support against axial displacement without failing or damaging the supported line. Force stated in ‘lb’ or ‘Kg’ that protector will resist as a direct pull on supported line without any slippage. Maximum load expressed in ‘lb’ or ‘kg’ that protector will withstand when contacting the casing wall without damage. •
231 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
STAP-P-1-M-7100 8.3.7. Encapsulation 0
Encapsulation of this line is recommended only for chemical injection lines applications. Encapsulation increases crush resistance during installation, protects line against abrasion, pinching and improves clamping profile. Several encapsulation materials are available, covering a wide range of environmental conditions. table 8.g indicates the compatibility of the main encapsulation materials with the most commonly used packer/completion fluids. In some cases, braided wire is placed alongside the injection line and bonded together by the encapsulation material, to further enhance resistance and strength avoiding any rolling and twisting tendencies (Refer to table 8.h). The following laboratory tests are suggested to confirm the lines mechanical characteristics and compatibility of the encapsulation material with the packer fluid used: • • • • • • Immersion test of the encapsulated line in downhole conditions for a defined period of time. No evidence of a change in physical appearance should be observable. Gas impregnation tests at various temperatures, pressures and with various gasses for a fixed period of time. No evidence of cracking, blistering or embrittlement should be observable. Combined brine/sour gas exposure tests according to the operating conditions, as above. Combined crude oil/sour gas exposure tests according to operating conditions as above. Abrasion resistance test to compare the resistance against abrasion between bare and encapsulated lines. Crush resistance test by loading the tube laterally, across the diameter, simulating various loading levels, until tube collapse is evident. Encapsulated line results should be compared to bare line tests.
The following table 8.g shows the main properties of the most common types of encapsulation material available. The choice of material, is mainly based on type of packer fluid, well deviation and working temperatures to be experienced and shall be confirmed by laboratory tests for compatibility.
232 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
Encapsulation Material Nylon
Main properties Compatible with diesel packer fluids containing high gas percentages. Nylon should not be used with completion fluids that contain calcium chlorides, calcium bromides or zinc bromides at high temperatures. Its maximum temperature rating is 250°F. Compatible with most packer fluids with the exception of diesel or fluid at high gas concentration. Maximum operating temperature rating is 275°F - 300°F. Chemically resistant to almost all downhole fluids. Excellent mechanical strength and abrasion resistance. Compatible with high gas content environments. Recommended for highly deviated wells. Maximum operating temperature is 400°F. Chemically resistant to almost all downhole fluids. Excellent mechanical strength and abrasion resistance. Compatible with high gas content environments. Recommended for highly deviated wells. Maximum operating temperature is 212°F. Chemically resistant to almost all downhole fluids. Excellent mechanical strength and abrasion resistance. Compatible with high gas content environments. Recommended for highly deviated wells. Maximum operating temperature is 302°F.
Table 8.G - Compatibility and Characteristics of Encapsulation Materials Halar (fluoropolymers) is a registered trademark of Ausimont USA Santoprene (thermoplastics rubber) is a registered trademark of Monsanto Rilsan II (polyamide thermoplastic) Foraflon PVDF (polyvinylidine fluoride thermoplastic material) Samples of different types of encapsulated tubes have been tested under compressive, laterally applied, loading simulating possible damage arising during installation to determine the tube crushing resistance and extend of polymer damage, (see Table below).
233 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
Applied load in metric tons (no damage detected) 2.45 2.65 7.0
100mm - 1/4” OD x 0.049” Alloy 825 bare line 100mm - 1/4” OD x 0.049” Alloy 625 bare line 100mm - 1/4” OD x 0.049” Alloy 825 encapsulated with Foraflon: size 15mm x 12mm
Applied load in metric tons (line partially crushed, fluid flow not interrupted) 3.5 3.8 9.0
Table 8.H - Crush Resistance Test For Encapsulated Injection Lines 8.3.8. SCSSV Hydraulic Control fluid The criteria in this section is for SCSSV control line applications only. Today hydraulic fluids are almost exclusively based on mineral oils. Other types of synthetic based oils, are employed only when operating temperatures are very low and special thermal standby properties are required. Most of the synthetic based oils used are of the flash fire resistant category as they have a very low pour floc point combined with a good performance at higher temperatures. With regard to subsea completions, the control fluid is the same fluid as used for the Xmas tree controls. table 8.i shows the main properties of the recommended oils for control line applications. 8.13 and figure 8.n below shows typical friction losses of control line fluids.
Injected fluid viscosity = 5cP
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Q injection - liters/hr
Fri c. los ses psi /10 0m
O.D = 0,25 inches
w.t.= 0,035 w.t.= 0,049 w.t.= 0,065
Figure 8.M - Fluid Friction Loss with 5cP Fluid
234 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
Injected fluid viscosity = 1cP
20 18 16 Fric. losses psi/100m 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 O.D = 0,25 inches
w.t.=0,035 w.t.=0,049 w.t.=0,065
Q injection - liters/hr
Figure 8.N - Fluid Friction Loss with 1cP Fluid The above graphs are based on the following formula:
Q x L xµ 612.95 Di 4
Pf = Friction losses (kPa) Di = Internal diameter (inches) L = Length (meters) µ = Viscosity (cP) Q = Flow rate (lt / min)
kPa X 0.145 = psi
A.I .841 -60 Table 8. if required (usually 5 micron absolute).4 163 -39 202 0.875 - 29. .Properties of Recommended SCSSV Hydraulic Oils * cSt x Density = cp **Density variation = 0.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 235 OF 295 ENI S. In order to avoid plugging of the control line while running in hole.00065 (kg/l) / °C For standard applications Agip Arnica 32 is recommended as it has better theological properties than OSO 32.3 110 -30 204 0. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Oil Name/Properties Viscosity at 40° C cSt Viscosity at 100° C cSt Viscosity index Pour Point °C Flash point °C Density at 15° kg/l Floc point °C Agip Arnica 32 (Petroleum based) Agip OSO 32 (Paraffinic based) Agip Betula S 32 (Synthetic based) 32 6.865 - 30 5.p. Agip Betula 32 should be employed only when operating temperatures are very low as in Siberia where temperatures may reach -50°C.1 98 -55 206 0.4 5. testing and running procedure must be carefully programmed and hydraulic fluid may have to be flushed through a filtration unit.
O .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 236 OF 295 ENI S. Control/Injection Line Selection Procedure Flow Chart 0 REVISION Figure 8.3.9. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 8.A.Control/Injection Line Selection Flow Chart .p.
Do not rely on data produced elsewhere or use old catalogues as changes to the nipple systems may have been made resulting in incompatibility. the choice depends on the working pressure of the string configuration AF. Data on all of these nipples can be found in the manufacturer’s current catalogue.000 psi) HF. while R and RN types are used on all higher pressures. if applicable Lock mandrel OD (LMOD).p. This must take into consideration all the diameter constraints imposed by the casing profile and completion characteristics. HR (WP between 10.000 psi) VF.000 and 15.000 psi.A. X and XN nipples are used for working pressure < 10.g. R. SCSSV or wellhead). . VR (WP > 15.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 237 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 8. WIRELINE NIPPLE SELECTION 0 REVISION The nipples required for completion purposes are based on the results of the previous design stages.000 psi). and include the following models: Selective: • Halliburton (previously Otis) X. AR (WP < 10. The aim of this section is to determine the type (selective or tapered) and configuration of the diameters in order to optimise access to the sump and prevent friction pressure drop. RN The choice of the type of nipple is subject to the working pressure which characterises the completion (e.4. Like the case in selective nipples. XN. The nipples are selected based on those most commonly used by the company. Tapered: • Baker F top no-go (AF-HF-VF) and R bottom no-go (AR-HR-VR). The principal physical characteristics of a nipple are: • • • Seal bore diameter No-go diameter.
Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 8. an approximation of 1/100ins for SB is acceptable.050ins for tubing OD < 5ins 0.A.RB > NGD + RC) then: LMOD = RA . For the lower nipples.p.RC SB = LMOD . At this stage a hypothesis of seal bore diameter of the nipple (SB) is determined by analysing the following conditions: If RB is not defined. The following physical dimensional values are required: • • Running clearance (RC) = 0.313ins = 0.050ins for tubing OD < 3.042ins for tubing OD < 3. chosen from one of the following: • • • • • 2) ID of the packer Drift of the tubing ID of the safety valve Vertical access of the wellhead Sealbore diameter (top) or no-go ID (bottom) of the upper nipple. 4) The data obtained are then used to match the nipple. . the minimum top and bottom restriction dimensions are determined by the following procedure: 1) The top restriction (RA) is the minimum upper diameter of the nipple. The bottom restriction (RB) is determined by the ID of the SCSSV tubing-retrievable.070ins otherwise. the previous conditions are re-applied.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 238 OF 295 ENI S.4.060ins for tubing OD < 5ins = 0. decreasing the NGD to adjust the calculations. is always a Baker type F and is chosen with the maximum diameter available for the size of the completion tubing below the hanger. or: RB > RA or (RA . Tapered Nipple Configuration 0 REVISION The configuration of the nipples begins at the top of the string and moves downwards towards the bottom or packer tailpipe.080ins otherwise The first nipple. To select the nipples to be as compatible as possible with the available options in the suppliers catalogues. generally in the tubing hanger.1.050ins No-go dimension (NGD) = 0.NGD 3) In other cases. The minimum values which can be reached by the NGD are: • • • 0. and the only one used.313ins 0.
i. It is a rule that if the spacing between two successive nipples is < 30m. After this it is necessary to reduce the diameter again.e. 2) The type of nipple (e. 8. there are two options: • • Produce a new nipple size Select the maximum nipple diameter from the catalogue < SB.4. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 1) In the event of achieving a good match. .050 < no-go ID(R). If there is no nipple with the characteristics required. the previous size is selected but only for a maximum of three nipples in series. the maximum diameter nipple which is compatible with the rated pressure of the Christmas tree is selected.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 239 OF 295 ENI S. F) is obtained from the previous selection. If F is chosen.p.2. the nipple is compared with the data from the catalogue.A. Selective Nipple Configuration Criteria similar to those detailed in the tapered nipple procedure are used to choose the tubing hanger nipple. it is then possible to use an R type nipple if the following conditions exist: • • The nipple in question is not required for the installation of a W/L retrievable backup SCSSV The subsequent nipple must be type F with the following characteristics: SB(F) < SB(R) LMOD(F) + 0. a tapered nipple will be used. For the subsequent nipples.g.
PERFORATING The objective of perforating a well is to establish communication between the wellbore and the formation by making holes through the casing.25%). which couples all the charges to the detonator in the firing head. 9. therefore perforation damage is an extremely important aspect. well clean-up. HMX. which has been proven to significantly help to achieve a post-perforating flow rate to effectively flush out gun debris and remove the crushed zone which surrounds every perforating tunnel. HNS or PYX is used.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 240 OF 295 ENI S. applied pressure differential or underbalance.3 and offers selectivity. The detonator is triggered by electrical heating when deployed on wireline systems or by a firing pin in mechanically or hydraulically operated firing head systems employed on tubing conveyed perforating (TCP) systems. The performance of each is available from the suppliers. The important issues for the completion engineer are the charge selection to meet with the conditions and provide the maximum perforating efficiency. The explosives for use in most shaped charges up to 300 F is RDX (cyclonite) and above this temperature and depending on time exposed to the temperature. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 9. o . gun selection.2. The detonating cord. must match the explosive selected. The advantages of perforated casing wells is already described in section 5. it is not solely down to the perforating technique but relies extensively on the planning and execution of the well completion which includes selection of the perforated interval. To optimise perforating efficiency. cement and into formation in such a manner so as not to inhibit the inflow capacity of the reservoir.A. increased perforating skin can reduce production rates. If this is not effective. One of the important aspects is the underbalance. however the perforated volume in the pay is relatively small compared to open hole (+/. PS. and perforating orientation.p.1. To this end it is necessary to obtain an adequate shot density with a sufficiently deep enough penetration to pass through the drilling damage and maximise flow through each tunnel.a). fluid selection. SHAPED CHARGE PERFORATING The principle of shaped charge perforating is available in any service providers sales and technical literature (Refer to figure 9.
GUN TYPES There are four main types of perforating guns: • • • • 9. speed and accurate positioning using CCL/Gamma Ray. variable shot densities of 1-12spf. instant shot detection. therefore no underbalance can normally be applied although in large size monobore type completions some sizes can be run similar to through-tubing guns using an underbalance.A.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 241 OF 295 ENI S. Wireline Conveyed Casing Guns Through-tubing Hollow Carrier Guns Through-tubing Strip Guns Tubing Conveyed Perforating Guns. highest temperature and pressure rating. The advantage of casing guns over the other wireline guns are. high charge performance.2. minimal debris.1.p.A. multi-phasing. Wireline Conveyed Casing Guns These types of guns are generally run in the well before installing the tubing. . low cost. minimal casing damage. high mechanical and electrical reliability.2. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 9.Perforation Process 9.
Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 9.Types of Guns .B .p.A.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 242 OF 295 ENI S.
Normally the completion is displaced to an underbalance fluid. than all other guns.4.3. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 9. they must have a safety release connection so they can be left in the well.2. Another version available. In completion operations.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 243 OF 295 ENI S. hence have o lower charge sizes and. They have a particular application for perforating through DST strings and reperforating completed wells. normally used on well tests. . Through-Tubing Hollow Carrier Guns 0 REVISION These are smaller versions of casing guns which can be run through tubing. they may be deployed and hung-off in position before installation of the completion string. therefore. underbalance perforating can possibly be adopted but only for the first shot. The charges have higher performance and are much cheaper than throughtubing carriers guns. however they also cause more debris. Alternately they can be run in long lengths for overbalance perforating before completion string installation.p. They only offer 0 or o 1 7 180 phasing with a max.A. allowing much longer lengths to be installed.2. therefore performance. Lengths of over 1.000ft are possible (and especially useful for horizontal wells) and perforating under exceedingly high drawdowns is possible with no risk to the guns being blown up the hole. run on the bottom of the completion packer or run through the tubing on coiled tubing. then the guns detonated by either: • • • • A bar dropped from surface Hydraulic pressure applied from surface then subsequently reduced to the planned underbalance pressure during a time delay.2. They also provide 0 or 180 phasing. is where a differential is applied between the annulus and the sump via porting through the test packer.2. A new version called the ‘pivot gun’ has even larger charges for deep penetration which pivot out from a vertical controlled OD to the firing position. Due to the potential of becoming stuck through strip deformation. 9. By being able to be run through the tubing. Due to the stand-off from the casing which these guns may have. of 4spf on the 2 /8” OD gun and 6spf on the 2 /8” OD gun. Subsequent runs would need the well to be flowed to cause a differential pressure. Through-Tubing Strip Guns These are semi-expendable type guns and consist of a metal strip into which the charges are mounted. they are usually fitted with decentralising/orientation devices. casing damage and have less o o mechanical and electrical reliability. Hydrostatic pressure reduction. 9. Tubing Conveyed Perforating TCP guns are a variant of the casing gun which can be run on tubing. Impact by a wireline deployed tool.
charge alignment.3. however the performance in actual use may differ due to differences in rock strength. It is necessary for engineers to obtain as much accurate data from the suppliers and use Eni-Agip historic data in order to be able to make the best choice of gun. 9.3. 9. The performances are listed in two sections I and II. penetration and flow efficiency in a Berea sandstone target at elevated temperatures and an estimated 800psi effective stress. Due to the longer exposure time because of the deployment. can be used as a qualitative comparison of charge performance. moisture contamination. which includes performance data produced by the suppliers.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 244 OF 295 ENI S. This provides under two specific tests: • • Entrance hole size and penetration length into a 5ft diameter concrete target. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 The main problems associated with TCP are: • • • • 0 REVISION Gun positioning is more difficult The sump needs to be drilled deeper to accommodate the gun length if it is dropped after firing A misfire is extremely expensive Shot detection is more unreliable. overburden stress and wellbore pressure and temperatures. gun stand-off. the thickness of casing and cement or if multiple casings are to be perforated also has an impact on the gun performance. The API tests are also unreliable as the targets have had differing strengths and porosities and there is no consistent quality control standard for production of the charges. API RP 43. GUN PERFORMANCE API And Performance Data For most completion applications. Ageing of explosives. Entrance hole. higher grade charges may also be required.p. Section II is normally used for comparisons.1. . The variations for these reasons is non-linear and depends on the type of charge.A.
ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 245 OF 295 ENI S. A shot density greater than this is required where: • • • • Vertical permeability is low.1. o Minimum 90 phasing. Underbalanced Perforating With Through-Tubing Guns If TCP costs cannot be justified and if formation perforated skin factor is acceptable.4. type of fluid. isotropic formations should be a minimum of 8spf but must exceed the frequency of shale laminations. Penetration. There is a risk of high velocities and hence turbulence.A. Shot phasing. . Debris removal. There is a risk of sand production. If perforating with through-tubing guns. if possible: • • • • TCP methods Deep penetrating charges. The use of these relatively smaller guns require contact with the casing wall. this will require multiple runs. On the first run a high overbalance can be used but on subsequent runs the only means of producing a differential is to flow the well at a rate governed not to blow the gun up the hole. This is affected by the gun weight. High Underbalanced TCP Perforating High drawdowns over 500psi for production wells require. underbalanced perforation can be carried out with through tubing systems. Shot Density Shot density in homogeneous. High shot density over 8spf. orientation at o o o 90 with 180 phased guns or in line with the contact point if 0 phased.p. A gravel pack is be conducted. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Guidelines Gravel Pack Completions 0 REVISION Due to the problem of flow restriction discussed earlier in section 2. bypass area and expected flow rate. This in conjunction with correct gravel pack procedures is essential for to prevent high skin factors. the important factors are: • • • • • Hole diameter to achieve adequate flow area. Shot density to achieve adequate flow area.
Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Penetration 0 REVISION In general. 60 is preferable.2. Gun Stand-Off Gun stand-off should be minimised for improved performance. . (Refer to the Figures below).90 . the deeper the shot the better. especially at high pressures. These guidelines should be used to select the appropriate drawdown for consolidated completions. the guns may be limited to the charge size which can physically be installed which will impact penetration. This requires that less drawdown is exerted during the well clean up. The optimum clean up period is subjective and opinions range from 1gall to 5gall per perforation. an underbalance should be used. formation fluids and must also be clean to prevent formation damage. Phasing Providing the stand-off is less than 50mm.3. As a general rule stand-off should never be more than 50mm. Underbalanced Perforating To optimise the perforating clean up. If low phase angle. The best method of clean up is to flow the well continually for several hours after perforating at normal offtake rates.A. o o o o Overbalanced Perforating If a well is to be perforated overbalanced. King et al developed a recommended minimum level of drawdown based on a number of field studies where TCP perforating had been employed. 9. If o fracturing is to be carried out then 90 and lower will help initiate fractures. 180 or less. the intention is to cause perforation enlargement to remove the crushed zone without collapsing the cavity or sanding in the guns. but at the least it should exceed the drilling damage area by 75mm. Between 15mm and 25mm in gravel packed completions. then strict control over the fluid used to ensure it is compatible with the reservoir formation. 120 . Hole Size The hole size obtained is a function of the casing grade and should be as follows: • • • Between 6mm and 12mm for natural completions. However.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 246 OF 295 ENI S. to obtain high shot density. If the smallest charges are being used then the stand-off should not be more than 25mm. Between 8mm and 12mm if fracturing is to be carried out and where ball sealers are to be used. In unconsolidated sands.p. high density shots are preferred then TCP and casing guns should be used.
A. bar drop.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 247 OF 295 ENI S. . Obviously.3. gun recovery would be very costly. it is undesirable to have a gun actuation pressure higher than the test pressure as a leak may occur while trying to trigger the guns. It is good practice to use a bar drop firing mechanism (deployed on wireline if possible as dropping the bar from surface may damage sensitive completion items) or wireline installed firing heads which can be installed after the completion is set and tested. for if there is a firing head fault. Firing Heads 0 REVISION As described earlier. . Two very important considerations are safety during installation of TCP systems and redundancy in the event of a fault occurring in the primary firing system. Redundancy This is an important aspect. There are other side-by-side systems available which provide a tubing installed pressure activated firer with a secondary receptacle for a wireline installed firer.3. etc. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 9. 9. Using wireline installed firing heads provides some redundancy in that the first head can be retrieved and a second head deployed. Wireline perforating systems are normally electrically trigger by passing an electrical signal down the cable to the guns. in TCP systems there are a wide variety including pressure operated. However. there are a number of different firing heads for various applications. wireline activated. Perforating Procedures Refer to the ‘Completion Procedures Manual. This provides full safety during gun deployment.4. Safety The use of tubing installed hydraulic actuated systems has the problem of how to conduct pressure integrity tests on the completion with sufficient margin between the gun activation pressure and the highest test pressure applied.3. Protecting the firing head from test pressure is a dangerous procedure as a plug may leak will also cause premature detonation.p.
p.C .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 248 OF 295 ENI S.D .Recommended Underbalance for Perforating Gas Zones in Stable Sandstones .Recommended Underbalance for Perforating Gas Zones in Stable Sandstones Figure 9.A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 9.
A.F .Recommended Underbalance for Perforating Shallow Unconsolidated Gas Sands Figure 9. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 9.E .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 249 OF 295 ENI S.Recommended Underbalance for Perforating Shallow Unconsolidated Oil Sands .p.
Meet with targeted high offtake rates. their applications. ARTIFICIAL LIFT The benefits and most commonly used artificial lift were described previously in section 5. e. To summarise the reasons for the installation of artificial lift are to: • • • • • Reduce the effects of declining bottom-hole pressures. such as: • • • • • • • • Casing ID Casing connection in on gas lift Size and positioning of liners Provision of a sump for rod pumpers Pre-positioning of gas lift mandrels for gas lift and ASV system Pre-installation of conduits for hydraulic pumps Parallel bore for plunger lift etc. Reservoir development optimisations studies are necessary to determine the relative technical and economic benefits of the options and the timing of the investments. Selection of the method is also based upon operating costs and workover frequency costs. liner top setting. Offset the effects of increasing water production. In some fields. low pressure wells.6. . then minimisation of the FBHP is critical to low PI. Energy can also be introduced by reservoir pressure maintenance. Overcome high friction effects of heavy viscous or waxy crudes. design considerations. both pressure maintenance and artificial lift are used which defers the installation. the artificial lift injects energy into the system.7 lists all the systems. Consideration of future artificial lift requirements must be taken during the planning stage. GLR and lack of particular experience with the system. Just as tubing size is critical to high PI wells. In simple terms.g. etc. Section 10. In other cases. Some systems are able to cope better with production problems than others which will obviously affect the choice. The selection of the most appropriate artificial lift system involves a number of factors but mainly on specific well performance. artificial lift from the outset is necessary to achieve the production and economic targets. limitations and comparisons. System life is difficult to predict as it is a function of operating conditions.p. These early decisions can save much expense later.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 250 OF 295 ENI S. The application of artificial lift simply displaces the TPC curve downwards so that a lower bottom-hole flowing pressure is achieved.A.4. Kick off high GLR wells that die when shut-in. such as casing size. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 10. ESP life can vary between days and five years depending on temperature. solids production.
This continues in sequence for all other valves until reaching the operating valve where the casing pressure will drop below the initial kick-off pressure.a). The injection gas is supplied in a closed loop system in which it is taken from the separators and then compressed. Production is determined by: • • • • reservoir pressure PI water cut gas injection rate Once the well reaches a stabilised rate. increasing GLR initially decreases the bottom-hole pressure on the TPC. or either the near optimum GLR which provides a BHFP within 20-50psi of the minimum. The lift gas is normally pumped into the annulus and into the tubing through gas lift valves installed in Side Pocket Mandrels (SPMs). Qi.A. A standing valve is sometimes necessary to prevent the gas from flowing into the formation. hence the back-pressure on the formation.b illustrates the fundamental principle of a gas lift design and operation. As the fluid gradient changes. Due to the low liquid production. In continuous gas lift.3. the injection is optimised to maximise production. Occasionally the gas is pumped into the tubing and the production taken up the annulus or in the annular space in a concentric completion. however this is limited by: • • • • available gas lift pressure the flowing tubing pressure at the intended offtake rate the depth of the packer and deepest gas lift mandrel the differential required to close the upper valves closed (+/-20psi) and to ensure that injection at the operating GLV is stable (between 50 and 500psi) figure 10.a.1.1psi/ft). As GLR requirements are subject to diminishing returns. There is an optimum GLR to produce stabilised flow for a particular tubing size and a minimum BHFP. also shown in figure 10.p. As can be seen the gas is injected down the annulus and into the tubing through the topmost valve lightening the fluid column in accordance with the total GLR curve shown. it is desirable to position the lower gas injection point as deep as possible in the well.4. GAS LIFT 0 REVISION The continuous gas lift method adds gas into the producing fluids which reduces the hydrostatic head and. the first unloading valve closes so that all the gas passes through the second valve. As described in section 2. Another less common application is Intermittent Gas Lift. the gas moves down to the next valve unloading the casing fluid and as the reaches the second valve and lightens the fluid gradient from that point. which is used to produce low volumes of liquid (<350stb/d) from wells with low BHFP (<0. most gas lift systems are based on available gas supply volumes. dried if necessary and then delivered to the well (Refer to figure 10. it must be produced in slugs by intermittently gas injection through a motorised valve. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 10.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 251 OF 295 ENI S. During this process the well BHP will drop to the point where the well will flow. .
A.p. Total GLR = Producing GLR + Injection GLR </= optimum GLR. is dependent on the IPR and attainable BHFP. q.A .Typical Gas Lift System . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 From this it is seen: • • • 0 REVISION Liquid rate. IGLR = Qi/q Figure 10.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 252 OF 295 ENI S.
As the mandrels at deeper depths become increasingly closer. SPMs have relatively large ODs and this needs to be considered in the casing design. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 10.1.1. This increased pressure. however.Example Gas lift design 10. these are not reliable and as the annuli contain quite a considerable inventory of gas. Impact On Completion Design In recent times. . All mandrel depths are taken of the design as TVDs and these must be converted to MD.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 253 OF 295 ENI S. Although gas lift valves incorporate check valves to prevent back flow. an annulus safety system is installed for platform safety. the spacing of them is much more critical.B . Modern gas lift systems usually now use SPMs with wireline GLVs to reduce servicing costs. hence gas tight or premium connections are generally selected.A. applies more pressure on the annulus casing. This may again impact on the casing design.p. much higher gas supply pressures have been used to enable deeper valves to be reached or reduce the number of mandrels and valves required.
ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 254 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 10.A. gas production up the annulus may be a significant problem. Surface equipment usually includes a three phase transformer. Versions with variable frequency drives (VFD) are available or the use of surface chokes can be used to increase the band of rate (50-190%) but incur higher capital and operating costs. They are particularly popular for high rate undersaturated oil wells. Each stage consists of a rotating impeller and stationary diffuser. . ELECTRICAL SUBMERISBLE PUMPS ESPs greatest application is in moving large volume of low GOR (<100scf/stb) fluids.2. The ESP delivery capacity will vary according to: • • • • Well IPR Reservoir pressure Surface back-pressure Electrical supply frequency figure 10. the problems are usually inefficiency through upper gas lift valve or tubing leaks. Their main limitation is gas production but improved downhole separators and procedures can now handle GORs up to 1. 10. 3.A The pump characteristics are based on constant rotational speed which is dependent on the AC supply frequency. Operationally. 10. the installation should be designed to facilitate downhole separation of free gas and vented up the annulus which is necessary when the gas volume exceeds the pump operating limit (typically +/-10% of the total fluid volume). The construction of the ESP is a multi-staged centrifugal connected through a short shaft to the downhole electric motor. Common Problems 0 REVISION The worst problem that can arise is that the pressure losses in the gas injection system and slugging have been underestimated and that the valve spacing is too far apart. On offshore installations. ESPs performance is best at stable conditions within +/-25% of the optimum rate.000scf/stb.915 at 50 Hertz. Due to these high speeds and pump construction it is obvious that sand production is very detrimental and that emulsions are easily formed. high water cut wells and water supply wells.c shows the most common types of ESP installations and the pump components. To prevent sand production it is sometimes necessary to install a gravel pack or pre-packed screen for pump protection.1.500 rpm at 60 Hertz and 2.p. motor controller and a wellhead pack-off for the cable. If possible. TDH=Ns Hs where: NS HS = = number of stages head per stage Eq. The differential pressure or total dynamic head (TDH) developed by the pump is a function of the pump flow rate which is relative to the head developed by each stage and obtainable from manufacturers publishing’s.2.
a shroud is used to draw the produced fluid down past the motor. Figure 10. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION As can be seen from the schematic.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 255 OF 295 ENI S. most pump installations are on the end of tubing and positioned above the perforations or open hole. Bottom discharge pumps are used in powered dump flood wells.p.A. If the pump has to be positioned below the interval. The motor is situated at the bottom of the assembly so that the well flow around the motor will dissipate the heat generated.Typical ESP Installations .C.
250 3.000 24. HP TDH.e. and determine the attainable pump rate with: • • a fixed IPR and various tubing sizes a fixed tubing size and various IPR options 2) In this approach the pump performance curve is often plotted below the system performance curves. ins Rate. . ESP Performance It is normal procedure to select the largest pump that will fit into the production casing (especially if this was catered for in the planning stage).000 5.000 2.000 3. Small casing or liners will obviously limit the pump size selection.900 200-5.J . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 Other less common deployment methods are: • • 0 REVISION Suspended on the cable and latched into a downhole receptacle.1.000 4. 10.375 N/A N/A 100-1. ESP sizes and capacities are shown in table 10.000-16.2. A recent development with the later is in Norway where downhole safety is satisfied by the installation of shear seal capability below the coiled tubing hanger. ins Motor OD. downhole safety systems if the well can flow naturally).000-100.000 5.000-33.000 1. An example this to optimise the number of stages for a maximum pump HP is shown in figure 10. ft 4 /2 5 /2 7 8 /8 10 /4 13 /8 3 3 5 1 1 3. stb/d Power.000 12.e.A.j below.500 5.000-12. Both of these suffer from some problems such as cable failures with the cable suspension method and well control issues with the C/T mounted method (i.375 4.437 7. This often carried out by plotting the pressure traverses above and below the pump (Refer to figure 10. On coiled tubing with the cable through the coil which is terminated with a special wellhead arrangement.d).750 8.000-5.000-12.000-10. Casing Size.625 6.000 500-3.000-12. ins Pump OD.625 11. Pre-select the maximum pump horsepower.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 256 OF 295 ENI S. or number of stages.750 4.000 5.ESP Capacity Ranges Two approaches are commonly used to evaluate an ESP system: 1) Pre-select the production target and corresponding BHFP and determine the TDH and pump size and depth required to meet this rate.000 50-125 100-300 200-650 400-850 500-1020 500-1030 5.000-26.500 Table 10.p.
Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 10.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 257 OF 295 ENI S.Example ESP Design for a Pre-selected Rate .A.p.D .
Example ESP Design for a Pre-selected HP .A.E.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 258 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 10.p.
Impact On Completion Design 0 REVISION The key to an efficient ESP design is heat removal and insulation material selection for the actual operating temperatures and environment.2. Too much free gas and no enlarged intakes stages. The clearance between the pump and the casing should be small enough that a flow velocity of a minimum of 1ft/sec is achieved. especially when temperatures are in the o region of 250 F. ESP systems are becoming evermore reliable.A. 10. If properly planned an ESP completion only requires one onsite termination. Common Problems The biggest problem with ESP completions is short running time before failure with the cost impact for re-completion. Tubing hanger and penetration systems for packers have been well developed now for fast easy installation with the testing of the connections carried beforehand in the workshop. Centralisation and crush resistant clamps should be installed across doglegs.p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 259 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 10. Inadequate system analysis leading to the system operating outside the range. The most common problems are due to: • • • • • • • • Bad installation procedures. When re-completing a ESP well the pump should be moved slightly from the original position to help minimise any casing corrosion due to eddy currents.2.3. . Also consideration must be given to the optimum tubing size and cable dimensions to ensure they can be accommodated in the casing. Centralisation of the pump is also critical. Poor voltage supply stability. Sand production.2. a shroud must be used to provide this rate. Too many frequent start ups when there is no soft start facilities. Unsuitable cable insulation material for the conditions. The pump should be set in a straight section of casing to avoid bending and the cable needs to firmly attached to the tubing for support by cable clamps (two per joint). Casing design is obviously has a large impact on the completion design or in the case of an ESP completion. In large casings. The completion design is also affected if downhole separation is required in conjunction with downhole safety. However. Scaling up of the impellers. vice versa.
In effect the piston pump is equivalent to the rod pump except that the pump drive is subsurface but can produce up to 8. however this exposes the annulus to potential corrosion so. As there is no moving parts.000ft although high surface power fluid pressures are required below 12. HYDRAULIC PUMPING SYSTEMS 0 REVISION Hydraulic pumping systems are attractive alternative to ESP systems where there is high temperatures. Their application is commonly for deviated wells between 8.p. The maximum attainable performance have been summarised in table 10. deviation or severe operating environments. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 10. However pump efficiency is low at 33-66% and large production rates can only be achieved in high rate installations. The conduits for the power fluid and returns can be the annulus with a single tubing. or restricted offtake target wells.000stb/d with 4 /2” tubing. It is also popular where there is insufficient gas for a gas lift system and is a viable alternative to rod pumps for deep (>8. To prevent cavitation.A. Pump performance is a complex function of GOR. dual tubing strings can be used either parallel or concentric. Jet Pump The jet pump uses no moving parts and imparts momentum into the fluid using the venturi effect with a jet. the pump is not as sensitive to damage and lower quality power fluids can be used and can be used in higher GOR wells up to 3.000stb/d although it is normally used to produce <2. A preliminary calculation of the pump intake or output curve can be made by hand.000stb/d although free pump systems are limited to 8. supply pressure and rate.000scf/stb. throat and diffuser.000-18.000ft) wells.k below. The downside is the requirement for two reasonably large conduits to minimise fluid pressure losses. The pumps can be installed and retrieved by wireline or pumping method using swab cups.000stb/d. pump intake pressure. The size of the these can be varied to pump volumes of 1 100-15. The two simplest and common systems are the Jet Pump and the Piston Pump which are interchangeable in most instances which provides great flexibility in coping with changeable well conditions. it is recommended to submerge the pump by at least 20% of the TDH so is better suited to respectfully productive. The annulus is sometimes required for gas venting and in this case a dual string is required. There is a large selection of pump sizes/stroke length available for a wide range of operating conditions. if this is a problem. depth. Optimisation is generally through using supplier’s computer software.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 260 OF 295 ENI S.3. . hence providing lower servicing costs. Piston Pump The piston pump is a reciprocating pump operated with a drive piston which automatically shuttles backwards and forwards exhausting the spent power fluid into the returns. There is flexibility in the system as pump rates are controlled by controlling the power fluid supply rate. maintaining a clean solids free power fluid and the high capital and operating costs.000ft.
261 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
Head Ratio 0.45 0.25 0.17 0.10
Flow Ratio 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
Table 10.K- Jet Pump Maximum Performance In table 10.k above: Head Ratio = pump output pressure − pump inlet pressure downhole power fluid pressure − pump output pressure reservoir production rate Flow Ratio = power fluid rate
Often the maximum power fluid supply pressure and rate is fixed by surface equipment rating, e.g. p<5,000psi, qPF <4,500stb/d. When calculating bottom hole pressures, the completion configuration and power fluid rate to the production to obtain the total discharge rate. The pump intake curve (PIC) can then be generated using table 10.k above plotted against well IPR (Refer to figure 10.f).
Figure 10.F- Example Jet Pump Design Curve
262 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
STAP-P-1-M-7100 Turbine Pumps 0
The hydraulic turbine pump developed by Weir Pumps is an alternative to the ESP for producing very large volumes of fluid, 2,000-100,000stb/d. It has the same principle of operation as the ESP but the motor is replaced by a hydraulic turbine which rotate the shaft at 5,000-10,000rpm. This provides higher lift capacities (head and volume) per stage, therefore the units are much shorter approximately 10% of the ESP. The operating range is much greater as the pump can be controlled by varying the supply pressure giving 10-100% rate and 20-50% TDH at reduced rates. Their reliability is still suspect due to the high rotating speed and metallurgy problems. 10.3.1. Impact On Completion Design The casing size is obviously important here to accommodate the pump size and perhaps two tubing strings. Sometimes concentric completions are preferred or the annulus is used but consideration must be given to potential corrosion due to oxygen in the power fluid. Like the piston pump solids free power fluid is essential. Like the ESP, gas venting may be necessary which would require a third conduit (generally the annulus). Occasionally the DHSV is controlled by pressure from the pump. 10.4. ROD PUMPS The most common pumping system on low rate land wells is the rod or beam pumping. It is usually limited to shallow wells (<8,000ft) producing less than 500stb/d although they can produce up to 2,000stb/d. The system consists of three elements, the downhole pump assembly, the sucker rod and the surface pumping unit. The annulus is usually left open and used to vent any free gas that is separated downhole. Tubing is used as the production conduit and contains the rods preventing wear and corrosion to the annulus. The tubing is usually anchored to the casing and pulled into tension to reduce tubing movement, buckling and, hence rod wear. There are two versions of bottom-hole pump, the tubing retrievable barrel and the rod retrievable barrel. The tubing pump requires the tubing to be pulled to retrieve the barrel and the rod pump barrel is retrieved when pulling the rods. The tubing pump has the largest capacity but is more costly to repair than the rod pump which is the most common. The pump displacement, PD, is defined by the plunger stroke, SP, and the pump speed, N, the plunger diameter, D and the amount of liquid fillage and/or slippage past the plunger, EP = 0.7 to 9.5. PD = Ct x Sp x N x D x Ep Eq. 10.B where: EP Ct = = Pump efficiency 2 Correction factor 0.1166 for oilfield units, (in, spm, in , stb/d)
263 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
Figure 10.G- Typical Rod Pumping System
264 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
As the rod suffers from stretch and dynamic forces, SP will not be the same as the stroke at surface, S, therefore load-displacement plot forms the basis for pump design and analysis. The fluid load, Fo, carried by the rods on the upstroke is dependent on the net lift, H, which is the vertical distance from the operating fluid level (OFL) in the annulus to surface plus the equivalent head of any surface back-pressure. It also depends on fluid SG or density. API recommends ignoring the area of the rods when calculating this load: Fo = Ct x SG x D x H where: Ct = 0.340 in oilfield units (SG, in , ft, lbs)
This load can be estimated from dynamometer surveys, which measure the rod load versus displacement at the surface and serves the most effective means of diagnosing pump problems. As the loads on the polished rod includes fluid load, dynamic forces and rod weight, the rod weights may be relatively large in deep wells and in these cases a tapered rod string is preferred where the rod diameter is larger with increasing load. Buoyancy varies throughout the cycle but it is generally taken on the downstroke when the travelling valve is open. Acceleration and friction are also factors in dynamic loading with the peak polished rod load on the upstroke will be significantly higher than the sum of the rod and fluid loads. Similarly, on the downstroke, the minimum will be less than the buoyant weight of the rods. Pump stroke efficiency is a function of pump speed and rod loading. The dynamics also cause the rods to oscillate harmonically like a stiff spring. Typical pumping speeds are 8 to 15spm which amounts to 4.2 to 7.9 million cycles per year, therefore the rod design must focus on minimising fatigue failures which is exacerbated by corrosion in the operating environment. The surface pump unit is usually a beam type although other concepts have been developed. The surface prime mover and gearbox have been developed over the years to cater for the rod pump to reduce failures. System design is very complex and is an iterative process normally carried out by computer software. API have produced a programme to generate a set of design curves published in API RP11L and provided some general results in Bulletins 11L3 and 11L4 which are a useful starting point for design. However, in 11L4, API used 100% efficiency and pump rates which are higher than those generally found in the field, therefore, it is advisable to enter a curve which is 100 to 200% of the intended target for scoping out the required o equipment capacity. It is also not reliable for heavy oil wells (<20 API) unless correction factors are applied for fluid vicosities and lack of rod weight on the downstroke. Rod fall problems often cut restrict pump rates to 1.5 to 2.5spm which lead the use of long stroke pumps. Sand problems are often a problem with high viscous crudes which increase wear of the pump parts.
265 OF 295
ENI S.p.A. Agip Division
STAP-P-1-M-7100 10.4.1. Impact On Completion Design 0
If free gas is expected then a packer should not be installed to allow the gas to vent up the annulus if it is planned to convert a completion to rod pump lift within a few years unless required for zonal isolation. If a well has to be pumped which is below the bubble point, it is advised to set the pump below the producing interval to aid gas separation, maximise drawdown and minimise perforation blocking by fill. If a well is fractured, the pump must be set above the perforations as frac sand can damage the pump. The casing geometry must be sufficient enough to enable the gas to percolate through the fluid column against the down-flow. 10.5. SCREW PUMP SYSTEMS Screw or progressive cavity pump is a rotary positive displacement pump consisting of a rubber stator and stainless steel rotor. The rotary drive to the downhole pump is through sucker rods from a prime mover through a gearbox. They rates of between 5 to 500stb/d, although in some circumstances capacities of 1,500stb/d is possible, on heavy oil wells or viscous emulsions where conventional rod pumps are hindered by rod fall. They have an advantage in that they can handle some sand production and less costly. The production rate is proportional to the rotary speed and are determined from manufacturers charts, generally between 50-100rpm in heavy oil and 500rpm in light oils. The selection of the material for the rubber stator is the key for operational life in the well environment. 10.6. PLUNGER LIFT Plunger lift are used on high GLR wells that produce liquids at relatively low rates (<500stb/d). The tubing/casing annulus is used to store gas energy provided to the tubing when the well is opened up. This energy is used to drive the plunger up to surface carrying a small slug of liquid. After production of the following tail gas when the liquid begins to kill the well the plunger is dropped again and the cycle repeated. It is particularly useful for de-watering gas wells. Operating requirements are: • • • GLR >500scf/stb PI <1stb/d/psi Plunger velocity 700 to 1,000ft/min
Efficiency of this system decreases with depth and PI but increases with tubing size. It is essential that the completion tubing is parallel and drifted to ensure correct operation of the plunger.
Typical Screw Pump Installation .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 266 OF 295 ENI S.A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 10.p.H.
p.I .A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Figure 10.Typical Plunger Lift Installation .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 267 OF 295 ENI S.
Low increase with depth and larger rates. Requires computer design programme for sizing. Labour intensive to keep time tuned otherwise poor performance. Reported system efficiency 5070%. Long service life and simple repair procedures.A. No input energy required because it uses the well. Excellent for flowing wells. Typically total system efficiency is about 50% for high rate well but for <1. can alter stroke speed. Continuous Gas Lift Low well equipment costs but lines and compression costs may be high. Requires a highly reliable electric power system. Intermittent Gas Lift Same as continuous flow gas lift. Free pump and choose powerful option. Fair increases for wells that require small injection GLRs. Can vary power fluid rate and pressure adjusts the production rate and lift capacity. field knowledge and experience are limited. etc. More tolerant of power fluid solids. VSD provides more flexibility but added costs. Design Considerations And Comparisons Consideration Rod Pumping Screw Pumping ESP Hydraulic Piston Pumping Varies but often competitive with rod pumps. Proper design plus good operating practices essential. Excellent. efficiency typically is 40%. Good for low volume wells. can alter speed. Plunger hangup or sticking may be a major problem. Hydraulic unit provides additional flexibility but at added cost. Efficiency (output hydraulic HP divided by input HP) Excellent. Typically operating efficiencies of 10-20%. Data bank of rod and pump failures beneficial. Good even when small supplementary gas is added. Selection of throat and nozzle sizes extend range of volume and capacity. Power water (fresh. Good valve design and spacing essential. must adjust injection time and cycles frequently. not as good as rod pumping owing to GLR. Hydraulic Jet Pumping Competitive with rod pump. Need 15ppm of 15µm particle size max.000 BID.000 BFPD.p. maintaining steady gas show often causes injection gas measurement and operating problems. Gas injection rate varied to change rates. Some problems with sticking plungers. Numerous pump sizes and pump/engine ratios adapt to production and depth needs. Because this a newer method. Must size pump properly. Pumps usually run at a fixed speed. Very low. Must add surfactant to a water power fluid for lubrication. May have problems with selection of appropriate stator elastomer. Time cycling normally avoided. SUMMARY ARTIFICIAL LIFT SELECTION CHARTS 0 REVISION 10. Full pump fillage efficiency typically about 50-60% feasible if well is not over-pumped. friction and pump wear. Poor. normally requires a high injection gas volume/bbl fluid. Requires careful sizing.7. Typical efficiencies at 20% but range from 5-30%. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 10. central systems reduce cost per well but is more complicated. Cost increases with higher horsepower. 200ppm of 25µm particle size acceptable. Fair to good.1. Operating practices have to be tailored to each well for optimisation.Design Considerations and Overall Comparisons (pg1) . operating and repair practices needed rods and pump. Good. Plunger Lift Capital Cost Low to moderate increase with depth and larger units. Low wells for wells requiring high GLRs. seats. Anti-pollution stuffing boxes are available. Requires proper cable in addition to motor. Moderate cost for well equipment (valves and mandrels). Dilutents may be added if required. Unload to bottom with gas lift valves. Miscellaneous problems Stuffing box leakage may be messy and a potential hazard. Can adjust ingestion time and frequency. Method sensitive to rate changes. A highly reliable compressor with 95+% run time required. Power fluid solids control essential. Good selection. tolerant to moderate solids in power fluid. requires powerful conductor.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 268 OF 295 ENI S. to avoid excessive engine wear. Heavily influenced by power fluid plus production gradient. Efficiencies range from 3040% with GLR >100. Good to excellent. Good design and operating practices needed. Central compression system reduces cost per well. Good to excellent. Maximum efficiency only 30%. pumps. length. Costs increase as horsepower rises. only low cost well equipment if no compressor required. Tubing needs to be sized correctly. Power fluid rate and speed of downhole pump. No moving parts in pump. Good design plus good operating practices essential. Fair. Poor. Typical lift efficiency is 1050% improved with plungers. plunger size and run time to control production rate. Multiple well. May have limited service in some areas. Choice of wireline retrievable or conventional valves. Consider chamber or high PI and low BHP wells. Fair to poor. More operating data needed. produced or seawater) acceptable. Table 10. May be higher with lower GLR. Excellent total system efficiency. May exceed rod pumps for ideal cases. Downhole Equipment Reasonably good rod design and operating practices needed. Good for high rate wells but decreases significantly for <1.7. Triplex plunger leakage control required. Flexibility Excellent. Gas must be dehydrated properly to avoid gas freezing. Relatively low capital cost if commercial electric power available.L .
Used on about 10% of US lifted wells. Each well needs an individual system.p. Very sensitive to operating temperatures and electrical malfunctions. Requires adjusting and plunger maintenance.A. high pressure.Design Considerations and Overall Comparisons (Pg2) . Varies. wax asphaltenes. Run time efficiency >95% if good operating practices are adopted and corrosion. mostly offshore. Typically each well is an individual producer using a common electric system. System not forgiving. Basic operating procedures needed for downhole pump and wellsite unit. Used on <1% of US lifted wells. install and operate. high volume. Table 10. Potentially low but short run life on stator or rotor frequently reported. Intermittent Gas Lift Same as continuous flow gas lift. deviations. API specifications and design/operatin g recommended practices should be followed. install and operates following API specifications and recommended practices. high GOR and significant sand production. usually results in test and treatment problems. procedures to design. Varies. typically used. Same as continuous flow gas lift. Plunger Lift Operating Costs Very low for shallow to medium depth (<7. Simple manual or computer design. solids.. Free pump easily retrieved for servicing. GOR try higher volume wells requiring flexible operation. Excellent if there is an adequate supply of ingestion gas and adequate low pressure storage volume for injection gas. Downhole jet often requires trial and error to arrive at best/optimum jet. Requires excellent operating practices. Short run life increases total operating costs. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Consideration Rod Pumping Screw Pumping ESP Hydraulic Piston Pumping Often higher than rod pump even for free systems. System will tolerate wide depth ranges. Individual well unit very flexible but extra cost. Some trade in value. Also a default for low bottom-hole pressure wells on continuous gas lift. Frequent downtime results from operational problems. high GLR lift method. Sometimes used to test wells that will not flow offshore. Ample gas volume and/or pressure needed for successful operation. Reliability Excellent. Same as continuous flow gas lift. high rate artificial lift system for wells with high bottom-hole pressures. System approach needed. energy costs are high. wide rate range suitable for relatively deep.000BFPD rates. Good if well production is stable. Used on <1% of US lifted wells. Free pump easily retrieved for onsite repair or replacement.400BFPD). Compression costs vary on fuel cost and compressor maintenance. Limited to relatively shallow wells with low rates. Good. Continuous Gas Lift Well costs low. Flexible operation. testing and operation. related to pump intake pressure.000psig. Usage/ Outlook Excellent.M . Best suited for <200oF and >1. Salvage Value Excellent. Easily moved and some current market for used equipment Fair. Used on <2% of US lifted wells. Good data needed for valve design and spacing. poor for problem areas. if HP is high. Follow API recommended practices in design. Individual well or system. Some trade in value. Fair market for triplex pumps. Simple to design. etc. Used on <1% of US lifted wells. Good. high temperatures. Good with proper throat and nose sizing for the operating conditions. More problems if pressures >4. Computer programme typically used for design. Essentially a low liquid rate. Can be used for extending flow life or improving efficiency. Fairly simple to design but requires good rate data. Used primarily on gas well dewatering.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 269 OF 295 ENI S. good value for wellsite system that crane can move easily. Other repair costs are high. An excellent high rate artificial lift system. Easily moved. Excellent if compression system is properly designed and maintained. Problems or changing well conditions reduce downhole pump reliability. corrosive fluids. Often used as a default artificial lift method in lieu of sucker rod pumps. Used on about 85% of US artificial lift wells. System (total) Straightforward and basic. Fair market for triplex pump. Fair. System must be designed for the unstable gas flow rates. Simple to install and operate. Good with a correctly designed and operated system. The normal standard artificial lift method. High pulling costs result from short run life. Excellent for ideal gas lift cases. Must avoid operating in cavitation range of jet pump throat. Some trade in value. Requires attention. Normally over-pumping and lack of experience decreases run time. Most like a flowing well. easily moved and good market for used equipment. Poor open market values. are controlled. Central plant more complex. Good. high temperature deviated oil wells. Poor open market value. installation and operating specifications Each well needs an individual system. Fair to poor.5% of US lifted wells.500ft) and locations with low production (. Key is to inject as deeply as possible with optimum GLR. Fair. Used on less than 0. Limited proven design. dry non-corrosive and clean gas supply source is needed throughout the entire life. Some market for good used compressors and some trade in value for mandrels and valves. Often used as a default artificial lift system. Hydraulic Jet Pumping High cost owing to HP requirement. Usually very low. Most often used on high water cut wells. flexible. Low pump maintenance cost typical with properly sized throat and nose. An adequate volume. Low back-pressure beneficial.
5ins tubing needed. high lift head pumps operating at depths to 17. Practical depth of 20. Good with the surface prime mover causing the only noise.000ft. Effectively about 500stb/d at 7.000ft well may be >1. Usually limited by fallback. engines. PIP >250psi for 10. Fair but complicated by standing valve and fallback. Good but depends on good well test and pressure charts. Optimisation and computer control being tried. Noise Level Fair.5ins) may limit free gas separation.2. Small casing (4. Good. Typically for 1. Same as piston pump. Reduced performance inside 5.000stb/d use >7ins casing and >3. Avoid 4. Small casing suitable for this low volume lift. Excellent. if little free gas (i.000ft. Poor. both engines or motors can be used easily. both engines or motors can be used. Safety precautions must be taken for high pressure gas lines. Good to excellent. None normally required. Poor to fair. Excellent with low noise.5ins nominal tubing. REVISION 0 Intermittent Gas Lift Small casing (4. Wellsite power fluid units can be sound proofed.5 and 5. Table 10.5ins casing. Good to fair.000ft injected depth. similar limits as reciprocating pump. 1. Excellent. turbines or motors can be used for compression. Bottom-hole pressure obtained with free pumps. speed and producing rate. Typically about 50 to 100psig. Fair. few wells >10.000ft. <100psi provided adequate displacement and gas venting.440psi lift system and lift system and 1. Fair when used without chambers. rods of structure may limit rate at depth. high GLR wells.000psig. Low at well but noisy at compressor. Good. Good when used with chamber. Poor if must handle >5% free gas. Low.5ins) mat result in excessive friction losses and limits production rate.p. Good low profile but must provide for compressor. possibly 5. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 10. Motors are more reliable and flexible. gas or diesel fired engines or motors.5 and 5. Fair to good wellhead equipment has low profile. has an injection depth of about 10.A. Good. Excellent.. Free gas reduces efficiency and service life. moderately high for urban areas.e.000ft. >350psig to 5. Small casing size (4. Prime mover flexibility Good. fluid levels. Low. Often preferred in urban areas if production rate is high. Intake pressure <100psig usually results in frequent pump repairs. Good low profile surface equipment. requires a good power source without spikes or interruptions. limited to relatively shallow depths. Requires surface treating and high pressure pumping equipment. Good low well noise. analysis can be based on production and fluid levels only. Special low profile units are available. Same as piston pump. >250psi pump intake pressure).000stb/d. Casing size will limit use of large motor and pumps. <25psig feasible provided adequate displacement and gas venting. Plunger Lift Casing size limits (restricts tubing size) Problems only in high rate wells requiring large plunger pumps.000psi) or HP. Analysis improved by use of dynamometers and computers. Prime mover can be electric motor.000ft for low rate.N .5 and 5. bottomhole pressures <150psi at 10.Operating Conditions Summary . Larger casing may be required if dual strings run.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 270 OF 295 ENI S. Usually limited to motor HP or temperature.000ft.5ins) normally is not a problem for this relatively low volume lift.000ft with low GLR. Thus the backpressure on 10. limited by power fluid pressure (5. Normally no problem for 4. Bottomhole pressure and production log surveys easily obtained.5ins casing and larger but gas separation may be limited.500ft and 150stb/d at 15. Good low profile but requires transformer bank. Same as piston pump.000ft Hydraulic Jet Pumping Small casing size often limits producing rate owing to high (unacceptable) friction losses.000ft.5ins casing with 2ins nominal tubing normally limits rates to <1. etc. Fair but not as good as rod pumping. Fair.000 GLR. Practical depth about 10. Higher voltages can reduce I2R losses Fair based on electrical checks but special equipment needed otherwise. Typically <10. Same as continuous flow. Same as piston pump. PIP of <250psi feasible at 10.5ins casing depending on depth and rate.000ft.000ft well. Transformer may cause problems in urban areas. Continuous Gas Lift The use of 4.5 and 5. Same as continuous flow.7. Downhole pump performance can be analysed from surface power fluid rate and pressure. For rates >5. Depth limits Good. Poor restricted by the gradient of the gas lifted fluid.000stb/d with 2. Annulus must have adequate gas storage volume. Excellent. Can be analysed easily. Not possible to use dynamometers and pump-off cards. can be easily analysed based on well test. Same as continuous flow. Intake Capability Excellent. Controlled by system injection pressure and fluid rates. Obtrusiveness Size and operation are drawbacks in populated and farming areas. Good. Typical design targets 25% submergence. Operating Conditions Summary Consideration Rod Pumping Screw Pumping ESP Hydraulic Piston Pumping Larger casing required for parallel free or closed systems. Surveillance Fair. Low volume.000ft. Typically moderate rate is limited to about 100psi/1.
Poor. Good. Three stage production tests can be conducted by adjusting production step rates. Labour intensive Plunger Lift Testing Good. same as rod pumping.p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 271 OF 295 ENI S. Continuous Gas Lift Fair. Soft start and improved seals and protectors recommended. Hydraulic Jet Pumping Same as piston pump. Avoid shutdown in high viscosity/sand producers. High water cut and high rate wells may require a free water knock-out. Does not appear applicable owing to intake pressure requirement higher than pump-off. Poor. Well testing is simple with few problems using standard available equipment and procedures. Poor. Good.A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Consideration Rod Pumping Screw Pumping ESP Hydraulic Piston Pumping Fair. Table 10. Well testing is simple with few problems. Well testing is simple with few problems. Measurement of both input and outflow gas is a problem. A pressure recorder must be used to monitor intake pressures. Well testing complicated by injection gas volume/rate. Cycle must be periodically adjusted. Good.O . Not applicable. Formation GLR obtained by subtracting injected gas from total produced gas. Intermittent Gas Lift Poor.. is possible but not normally used. Well testing complicated by injection gas volume/rate. Pumpoff control not developed.Operating Conditions Summary (Pg2) . Well testing with a central system is more complex requiring accurate power fluid measurement. Poor. Time cycle and pump-off controller’s application Excellent if well can be pumpedoff. Intermittent flow can cause operating problems with separators. Gas measurement errors are common. Not applicable. Well testing with standard individual well units presents few problems. Usually controlled only by displacement checks.
Few wireline problems up to 70o deviation for wireline retrievable valves. Must design for unit size. Table 10. Increased mechanical problems. Excellent. Fair to good. Fair. Excellent and is the most common method if adequate injection gas available. Same as continuous flow gas lift. Good to fair. Circulate heat to downhole pump to minimise build-up. Hydraulic Jet Pumping Good to excellent. Water power fluid can be used. Excellent. Free gas reduces efficiency but helps lift. Good. Use of standing valves risky. Limited experience in horizontal wells. Excellent if tubing can be run in the well. Same as continuous flow. Parallel 2x2ins low rate dual feasible inside 7ins casing. Possible to unseat pump and circulate hot fluids. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 10. Soluble plugs available. Inhibitor in the injection gas and/or batch inhibiting down tubing feasible. Hot water/oil treating and/or use of scrapers possible but they increase operating problems and costs. Feasible operation in highly deviated wells. High angle deviated holes (>70o) and horizontal wells are being produced.7. Feasible operation in horizontal wells. May have some special application offshore. Rod scrapers not used. weight and pulling unit space. Dual application No known installations. Fair. Free pumps can be surfaced on a schedule. Limited to low GLRs and moderate rates. Some success in pumping 15o/100ft using rod guides. Good. Power oil a fire and safety problem. Excellent for correct application. Mechanical cutting and inhibition possible. mechanical cutting. Good to excellent. Normal production cycle must be interrupted to batch treat the well. Excellent. Poor in wells needing sand control. Possible running and pulling problems. batch inhibition possible. Injection gas may aggravate existing problem. Offshore application Poor.3. Dual inside 5ins casing currently not in favour. Currently very few known installations. Artificial Lift Considerations Consideration Rod Pumping Screw Pumping ESP Hydraulic Piston Pumping Good to excellent. Same condition as hydraulic piston pump. frequently for both corrosion and scale control. Must provide electrical power and service pulling unit. Same as continuous flow. Free pump retrieved without pulling tubing. Hot water/oil treatments. No none installations. Produced gas reduces need for injection gas.Artificial Lift Considerations (Pg1) . Same as continuous flow Excellent. Fair. Poor to fair.p. No known installations. Steps must be taken to avoid corrosion in injection gas lines. Fair. Similar to piston pump.. Batch treatment inhibitor used down annulus feasible. Requires deck space for treatment tanks and pumps. Poor for free gas >5% through pump. Dual gas lift is common but good operating of dual lift is complicated and inefficient resulting in reduced rates. Batch inhibition treatment only to intake unless shroud is used. Most wells are deviated and typically produce sand. Heading causes operating problems. Fair. Batch or continuous inhibition treatment can be circulated with power fluid for effective control. Poor. Fair. Plunger Lift Corrosion/ scale handling ability Good to excellent. Vent free gas if possible. Casing free pump limited to low GLRs. Same as piston pump except it can possibly handle higher GLRs but at reduced efficiency. Same as piston pump. Tubing may require treatment. however a pulling unit is needed. Paraffin handling capacity Fair to good. increased load and wear problems.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 272 OF 295 ENI S. Crooked/ deviated holes Fair. Increased load and wear problems.A. Good mechanical cutting sometimes required. REVISION 0 Intermittent Gas Lift Same as continuous flow. Poor if it must pump any free gas. Good. Gas is a problem for lower zone. Parallel 2x2ins nominal tubing inside 7ins casing and 3x3ins tubing inside 95/8ins casing feasible. Fair. short pump can pass through doglegs up to 24o/100ft in 2ins nominal tubing. Few problems. Excellent. Pump will normally pass through the tubing. Batch treat down annulus is feasible. Requires long radius wellbore bends to get through. Good. Produced water or seawater may be used as a power fluid with wellsite type system or power fluid separation before production treating system. Rotary gas separators helpful if solids not produced. Gas handling ability Good if can vent and use natural gas anchor with properly designed pump. Continuous Gas Lift Good. Poor if must pump >50% free gas. Inhibitor mixed with power fluid mixes with produced fluids at entry of jet pump throat. Larger casing would be needed. Excellent as it cuts paraffin and removes small deposits. Concentric fixed pump or parallel free permits gas venting with suitable downhole gas separator below pump intake.P . Three string nonvented applications have been achieved with complete isolation of production and power fluid from each zone. Use a gas anchor.
Excellent. Excellent. Limited by heading and slippage.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 273 OF 295 ENI S.000ft and 1. Excellent up to 50% sand with high viscosity >200cP crude. Use fresh water injection for salt build-up formations. Increases HP and reduces head. Good. In 5. Fair to good.1% sand with special pumps. low GORs and shallow depths but no known installations. Most commonly used method for wells producing <100stb/d. Limited by cycle volume and number of possible injection cycles. >75stb/d from 12. however it wipes tubing clean. Excellent. Sand can stick plunger. Typically about 200stb/d from 10.000stb/d from 2.000ft possible. Typically lower limit is 200stb/d for 2ins tubing without heading.000ft.000ft and 1. Restricted to relatively small rates. Need to know temperatures to design bellows charged valves. rate about 4.A. At present normally below 250oF.000ft. Same as continuous flow. Same as continuous flow. Improved performance for high viscosity >200cP cases. Avoid unstable flow range.000ft and 200stb/d from 5. Generally poor.500psi system. Not as good as rod pumping. Excellent for high water cut lift even with high viscosity oil. Low volume lift capabilities Excellent. Possibly 200stb/d from 10.440psi injection gas and GLR of 1.5ins tubing. tubular size and HP.5ins and 700stb/d for 3. Typically 0. Jet pumps are operating with 3% sand in produced fluids. Lower efficiency and high operating costs for <400stb/d. Good.000stb/d from 1. Limit is inflow and surface problems. Tandem motors can be used but will increase costs. Potential solution is to use ‘core flow’ with 20% water. Poor to fair for low viscosity <10cP production. No known installations.000. High volume lift capacity Poor. Depending on reservoir pressure and PI with 4ins nominal tubing.000stb/d with adequate flowing bottomhole pressure. Poor. Limited to about <250oF for standard and <325oF with special motors and cables. May be able to handle up to 0. Typically a maximum of about 350oF. Good.000ft with <250psi pump intake pressure.5ins nominal tubing.000stb/d from 10.Q .50cP viscosity or water power fluid reduces friction losses. >200stb/d from 4. Possibly 2. Poor. Hydraulic Jet Pumping Same as piston pump. Good to excellent. Table 10.000stb/d from 4. Excellent for <100stb/d shallow wells that do not pump-off. Limited by efficiency and economic limit. Excellent. Decreases to <10% sand for water producers.000ft. Up to 15. Intermittent Gas Lift Same as continuous flow. Typically are used with 1.Artificial Lift Considerations (Pg2) . Requires <200ppm solids. Typically 100 to 300stb/d from 4.5ins casing can produce 4. Production with up to 800cP possible. Similar to casing lift but must have adequate formation gas.000stb/d from 5. High viscosity fluid handling capability Good for <200cP fluids and low rates 400stb/d.1% sand for inflow and outflow problems. Restricted by tubing size and injection gas rate and depth.000ft with 240 HP.p. Temperature limitation Excellent and currently used in thermal operations. Power fluid to jet pump can tolerate 200ppm of 25µm particle size. Fair but restricted to shallow depths using large plungers . Fair but limited by stator elastomer.000ft.000ft with 3. Excellent for high viscosity fluids with no stator/rotor problems.5 to 4stb/cycle with up to 48 cycles/d Excellent for low flow rates of 1 to 2stb/d with high GLRs. Fair. Requires <10ppm solids power fluid for good run life. Fair.000ft. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Consideration Rod Pumping Screw Pumping ESP Hydraulic Piston Pumping Possible but may have high friction losses or gas problems. Fair. Excellent and possible to operate to 500oF with special materials. Plunger Lift Slim-hole completions (27/8ins production casing string) Feasible for low rates <100stb/d and low GOR <250. Excellent. or below 20cP viscosity.000ft feasible with 1. Excellent. Fair. rates of 5. Continuous Gas Lift Feasible but can be troublesome and inefficient. Power oil of oil >24o API and .000stb/d from 4. limited to about 200cP. Solids/sand handling ability Poor. Excellent. 550oF. Typically 3. Fresh water treatment for salt formations. Improved wear resistant materials available at premium cost. Also produced fluids must have low solids <200ppm of 15µm particles for reasonable life. Same as continuous flow Normally not applicable. Poor. 400stb/d for 2.000stb/d from 10. Fair. Feasible if low rates. max. limited by needed HP and can be restricted by casing size. Rod fall problems for high rates. Power fluid can be used to dilute low gravity production. Typical limit is 0. Standard materials up to 300oF+ and to 500oF+ feasible with special materials. Limited by tubular and HP. Higher rates may required dilutent to lower viscosity. Limited by number of cycles. Fair but standing valve may cause problems. Suitable for low rates and low GLRs.000 to 10. Good in >8o API production with <500cP possible. Few problems for >16 o API.
some completion types such as High Rate liners using a liner PBR may be some considerable distance from the formation.e. BARRIER PRINCIPLES Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates has determined that a packer fluid. does not require the presence of an overbalance fluid. i. This policy does not refer to gradients below 1. the tubulars (tubing and casing) and packer system and. A hydrostatic overbalance fluid can only be considered a barrier on a long term basis if it is fully maintained.e.2. Over and above this.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 274 OF 295 ENI S. The re-use of the completion fluid is envisaged when it is opportune or cost effective. however tubing leaks and deterioration of the fluid cannot be guaranteed. The use of non-kill weight packer fluid has been thoroughly evaluated and is permitted for the wells which have pressure gradients above 1. high pressure and high temperature (HP/HT) wells. APPLICATION The use of non-kill weight packer fluid will be considered in the following situations: • • • When a brine with a gradient lower than the formation gradient has already been used as completion fluid. This being the case. through tubing perforation after packer setting. it should not be classified as a barrier.30kg/Lt/10m where it is still considered good practice to use overbalance completion fluids. i. 11. USE OF UNDERBALANCE COMPLETION FLUIDS POLICY The purpose of this section is to provide the basic criteria when ‘non-kill weight packer fluids’ can be used in completion design. 11.1. cannot be considered as a barrier. therefore is not a practical barrier.e. When it is necessary to replace a completion fluid containing solids in suspension. i. therefore. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION 11. high density oil mud.p.30kg/Lt/10m.A. regardless of the density.3. with regard to double barrier protection is mechanically obtained by means of the wellhead. . • • 11. The main reasons are: • The integrity of the annulus.
p. 11. in order to identify and evaluate the operative risks associated with downhole equipment functionality. Completions Similar to above. a risk assessment should be carried out to ensure. However. the casing design must be able to withstand full well pressure in conjunction with the completion fluid hydrostatic pressure at respective depth.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 275 OF 295 ENI S. that the completion design will keep the formation pressure off the production casing. The worst possible case being immediately above the packer. .4.2.1. if an underbalance completion fluid is to be used. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 11. a risk analysis evaluation (HAZOP) must be carried out by the District Drilling & Completion Engineering Department.4.4. as contingency against a tubing/packer envelope leak.A. Well Testing For exploration wells. RISK ASSESSMENT 0 REVISION 11. prior to commencing a well test using non-kill weight packer fluid.
workover and well testing operations are available and must be filled in and returned to head office for distribution to the relevant responsible departments as soon as possible as per instructions. completion. Feed-back reports for drilling.REPORT FORMS To enable the contents of this completion manual and other operating procedures manuals to be improved. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION APPENDIX A . .p. To this end a feed-back reporting system is in use which satisfies this requirement.A.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 276 OF 295 ENI S. As the first section is generic to all the forms it is only shown in ARPO 01 instructions. it is essential that ENI . The forms relevant to completion operations are: • • • • • • • • • • ARPO 01 ARPO 02 ARPO 06 ARPO 07 ARPO 08 ARPO 09 ARPO 11 ARPO 12 ARPO 13 ARPO 20 Initial Activity Report Daily Report Waste Disposal Management Report Perforating Report Gravel Pack Report Matrix Stimulation/Hydraulic fracturing Report Wireline Report Pressure/Temperature Survey Report Well Problem Report Well Situation Report Behind each report form are instructions on how to fill in the forms.Agip Division and Affiliates obtain feed-back from the field.
p. & C. INITIAL ACTIVITY REPORT (ARPO 01) 0 REVISION District/Affiliate Company DATE: Permit/Concession N° General Data On shore Latitude: Longitude Reference Rig Name Rig Type Contractor Rig Heading [°] Offset FROM the proposed location Distance [m] Direction [°] Off shore INITIAL ACTIVITY REPORT ARPO 01 Well Code Depth Above S.[m] First Flange[m] Top housing [m] Reference Rig Ref. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 A. Fluids Cementation Waste treatment Operating Time Moving Positioning Anchorage Rig-up Delay Lost-time Accidents Company Contract N° Type of Service Company Contract N° Jack-up leg Penetration [gg:hh] [hh:min] [hh:min] [hh:min] [hh:min] [hh:min] Rig Anchorage Leg N° Air gap [m] Penetration [m] N° Supply Vessel for Positioning Name Horse Power Bollard pull [t] Anchor Bow N° 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Note: Angle Type & Manufacturer Weight [t] Mooring Line Length Cable [m] Chain [m] Piggy Back Weight N° [t] Length [m] Mooring Line Chain Ø [mm] Cable Length [m] Ø [mm] Tension Operative [Tested] [t] Tension [t] Total Time [hh:min] Supervisor Superintendent .1st Flange Cellar Pit Depth [m] Length [m] Width [m]: Manufacturer Type Liner avaible [in] Major Contractors WELL NAME FIELD NAME Cost center Joint venture AGIP: % % % Type of Operation % % % Program TD (Measured) Program TD (Vertical) Rig Pump [m] [m] Type of Service Mud Logging D.L .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 277 OF 295 ENI S. Rig RKB .1. Ground Level[m] Water Depth [m] Rotary Table Elev.A.
D. vel.L Partial Progr. ClSalt pH/ES MBT Solid Oil/water Ratio.B.P. Code OPERATION DESCRIPTION Operation at 07:00 Mud type Density Viscosity P.[t] Flow Rate Pressure Ann. Supervisor: .P. Losses [kg/l] [s/l] [cP] [g/100cm2] / [cc/30"] [cc/30"] [kg/cm2] [°C] [g/l] [g/l] [kg/m3] [%] [%] Bit Data Manuf.IFT [kg/l] 1 2 at m at m 3 Last casing Next Casing RT Elevation Ground Lelel / Water Depth RT . [psi] Lithology Shows From (hr) To (hr) Op.M.[in] Top [m] Bottom [m] Top of Cmt [m] Last Survey [°] LOT . L Progr. [psi] Reduce Pump Strockes Pressure Pump N° Liner [in] Strokes Press.V. Gel 10"/10' Water Loss HP/HT Press. Temp. DAILY REPORT (ARPO 02) 0 REVISION DAILY REPORT Drilling District/Affiliate Company DATE: Rig Name Type of Rig Contractor Well Ø nom. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 A. Type Serial No. Hrs. hours Ø Description Part. hrs Back reaming Hrs Personnel Agip Rig Others Total Agip Rig Other Total [m] [m] [m] [hh:mm] [m / h] [hh:mm] [hh:mm] Injured of w.D.2.p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 278 OF 295 ENI S. R.1st flange / Top Housing BOP Stack Diverter Annular Annular Upper Rams Middle Rams Middle Rams Middle Rams Lower Rams Last Test Type Ø ARPO 02 [m] [m] [m] WELL NAME FIELD NAME Cost center Well Code Report N° Permit / Concession N° M. IADC Diam.O.p. HHP Bit HSI I [m 3] [m 3] B N° Run N° N° Run N° Bottom Hole Assembly N° __________ Rot. Sand pm/pom pf mf Daily Losses Progr. Stock Quantity UM Supply vessel Total Cost O G D O L R I B O G D O L R Daily Progr.V. Progressive Rot. Y.P. Nozzle/TFA From [m] To [m] Drilled [m] Rot.O. W. Jet vel. (24:00) Total Drilled Rotating Hrs R.A. (24:00) T.
A.3. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 A.concentration (g/l ) Cumulative [m ] Recycled Total 3 Fresh water [m ] Phase Cumulative Service Mud Company Waste Disposal Transportation 3 Recycled [m ] Company Contract N° 3 Remarks Remarks Supervisor Superintendent . WASTE DISPOSAL MANAGEMENT REPORT (ARPO 06) 0 REVISION WASTE DISPOSAL Management Report District/Affiliate Company DATE: Report N° From [m] To [m] Phase size [in] Water consumption Usage Mixing Mud Others Total Readings / Truck Mud Volume [m ] Mixed Lost Dumped Transported IN Trans orted OUT Waste Disposal Water base cuttings Oil base cuttings Dried Water base cuttings Dried oil base cuttings Water base mud Oil base mud transported IN Oil base mud transported OUT Drill potable water Dehidrated water base mud Dehidrated oil base mud Sewage water Transported Brine Period [t] [t] [t] [t] [t] [t] [t] [t] [t] [t] [t] [t] Cumulative 3 WELL NAME FIELD NAME ARPO-06 Cost center Depth (m) Interval Drilled (m) 3 Drilled Volume [m ] Cumulative volume [m ] Phase /Period [m ] Fresh water Recycled Total Fresh water 3 3 Mud Type Density (kg/l) Cl.p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 279 OF 295 ENI S.
V.p. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 A.F 2 Completion fluid Fluid in front of Perforation Fluid Losses after Perforation Measured Depth Top [m] Bottom [m] Vertical Depth Top [m] Density Density [kg/l] [kg/l] [m3] Pool Remarks Bottom [m] Note: Supervisor Superintendent .A.P.D.3. PERFORATING REPORT (ARPO 07) 0 REVISION District/Affiliate Company DATE: Well location Onshore Offshore Total Depth Well Type Vertical Deviated Horizontal Well Situation Liner Casing Casing Tubing Packer Tubing shoe Size [Ø] M.D. inclination at Formation name: Lithology PERFORATING REPORT ARPO-07 WELL NAME FIELD NAME Cost center Pool: [m] Rotary Table Measurement [m] Drilling Rig RKB .1 Flange [°] [m] Workover Rig RKB .V.D.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 280 OF 295 ENI S. [m] Steel Grade Service Company Perforation System Wireline TCP Thru Tubing Data Gun Type Overbalance Underbalance Differential Pressure [kg/cm ] Gun Specific. T. [m] T.Sea Bottom Thickness [lb/ft] Measured Depth Top [m] Bottom [m] st st Final Completion Report [date] Final Workover Report [date] Reference Logs: Recorded on: Vertical Depth Top [m] Bottom [m] Cement Top M. Max. Gun Ø Charge Type S.Sea Level Workover Rig RKB .1 Flange Workover Rig RKB .D.
GRAVEL PACK REPORT (ARPO 08) 0 REVISION Cannot Load File form supplied Eni-Agip Excel .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 281 OF 295 ENI S.4. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 A.A.p.
09 WELL NAME FIELD NAME Cost center Interval to be Treated Tot. net perf. [m] Top liner [m] Reservoir Parameters Reservoir fluid Density [Kg/l] 2 Gradient [Kg/cm /10 m. [psi] Final Press. Starting Time Pumping Rate [bbl/1'] [m ] 3 Fluid Type Fluid Schedule Fluid Composition Density [kg/l] Mixed Volume [m3 ] Volume Progr. [psi] Notes Notes / Remarks: Supervisor Superintendent . [m] T.Vol.D.: Formation name: Pool: Lithology: Completion Data Bottom hole gauge [Y / N] Type Wellhead type Packer type Packer fluid Density Fluid in well at operation beginning String O.] Fracturing gradient [calculated] Fracturing gradient [tested] Porosity % SBHT [°C] 2 SBHP [kg/cm ] at m at m Open hole Perfor. Proppant Initial Entering in Formation Concentr.D. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Injected Circulated N° Fluid Ref. [in] String capacity [l] Packer .D. casing / liner Ø Shoe M. [m ] General Data M. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 A. [psi] Injection Index [bbl/day/psi] Casing Press.p. [m] Open hole Ø Prod.Top perforation Volume [l] Treatment Data Service Company HHP avaible Initial Shut-in pressure [psi] Annulus pressure [psi] Pressure test [psi] Max. 0 REVISION MATRIX STIMULATION/HYDRAULIC FRACTURE REPORT (APRO 09) MATRIX STIMULATION HYDRAULIC FRACTURING District/Affiliate Company DATE: Well Location Onshore Offshore Well Type Vertical Deviated Horizontal Treatment Type Matrix stimulation Acid Solvent Other Hydraulic Fracturing Foam Water base Oil base Other Acid Fracturing Acid Gelled acid Acid + Gel Other Main Frac Treatment Proppant type: API Mesh Size Amount of Propant [t] 3 Total Frac Fluid Vol.5.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 282 OF 295 ENI S.A.V. interval Slotted liner From [m] To [m] ARPO .D. [lb/gal] Press. injection pressure [psi] Pumping time [min] Pumping time [min] Equipment Coiled Tubing [Y / N] Ø Stimulation vessel / Other equipment Operation Description Fluid Ref. injection rate [bpm] Max. Volume [m ] 3 Pumping Parameter Progr.
ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 283 OF 295 ENI S.11 WELL NAME FIELD NAME Cost center SINGLE COMPLETION DUAL COMPLETION General Data RKB Elevation @ m. Weight [lb/ft] Weight [lb/ft] SELECTIVE SHORT STRING LONG STRING Well Code Flanges Base Flange @ m. @ m. WIRELINE REPORT (ARPO 11) 0 REVISION WIRE LINE REPORT District/Affiliate Company DATE: ARPO . @ m.6.D.p.A. @ m. Tbg Spool Top Flange Ø Flowing Flange Ø Kill Line Flange Ø BPV Type Psi Psi Psi Ø Wellhead Pressure Check [Kg/cm2] CHP / / / P P P THP Annulus Annulus Annulus POOL Perforated Zones [Kg/cm 2] [Kg/cm 2] [Kg/cm 2] [Kg/cm 2] Open Hole To [m] From [m] Note Operation Description Situation After the Job NO TOOLS IN HOLE TSV Note BPV SCSSV PLUG OTHER TOOLS Actual Bottom Hole: Max Size Run in Hole Ø Supervisor Superintendent @m . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 A. @ m. String Previous Bottom Hole Request Operation @ m. Tubing Size OD Tubing Size OD Tubing Shoe Ø Packer data Minimum I.
7.A. 0 REVISION PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE SURVEY REPORT (ARPO 12) Cannot Load File form supplied Eni-Agip Excel .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 284 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 A.p.
WELL PROBLEM REPORT (ARPO 13) 0 REVISION District/Affiliate Company WELL PROBLEM REPORT DATE: ARPO -13 Top [m] Bottom [m] FIELD NAME WELL NAME Cost center Start date End date Problem Code Well Situation Open hole Last casing Well problem Description Ø Measured Depth Top [m] Bottom [m] Vertical Depth Top [m] Bottom [m] KOP [m] Type Mud in hole Max inclination [°] @m DROP OFF [m] Dens.[kg/l]: Solutions Applied: Results Obtained: Solutions Applied: Results Obtained: Solutions Applied: Results Obtained: Solutions Applied: Results Obtained: Supervisor Supervisor Supervisor Remarks at District level: Superintendent Lost Time Remarks at HQ level hh:mm Loss value [in currency] Pag.p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 285 OF 295 ENI S. Of .8.A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 A.
A. m SHORT STRING Note Joint n° m LONG STRING Progr. m Note Remarks: Supervisor Superintendent pag. m DUAL COMPLETION Note Joint n° m Progr.p. WELL SITUATION REPORT (ARPO 20) 0 REVISION WELL SITUATION (COMPLETION TALLY) District/Affiliate Company DATE: ARPO 20 / E FIELD NAME WELL NAME Cost center SINGLE COMPLETION Joint n° m Progr.9.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 286 OF 295 ENI S.: of: . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 A.
A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION APPENDIX B .9⋅ 10 in/in/°F for steel) Specific gravity of fluid inside the tubing Specific gravity of fluid outside the tubing Variation in the piston force Variation in the fictitious force Generic variation in the tubing length Variation in length due to Hooke’s Law Variation in length due to buckling Variation in length due to ballooning Variation in length due to thermal effects .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 287 OF 295 ENI S.NOMENCLATURE FOR TUBING CALCULATIONS Ai Ao Ap As D d Dpb E F Fa * Fa Fa tp * Fa tp Ff * Ff I Ff II Ff Ff tp * Ff tp Fp Fso I L n Pi /pi Po /po R r t Tfinal Tinitial w ws wfi wfo α γfi γfo ∆Fa ∆Ff ∆L ∆L1 ∆L2 ∆L3 ∆L4 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = Area inside tubing Area outside tubing Packer-bore area Resistant tubing area (Ao .p.Ai) External diameter of tubing Internal diameter of tubing Packer-bore diameter 7 Young’s module (3⋅10 psi for steel) Generic force applied to the tubing end Piston force at the packer depth Piston force above the packer with anchored tubing Piston force at well head conditions Piston force at well head conditions with anchored tubing Fictitious force Fictitious force above the packer with anchored tubing Fictitious force due to the effect of internal pressure Fictitious force due to the effect of external pressure Fictitious force at well head conditions Fictitious force at well head conditions with anchored tubing Tubing-packer force Slack-off force Moment of inertia of the resistant tubing section Tubing length Distance between the lower end of the tubing and the neutral point Pressure inside the tubing at packer depth / well head Pressure outside the tubing at packer depth / well head Ratio between the external and internal diameters of the tubing Tubing-casing radial distance (Douter casing -D)/2 Tubing wall thickness Final temperature of tubing Initial temperature of tubing Linear weight of the tubing immersed in fluid Linear weight of the tubing in air Linear weight of fluid inside the tubing Linear weight of fluid outside the tubing -6 Coefficient of thermal expansion (6.
A.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 288 OF 295 ENI S.3 for steel) Axial stress in the tubing section Axial stress in the tubing section due to buckling Equivalent axial stress Equivalent axial stress on the inner wall of the tubing Equivalent axial stress on the outer wall of the tubing Material yield axial stress σsn .∆Lp) Variation in pressure inside the tubing Average variation in pressure inside the tubing Average variation in pressure outside the tubing Average variation in tubing temperature Poisson’s coefficient (0. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 ∆Lp ∆Lf ∆lso ∆ltot ∆Pi ∆pim ∆pom ∆TM ν σa σb σeq σi σo σsn Yp = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = 0 REVISION Total variation in length prevented by the packer Variation in length generated by fictitious force Variation in length generated by slack-off force Total variation in length of the tubing (= .p.
A.p.High Temperature International Drilling Contractor Inside Diameter .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 289 OF 295 ENI S. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION APPENDIX C .ABBREVIATIONS API BHA BHP BHT BOP BPD BPM BPV BSW BUR C/L CBL CCL CET CGR CRA C/T DC DE DHSV D&CM DP DST E/L ECD ECP EMW ESD ESP ETA FBHP FBHT FTHP FTHT GLR GOC GOR GP GPM GPS GR HAZOP HP/HT IADC ID American Petroleum Institute Bottom Hole Assembly Bottom Hole Pressure Bottom hole temperature Blow Out Preventer Barrel Per Day Barrels Per Minute Back Pressure Valve Base Sediment & Water Build Up Rate Control Line Cement Bond Log Casing Collar Locator Cement Evaluation Tool Condensate Gas Ratio Corrosion Resistant Alloy Coiled Tubing Drill Collar Diatomaceous Earth Down Hole Safety Valve Drilling & Completion Manager Drill Pipe Drill Stem Test Electric Line Equivalent Circulation Density External Casing Packer Equivalent Mud Weight Electric Shut-Down System Electrical Submersible Pump Expected Arrival Time Flowing Bottom Hole Pressure Flowing Bottom Hole Temperature Flowing Tubing Head Pressure Flowing Tubing Head Temperature Gas Liquid Ratio Gas Oil Contact Gas Oil Ratio Gravel Pack Gallon (US) per Minute Global Positioning System Gamma Ray Hazard and Operability High Pressure .
Quality Control Repeat Formation Test Rotary Kelly Bushing Radius of Exposure Rate Of Penetration Radios Of Uncertainty Remote Operated Vehicle 0 REVISION . Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 IPR JAM KOP LAT LCM LMRP LOT LWD MAASP MD MLH MLS MMS MODU MPI MSL MSS MWD NACE NDT NSG NTU OBM OD OIM ORP OWC P&A PBR PDC PDM PGB PI PLT POB PPB ppg ppm PVT Q Q/AQ RFT RKB ROE ROP ROU ROV Inflow Performance Relationship Joint Make-up Torque Analyser Kick Off Point Lowest Astronomical Tide Lost Circulation Materials Low Marine Riser Package Leak Off Test Log While Drilling Max Allowable Annular Surface Pressure Measured Depth Mud Line Hanger Mud Line Suspension Magnetic Multi Shot Mobile Offshore Drilling Unit Magnetic Particle Inspection Mean Sea Level Magnetic Single Shot Measurement While Drilling National Association of Corrosion Engineers Non Destructive Test North Seeking Gyro Nephelometric Turbidity Unit Oil Base Mud Outside Diameter Offshore Installation Manager Origin Reference Point Oil Water Contact Plugged & Abandoned Polished Bore Receptacle Polycrystalline Diamond Cutter Positive Displacement Motor Permanent Guide Base Productivity Index Production Logging Tool Personnel On Board Pounds per Barrel Pounds per Gallon Part Per Million Pressure Volume Temperature Flow Rate Quality Assurance.A.p.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 290 OF 295 ENI S.
p. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 RPM RT S/N SAFE SBHP SBHT SCC SCSSV SDE SF SG SICP SIDPP SPM SSC SSD SSSV STHP STHT TCP TD TOC TOL TRSV TVD UHF VBR VDL VHF VSP W/L WBM WC WHP WHSIP WOB WOC WOW WP YP Revolutions Per Minute Rotary Table Serial Number Slapper Activated Firing Equipment Static Bottom Hole Pressure Static Bottom Hole Temperature Stress Corrosion Cracking Surface Controlled Subsurface Safety Valve Senior Drilling Engineer Safety Factor Specific Gravity Shut-in Casing Pressure Shut-in Drill Pipe Pressure Stroke per Minute Sulfide Stress Cracking Sliding Sleeve Door Valve Sub Surface Safety Valve Static Tubing Head Pressure Static Tubing Head Temperature Tubing Conveyed Perforations Total Depth Top of Cement Top of Liner Tubing Retrievable Safety Valve True Vertical Depth Ultra High Frequency Variable Bore Rams (BOP) Variable Density Log Very High Frequency Velocity Seismic Profile Wire Line Water Base Mud Water Cut Well Head Pressure Well Head Shut-in Pressure Weight On Bit Wait On Cement Wait On Weather Working Pressure Yield Point 0 REVISION .ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 291 OF 295 ENI S.A.
N C J : ‘ Vertical flow of gas and liquid mixtures in wells’ (1963). 1961. 1994. H D and Brill. Journal of Petroleum Technology. Jones. C H: Well Performance. 53th annual Fall Technical Conference and Exhibition. 1978. API RP 14E ‘Recommended Practices For Design And Installation Of Offshore Production rd Platform Piping Systems. 126 Golan. Dallas. J. 36th Annual Fall Meeting of SPE. 3 edition (Dec 1981) API RP 14E Fourth Edition: ‘Recommended Practice for Design and Installation of Offshore Production Platform Piping System’. Tulsa. February. M and Whiston. 451 Earlougher.A. R C JR and Kersch K M : ‘ Analysis of short-time transient test data by typecurve matching’ (July 1974) 793 Eickmeier. M J : ‘ The Isochronal Testing Oil Wells’ (1973) Forcheimer. Houston.p. Duns. A ‘ A Comprehensive Mechanistic Model For Multiphase Flow In Wells’. K. 1781-1788 (in german) Gilbert. GW and Fogarasi. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION APPENDIX D . Vols 1 And 4. H JR and Ros. Ponwell Publishing Company. Hammerlind: ‘Basic Fluid and Pressure Forces on Oilwell Tubulars’.BIBLIOGRAPHY Document: Drilling Design Manual Connection Procedures Manuals. Other References: Ansari. MS Thesis. October 8-11. The University Of Tulsa (1988) API BUL 5C3 Sixth Edition: ‘Formulas and Calculations for Casing Tubing Drill Pipe. D. April 15. J R : ‘ How To Accurately Predict Future Well Productivities’ ( May 1968) 99-106 Fetkovich. OK. J.P ‘ Wasserbewegung Durch Boden’ (1901) 45. Covier. Arthur Lubinsky: ‘Helical Buckling of Tubing Sealed in Packers’. Aziz. October 1. L G and Glaze. NY (1986) STAP Number STAP P-1-M-6100 STAP M-1-M 5006 . 38-48 Beggs. International Human Resource Development Corporation.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 292 OF 295 ENI S. 1977 Bruist. P . E M. 607617 Blount. Boston. and Line Pipe Properties’. M : ‘ Pressure drop in wells producing oil and gas’ (July Sept 1972). E HY : ‘ Better performance of Gulf Coast wells’( 1974) D. October 1-4. 1977.E: ‘Flowing and Gas-Lift Well Performance’ API Drill and Prod Pract (1954). Forces and Stresses Associated With Combination Tubing Strings Sealed in Packers’. 1984. J P : ‘ A study of two-phase flow in inclined pipes’ (May 1973). W. K E : The Technology Of Artificial Lift Methods. O H : ‘Use of short term multirate flow tests to predict performance of wells having turbulence’ (1976) Brown. Hammerlind: ‘Movement.
K M. R J and Hueni. M B : ‘ Concerning The Calculation Of Inflow Performance Of Wells Producing From Solution Gas Drive Reservoirs’ (Sept 1971) 1141-1142 Texas Railroad Commission Rule 36 Turner. A R and Bingham. M D ‘ A field study of underbalance pressure necessary to obtain clean perforations using tubing-conveyed perforating’ ( June 1986) 662 Lea. OGCI. 1991. Hubard. No 37 Vogel. R G. D R : ‘ Pressure build up in wells’ (1951) Hurst. 1972) Orkiszewski. D. W : ‘ Establishment of skin effect and its impediment to fluid flow into a wellbore’ (Oct 1953) King. G : ‘ Comparison Of Measured And Predicted Pressure Drops In Tubing For High-Water-Cut Gas Wells’ (Aug 1987) 165-177 Saucier. E E and Warren D A JR : ‘ Drill stem test analysis utilising McKinley system of after flow dominated pressure build up’ (Oct. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION Gray. SSCSSV Sizing Computer Program. F : ‘ The Skin Effect And Its Influence On The Productive Capacity Of A Well’ (Oct 1953) Van Poollen. H K : ‘ Radius-Of-Drainage And Stabilisation Time Equations’ (Sept 1964) Vol 62. A R and Brown. G E. (Jan 1970) 97 Rawlins.p. API 14B. Beggs: ‘Production Optimisation Using NODAL Analysis’. Anderson. A E : ‘ Analysis And Predictions Of Minimum Flow Rate For The Continuous Removal Of Liquid From Gas Wells’ (Nov 1969) Van Everdingen. M A : ‘ Back-Pressure Data On Natural Gas Wells And Their Application To Production Practices’ US Bureau Of Mines. K E: ‘ Experimental study of pressure gradients occurring during continuous two-phase flow in small diameter vertical conduits’ ( April 1965) 475-484 Hagedorn and Brown (1967) Horner. H E : ‘ Vertical Flow Correlation-Gas Wells’ API Man 14BM. E L and Schellhardt. M G and Duckler.A. Remer. R J : ‘ Gravel pack design consideration’ (Feb 1974) Standing. 829838 Ramey. 38-40 H. Hagedoorn. (1936) Reinicke. H J JR : ‘ Short-Time Well Test Data Interpretation In The Presence Of Skin Effect And Wellbore Storage. J V : ‘ Inflow Performance Relationships For Solution Gas Drive Wells’.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 293 OF 295 ENI S. J : ‘ Predicting Two-Phase Pressure Drops In Vertical Pipes’ (June 1967). (Jan 1968) 83-93 . J F JR and Tighe. R E : ‘ Gas Well Operations With Liquid Production’ ( 1983) Milner. Tulsa.
which would enable users to design the string starting from an existing material. ‘Vertubing’ produces the results as numerical files. The programme is supported by VAX/VMS computer systems and is currently available at Head Office and in the Districts on the Company computer network. without any graphic display. caused by temperature increases. The application does not enable the user to independently assess dynamic situations such as with production or injection operations. with a string and a high number of packer’s as well (multiple zone completions) and takes into account the fact that packer setting can be mechanical or hydraulic. The programme also enabled users to find an optimal solution by means of the iterative process using a number of approximations and producing results which were more reliable. The ‘Vertubing’ programme provided a calculation tool which significantly reduced times for engineers involved in string calculations. The programme is generally considered to be reliable because the results of three years use have consistently matched actual well applications. It is also possible to check stress tubing’s with varying diameters (tapered string) and to consider materials with anisotropic characteristics. however. ‘VERTUBING’ PROGRAMME The need to fast computing to carry out tubing movement/stress calculations led AGIP to produce the ‘Vertubing’ programme in 1989. possible to take into account the reduction in the performance of some CRA type steels. The programme’s architecture defines a rigid sequence for data entry. The application carries out all functions for tubing control in vertical or deviated wells. The programme does not incorporate a library or collection of data on commonly used tubing material.A. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 0 REVISION APPENDIX E .1.TUBING MOVEMENT/STRESS COMPUTER PROGRAMMES E. . which results in extremely accurate results. It is not.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 294 OF 295 ENI S. This application was based on a previous version designed by a company named ‘Tubmov’ which was run on Hewlett Packard 41CV computers.p. It is necessary to calculate load losses during the relative operation and obtain the resulting fictitious hydrostatic gradient which then lets the user obtain the correct pressures for the various string sections.
p. ranging from drilling.A. Gray. During testing the results were compared to actual field data and a good match was obtained. while the Govier-Aziz formula is used for single stage fluids. and the inability to analyse dual completions. Agip Division STAP-P-1-M-7100 E. which can be read. The WT-Drill module lets the user evaluate the temperatures and pressures during drilling and the casing installation stages. Hagedorn & Brown. VAX Mainframe and UNIX versions. ‘Wellcat’ can be used for single completions. It is possible to evaluate the reduction in material rating due to temperature and any anistropy of materials. The brief description below only describes the parts of the application concerning tubing. is due to this application’s limitations in terms of obtaining the trend of temperatures the string is subject to during various well operations. During processing it is also possible to display and print a simple drawing of the well and the completion. once the temperature profile and lithology of the formations are known. dual completions with a maximum of two packer’s and dual selective completions. to completion and other various well operations. The programme is now used in the company for completion string design and at present available in PC. The most interesting feature of the programme is its capability to evaluate temperatures during and after well operations. The programme also assesses the installation of a hanger in the completion as well as hydraulic or mechanical packer setting. The calculation of load losses and the hydraulic conditions can be carried out using different correlations which are valid for two-stage flow (Beggs & Brill. The ‘Wellcat’ programme was initially tested with the most typical cases (discussed in publications) and appropriate comparisons were made with data previously obtained using the ‘Vertubing’ programme with reasonable results. Orkiszewski. ‘Wellcat’ produces results in ASCII format. The WT-Circ and WT-Prod modules let the user evaluate the temperatures during standard production and circulation operations and the WS-Tube module lets the user calculate tubing movement and stress. Duns & Ross).2. It is also possible to calibrate the average coefficients for thermal exchange and specific heat. The need to use an in-house company programme which was more complex compared to ‘Vertubing’.ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 295 OF 295 ENI S. selective completions with a maximum of five packers. while the resulting stresses the casing is subject to are calculated using the WS-Casing module. printed or exported as graphic files. The programme incorporates five modules. As ‘Vertubing’ had to be integrated with software in ENI-Agip Division and Affiliates expert system (Welcome) it seemed more appropriate to use a modern design programme such as ‘Wellcat’. ‘WELLCAT’ PROGRAMME 0 REVISION Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates recently acquired Enertech’s (1994) ‘Wellcat’ programme which is an application integrating the most specialised software. .
This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?
We've moved you to where you read on your other device.
Get the full title to continue reading from where you left off, or restart the preview.